VE Series Smart Camera

Instruction Manual

Original Instructions
191666 Rev. L
27 October 2021
© Banner Engineering Corp. All rights reserved

191666
VE Series Smart Camera

Contents
1 Product Description ..................................................................................................................................................... 6
1.1 Models .............................................................................................................................................................................................6
2 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................8
2.1 Features ...........................................................................................................................................................................................8
2.1.1 Display .....................................................................................................................................................................................8
2.1.2 Indicators ................................................................................................................................................................................. 8
2.1.3 Buttons .................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.2 Vision Manager Software ................................................................................................................................................................9
3 Specifications and Requirements ............................................................................................................................. 10
3.1 Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................................10
3.2 PC Requirements ...........................................................................................................................................................................10
3.3 Dimensions ................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
3.4 Banner Engineering Corp. Software Copyright Notice ...................................................................................................................12
3.5 Additional Copyright Information ...................................................................................................................................................12
3.6 Trademarks ...................................................................................................................................................................................12
4 Installation Instructions ............................................................................................................................................. 13
4.1 Install the Accessories .................................................................................................................................................................. 13
4.2 Mount the Sensor ..........................................................................................................................................................................13
4.3 Connect the Cables .......................................................................................................................................................................14
4.3.1 Wiring Diagrams ..................................................................................................................................................................... 15
4.4 Install the Software .........................................................................................................................................................................16
5 Getting Started ............................................................................................................................................................17
5.1 Connect to the Sensor .................................................................................................................................................................. 17
5.2 Acquire a Good Image .................................................................................................................................................................. 18
5.3 Set Up an Inspection .....................................................................................................................................................................18
5.3.1 Add a Tool ............................................................................................................................................................................. 18
5.3.2 Rename a Tool ...................................................................................................................................................................... 19
5.3.3 Name an Inspection ...............................................................................................................................................................20
5.3.4 Save an Inspection to a Computer, Network Drive, or Storage Device ..................................................................................20
5.3.5 Modify a Currently Running Inspection ..................................................................................................................................21
5.3.6 Copy a Tool ........................................................................................................................................................................... 21
5.3.7 Delete a Tool ......................................................................................................................................................................... 21
5.3.8 Delete a Tool and All Tools After It ........................................................................................................................................21
5.3.9 Delete an Inspection ..............................................................................................................................................................21
5.4 Configure the Discrete I/O .............................................................................................................................................................22
6 Vision Manager Workspace ....................................................................................................................................... 23
6.1 Home Screen ................................................................................................................................................................................ 23
6.1.1 Sensor Neighborhood .............................................................................................................................................................24
6.1.2 Sensor Maintenance ...............................................................................................................................................................26
6.1.3 Emulators .............................................................................................................................................................................. 27
6.1.4 User Preferences ...................................................................................................................................................................28
6.1.5 About ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
6.2 Sensor Screen .............................................................................................................................................................................. 29
6.2.1 Using the Image Pane: Saving and Loading Images ............................................................................................................ 29
6.2.2 Image Pane Parameters ........................................................................................................................................................30
6.2.3 Summary Pane ......................................................................................................................................................................30
6.2.4 Tools & Results ..................................................................................................................................................................... 32
6.2.5 Tools Only .............................................................................................................................................................................. 33
6.2.6 All Results ..............................................................................................................................................................................33
6.3 Inspection Logs Screen .................................................................................................................................................................34
6.3.1 Log Sources .......................................................................................................................................................................... 34
6.3.2 Loaded Logs ..........................................................................................................................................................................35
6.4 Inspection Management Screen ................................................................................................................................................... 35
6.4.1 Manage ..................................................................................................................................................................................36
6.4.2 Transfer ................................................................................................................................................................................. 37
6.5 System Settings Screen ................................................................................................................................................................38
6.5.1 Sensor Info ............................................................................................................................................................................. 38
6.5.2 Discrete I/O ............................................................................................................................................................................39
6.5.3 Communications ....................................................................................................................................................................41
6.5.4 Logs .......................................................................................................................................................................................47
6.5.5 Units ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 48
6.5.6 User Profiles .......................................................................................................................................................................... 56
6.5.7 System Reset ........................................................................................................................................................................ 58
 VE Series Smart Camera

7 Using the Camera Tool ...............................................................................................................................................59

7.1 Imager ...........................................................................................................................................................................................59
7.2 Trigger ...........................................................................................................................................................................................60
7.3 Focus Information ......................................................................................................................................................................... 61
7.4 External Strobe ............................................................................................................................................................................. 61
7.5 Camera Tool: Results ................................................................................................................................................................... 62
8 Using the Inspection Tools: Vision Tools ................................................................................................................ 63
8.1 Average Gray Tool ........................................................................................................................................................................63
8.1.1 Average Gray Tool: Input Parameters ....................................................................................................................................63
8.1.2 Average Gray Tool: Test Parameters ....................................................................................................................................65
8.1.3 Average Gray Tool: Results .................................................................................................................................................. 66
8.1.4 Using the Average Gray Tool ................................................................................................................................................ 66
8.2 Bead Tool ......................................................................................................................................................................................67
8.2.1 Bead Tool: Input Parameters .................................................................................................................................................67
8.2.2 Bead Tool: Test Parameters ..................................................................................................................................................72
8.2.3 Bead Tool: Results ................................................................................................................................................................ 72
8.2.4 Bead Tool: Adjust the ROI .....................................................................................................................................................73
8.2.5 Using the Bead Tool .............................................................................................................................................................. 75
8.3 Blemish Tool ................................................................................................................................................................................. 77
8.3.1 Blemish Tool: Input Parameters ............................................................................................................................................ 78
8.3.2 Blemish Tool: Test Parameters ............................................................................................................................................. 80
8.3.3 Blemish Tool: Results ............................................................................................................................................................81
8.3.4 Using the Blemish Tool ..........................................................................................................................................................81
8.4 Blob Tool .......................................................................................................................................................................................82
8.4.1 Blob Tool: Input Parameters ..................................................................................................................................................83
8.4.2 Blob Tool: Test Parameters ...................................................................................................................................................87
8.4.3 Blob Tool: Results ................................................................................................................................................................. 87
8.4.4 Using the Blob Tool ............................................................................................................................................................... 91
8.5 Circle Detect Tool ..........................................................................................................................................................................93
8.5.1 Circle Detect Tool: Input Parameters .................................................................................................................................... 94
8.5.2 Circle Detect Tool: Test Parameters ..................................................................................................................................... 97
8.5.3 Circle Detect Tool: Results .................................................................................................................................................... 97
8.5.4 Using the Circle Detect Tool ..................................................................................................................................................98
8.6 Edge Tool ....................................................................................................................................................................................100
8.6.1 Edge Tool: Input Parameters ...............................................................................................................................................100
8.6.2 Edge Tool: Test Parameters ................................................................................................................................................106
8.6.3 Edge Tool: Results .............................................................................................................................................................. 106
8.6.4 Using the Edge and Measure Tools .................................................................................................................................... 107
8.7 Line Detect Tool ...........................................................................................................................................................................109
8.7.1 Line Detect Tool: Input Parameters .....................................................................................................................................109
8.7.2 Line Detect Tool: Test Parameters ......................................................................................................................................112
8.7.3 Line Detect Tool: Results .................................................................................................................................................... 112
8.7.4 Using the Line Detect Tool .................................................................................................................................................. 113
8.8 Locate Tool ................................................................................................................................................................................. 114
8.8.1 Locate Tool: Input Parameters ............................................................................................................................................ 114
8.8.2 Locate Tool: Test Parameters ............................................................................................................................................. 120
8.8.3 Locate Tool: Results ............................................................................................................................................................121
8.8.4 Using the Locate Tool ..........................................................................................................................................................122
8.9 Match Tool .................................................................................................................................................................................. 124
8.9.1 Match Tool: Input Parameters ............................................................................................................................................. 125
8.9.2 Match Tool: Test Parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 128
8.9.3 Match Tool: Results .............................................................................................................................................................129
8.9.4 Using the Match Tool ...........................................................................................................................................................130
8.9.5 Using Remote TEACH with the Match Tool ........................................................................................................................ 132
8.10 Object Tool ................................................................................................................................................................................132
8.10.1 Object Tool: Input Parameters ...........................................................................................................................................132
8.10.2 Object Tool: Test Parameters ............................................................................................................................................138
8.10.3 Object Tool: Results .......................................................................................................................................................... 138
8.10.4 Using the Object Tool ........................................................................................................................................................ 139
9 Using the Inspection Tools: ID Tools ..................................................................................................................... 140
9.1 Barcode Tool ...............................................................................................................................................................................140
9.1.1 ROI ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 140
9.1.2 Barcode Tool: Input Parameters ..........................................................................................................................................140
9.1.3 Barcode Tool: Test Parameters ...........................................................................................................................................147
9.1.4 Barcode Tool: Results ......................................................................................................................................................... 148
9.1.5 Using the Barcode Tool ....................................................................................................................................................... 148
10 Using the Inspection Tools: Analysis Tools ........................................................................................................ 151
10.1 Math Tool .................................................................................................................................................................................. 151
10.1.1 Math Tool: Input Parameters ............................................................................................................................................. 151
10.1.2 Math Tool: Test Parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 153
VE Series Smart Camera

10.1.3 Math Tool: Results .............................................................................................................................................................153

10.1.4 Using the Math Tool .......................................................................................................................................................... 154
10.2 Measure Tool ............................................................................................................................................................................ 155
10.2.1 Measure Tool: Operations .................................................................................................................................................. 155
10.2.2 Measure Tool: Input Parameters ....................................................................................................................................... 156
10.2.3 Measure Tool: Test Parameters ........................................................................................................................................ 158
10.2.4 Measure Tool: Results .......................................................................................................................................................159
10.2.5 Using the Edge and Measure Tools .................................................................................................................................. 159
10.3 Logic Tool ..................................................................................................................................................................................161
10.3.1 Logic Tool: Input Parameters ............................................................................................................................................ 162
10.3.2 Logic Tool: Test Parameters ............................................................................................................................................. 163
10.3.3 Logic Tool: Results ............................................................................................................................................................ 163
10.3.4 Using the Logic Tool ..........................................................................................................................................................164
11 Emulators ................................................................................................................................................................ 166
11.1 Backup or Restore the Emulator ...............................................................................................................................................166
12 Sensor Display .........................................................................................................................................................167
12.1 Sensor Display Interface ...........................................................................................................................................................167
12.2 Locking and Unlocking the Sensor ............................................................................................................................................167
12.3 Sensor Menu .............................................................................................................................................................................168
12.4 Ethernet Menu (ETHER) ...........................................................................................................................................................169
12.5 Product Change Menu (PCHANGE) .........................................................................................................................................169
12.6 Input/Output Menu (IO) ............................................................................................................................................................. 169
12.7 Image Menu (IMAGE) ............................................................................................................................................................... 169
12.8 Information Menu (INFO) .......................................................................................................................................................... 169
12.9 System Error Menu (SYSERR) ................................................................................................................................................. 170
12.10 Display Menu (DISPLAY) ........................................................................................................................................................170
12.11 Reboot Menu (REBOOT) ........................................................................................................................................................170
13 Communications Guide ......................................................................................................................................... 171
13.1 Communication Summary .........................................................................................................................................................171
13.1.1 Communication Channels ................................................................................................................................................. 171
13.1.2 Industrial Ethernet ............................................................................................................................................................. 171
13.1.3 Data Export ........................................................................................................................................................................171
13.1.4 Image Export: TCP/IP ........................................................................................................................................................173
13.1.5 Image Export: FTP ............................................................................................................................................................ 176
13.1.6 Input String: TCP/IP ...........................................................................................................................................................178
13.2 Enabling Communications ........................................................................................................................................................ 179
13.2.1 Setting Up Ethernet Communications ............................................................................................................................... 179
13.2.2 Windows 7 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 179
13.2.3 Communications Channel Ports ......................................................................................................................................... 179
14 Industrial Ethernet Overview ................................................................................................................................. 180
14.1 Industrial Ethernet Setup ...........................................................................................................................................................180
14.1.1 Set the Industrial Ethernet Protocol (EtherNet/IP™, PROFINET®, Modbus/TCP, PCCC) ................................................ 180
14.1.2 Set the Trigger Mode .........................................................................................................................................................180
14.2 Supported Functions .................................................................................................................................................................180
14.2.1 Sensor Input Values .......................................................................................................................................................... 181
14.2.2 Sensor Output Values ....................................................................................................................................................... 181
14.3 EtherNet/IP™ .............................................................................................................................................................................182
14.3.1 Inputs to the Sensor (Outputs from the PLC) .................................................................................................................... 185
14.3.2 Outputs from the Sensor (Inputs to the PLC) .................................................................................................................... 186
14.3.3 Input and Output Bits .........................................................................................................................................................188
14.3.4 Tool Pass/Fail Bits .............................................................................................................................................................188
14.3.5 Tool-Specific Results: EtherNet/IP ..................................................................................................................................... 188
14.3.6 Configuration Assembly Object .......................................................................................................................................... 190
14.3.7 Data Formats ......................................................................................................................................................................190
14.3.8 Minimum Requested Packet Interval (RPI) Value ............................................................................................................. 190
14.3.9 VE Series Smart Camera EDS File Installation in ControlLogix Software ..........................................................................190
14.3.10 RSLogix5000 Configuration ..............................................................................................................................................195
14.4 Modbus/TCP ............................................................................................................................................................................. 202
14.4.1 Sensor Input Values ........................................................................................................................................................... 207
14.4.2 VE Series camera Output Values .......................................................................................................................................208
14.4.3 Input and Output Bits ..........................................................................................................................................................208
14.4.4 Tool Pass/Fail Bits .............................................................................................................................................................209
14.4.5 Tool-Specific Results: Modbus/TCP ..................................................................................................................................209
14.5 PLC5, SLC500, and MicroLogix (PCCC) .................................................................................................................................. 211
14.5.1 Configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................... 214
14.5.2 Inputs to the Sensor (Outputs from the PLC) ..................................................................................................................... 218
14.5.3 Outputs from the Sensor (Inputs to the PLC) ..................................................................................................................... 218
14.5.4 Input and Output Bits ..........................................................................................................................................................219
14.5.5 Tool Pass/Fail Bits .............................................................................................................................................................219
14.5.6 Tool-Specific Results: PCCC .............................................................................................................................................220
 VE Series Smart Camera

14.6 PROFINET® ...............................................................................................................................................................................221

14.6.1 General Station Description (GSD) File ..............................................................................................................................221
14.6.2 PROFINET® IO Data Model ............................................................................................................................................... 221
14.6.3 Configure the VE Series Smart Camera for a PROFINET IO Connection ........................................................................ 221
14.6.4 Description of Modules and Submodules ........................................................................................................................... 222
14.6.5 Description of Submodules ................................................................................................................................................223
14.6.6 Configuration Instructions ..................................................................................................................................................230
14.7 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................................................................ 240
14.7.1 Industrial Ethernet Error Codes ......................................................................................................................................... 240
14.7.2 PROFINET ......................................................................................................................................................................... 241
15 Webserver Image Viewing ...................................................................................................................................... 244
15.1 Image Size ................................................................................................................................................................................ 244
15.2 Images on Example HMIs .........................................................................................................................................................245
15.3 Images on a Web Browser ........................................................................................................................................................247
16 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................................................... 248
16.1 Vision Manager Error Codes .....................................................................................................................................................248
16.2 VE Error and Warning Codes .....................................................................................................................................................259
16.3 TCP and UDP Port Numbers .................................................................................................................................................... 260
17 Accessories ..............................................................................................................................................................261
17.1 Cordsets ....................................................................................................................................................................................261
17.2 Brackets .................................................................................................................................................................................... 262
17.3 Lenses .......................................................................................................................................................................................262
17.3.1 WVGA Lens Working Distance and Field of View .............................................................................................................. 263
17.3.2 1.3 MP Lens Working Distance and Field of View .............................................................................................................263
17.3.3 2 MP Lens Working Distance and Field of View ................................................................................................................264
17.3.4 5 MP Lens Working Distance and Field of View ................................................................................................................265
17.4 C-Mount Lens Filter Models ......................................................................................................................................................265
17.5 Sealed Lens Cover ....................................................................................................................................................................266
17.6 Display Cover ............................................................................................................................................................................266
17.7 Ring Lights ................................................................................................................................................................................ 266
17.8 Interface Module ....................................................................................................................................................................... 268
18 Product Support and Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 269
18.1 Repairs ......................................................................................................................................................................................269
18.2 Maintenance ..............................................................................................................................................................................269
18.2.1 Clean the VE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 269
18.2.2 Clean the Lens ................................................................................................................................................................... 269
18.2.3 Update the Software and Firmware ....................................................................................................................................269
18.3 Contact Us ................................................................................................................................................................................. 269
18.4 Banner Engineering Corp Limited Warranty ............................................................................................................................. 269
VE Series Smart Camera

1 Product Description
Self-contained Smart Camera with User-Friendly Vision Manager Software
• Banner’s free and easy-to-use Vision Manager Software provides a
number of tools and capabilities that enable VE Series smart cameras to
solve a wide range of vision or identification applications, such as item
detection, part positioning, feature measurement, flaw analysis, and
barcode reading
• Runtime editing capability reduces costly downtime and the software
emulator allows for offline building and troubleshooting of applications
• Factory communications (EtherNet/IP™, Modbus/TCP, PROFINET®, FTP
and Serial RS-232) for integration on the manufacturing floor
• Six optically isolated I/O and an external light connector on the smart
camera
• Two-line, eight-character onboard display provides smart camera
information and focus number and makes it easy to update the smart
camera settings, facilitating fast product changeover
• Robust metal housing with optional sealed lens covers to achieve IP67
rating for use in harsh environments with heat, vibration, or moisture
• Bright indicator lights for easy viewing of smart camera status

WARNING:
• Do not use this device for personnel protection
• Using this device for personnel protection could result in serious injury or death.
• This device does not include the self-checking redundant circuitry necessary to allow its use in
personnel safety applications. A device failure or malfunction can cause either an energized (on)
or de-energized (off) output condition.

Important:
• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive device
• ESD can damage the device. Damage from inappropriate handling is not covered by warranty.
• Use proper handling procedures to prevent ESD damage. Proper handling procedures include
leaving devices in their anti-static packaging until ready for use; wearing anti-static wrist straps; and
assembling units on a grounded, static-dissipative surface.

CAUTION: Hot Surface

Use caution when handling the camera. The surface of the camera may be hot during operation and
immediately after use.

1.1 Models
Model 2 Resolution Type

VE200G1A WVGA, 752 × 480 pixels grayscale Vision

VE201G1A 1.3 MP, 1280 × 1024 pixels grayscale Vision

VE202G1A 2 MP, 1600 × 1200 pixels grayscale Vision

VE205G1A 5 MP, 2592 × 2048 pixels grayscale Vision

VE200G1B WVGA, 752 × 480 pixels grayscale ID

VE201G1B 1.3 MP, 1280 × 1024 pixels grayscale ID

VE202G1B 2 MP, 1600 × 1200 pixels grayscale ID

VE205G1B 5 MP, 2592 × 2048 pixels grayscale ID

VE200G1C WVGA, 752 × 480 pixels grayscale Vision + ID

VE201G1C 1.3 MP, 1280 × 1024 pixels grayscale Vision + ID

2 Model VE202G2A, 2 MP, 1600 × 1200 grayscale with 4-pin D-code M12 Ethernet connection is also available.

6 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Model 2 Resolution Type

VE202G1C 2 MP, 1600 × 1200 pixels grayscale Vision + ID

VE205G1C 5 MP, 2592 × 2048 pixels grayscale Vision + ID

2 Model VE202G2A, 2 MP, 1600 × 1200 grayscale with 4-pin D-code M12 Ethernet connection is also available.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 7

VE Series Smart Camera

2 Overview
The VE Series Smart Camera is easy to use and has advanced visual inspection or identification capabilities for automation
or control applications. Users can quickly set up the sensor using the Vision Manager software to solve a diverse range of
applications on the factory floor.

2.1 Features
Figure 1. Sensor Features

3
4
2 5
1. Display
1 2. Buttons
3. Pass/Fail indicator (green/red)
4. Ready/Trigger indicator (green/amber)
5. Power/Error indicator (green/red)
6. Ethernet indicator (amber), not shown
7. Ethernet connection
8. Light connection
9. Power, Discrete I/O connection

7
6 8
9

2.1.1 Display
Figure 2. Display with Home Screen
The display is a 2-line, 8-character LCD. The main screen is
the Home Screen, which shows the name of the current
inspection and the slot number (inspection location). Use the
display to view or change several sensor settings.

2.1.2 Indicators
Four LED indicators provide ongoing indication of the sensing status.

Power/Error Indicator Pass/Fail Indicator

Green = Normal operation Green = Previous inspection passed
Red = System error Red = Previous inspection failed
OFF = No trigger since power up
Ready/Trigger Indicator
Ethernet Indicator
Green = Ready for trigger
Amber solid = Ethernet connection
Yellow = Trigger is active
Amber flashing = Ethernet activity
OFF = Not ready for a trigger, triggers will be missed
OFF = no connection

2.1.3 Buttons
Use the sensor buttons Down , Up , Enter , and Escape to configure several sensor settings and to access
sensor information. See Figure 318 on p. 168 for additional information on using the buttons.

8 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

2.2 Vision Manager Software

Set up the VE Series Smart Camera using the free Vision Manager Software, available for download at
www.bannerengineering.com.
This easy-to-use image processing software provides a variety of tools and capabilities to solve a wide range of vision
applications such as item detection, part positioning, feature measurement, flaw analysis, and barcode reading. Run-time
editing allows you to make changes to an inspection while the sensor is running, reducing costly downtime. Vision Manager
also includes a full software emulator, allowing users to develop or troubleshoot inspections offline, without a sensor.
Password-protected user profiles are also available to enable different levels of access to the tools and data.
Use Vision Manager to configure Banner vision devices including iVu Vision Sensors and VE Smart Cameras.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 9

VE Series Smart Camera

3 Specifications and Requirements

3.1 Specifications
Power Memory
12 V dc to 30 V dc (24 V dc ± 10% if a Banner light source is powered by Device Settings and Inspection Storage Memory: 500 MB
the sensor) Number of inspection files: 999
Current: 400 mA maximum (exclusive of load and lights)
Use only with a suitable Class 2 power supply, or current limiting power Acquisition
supply rated 12 V DC to 30 V DC, 1 A 256 grayscale levels
Supply Protection Circuitry Model Frames Per Second 3 Image Size
Protected against reverse polarity and transient overvoltages
Discrete I/O VE200G1x 60 fps, maximum 752 × 480 px
1 Trigger IN VE201G1x 60 fps, maximum 1280 × 1024 px
5 Programmable I/O
VE202Gxx 50 fps, maximum 1600 × 1200 px
Output Configuration
Optically isolated VE205G1x 22 fps, maximum 2592 × 2048 px
Output Rating
Output Resistance: < 2 Ω
Strobe Output Resistance: < 13 Ω
Programmable Output: 100 mA Torque—Tapped Holes for Mounting Screws
External Strobe Output: 100 mA 8 lbf·in (0.9 N·m) maximum torque
Off-State Leakage Current: < 100 µA Construction
External Light Maximum Current Draw Housing: Aluminum
350 mA Display Label: Polyester
Exposure Time Connections
0.01 ms to 500 ms Ethernet: M12, 8-pin A-code or 4-pin D-code female
Light Connector: M8, 3-pin female
Power, Discrete I/O: M12, 12-pin male

Imager Environmental Rating

VE200G1x: 4.1 mm × 2.6 mm, 4.9 mm diagonal (1/3-inch CMOS) IP67 with an optional sealed lens cover properly installed
VE201G1x: 6.9 mm × 5.5 mm, 8.7 mm diagonal (1/1.8-inch CMOS) Operating Conditions
VE202Gxx: 7.2 mm × 5.4 mm, 9.0 mm diagonal (1/1.8-inch CMOS)
Operating Temperature: 0 °C to +50 °C (+32 °F to +122 °F)
VE205G1x: 12.4 mm × 9.8 mm, 15.9 mm diagonal (1-inch CMOS)
95% maximum relative humidity (non-condensing)
Lens Stable Ambient Lighting: No large, quick changes in light level; no
C-mount direct or reflected sunlight
Storage Temperature: –30 °C to +70 °C (–22 °F to +158 °F)
Pixel Size
VE200G1x: 5.3 µm Vibration and Mechanical Shock
VE201G1x: 5.3 µm Meets EN 60947-5-2: IEC 60068-2-27 (Shock: 30G); IEC 60068-2-6
VE202Gxx: 4.5 µm (Vibration: 10 Hz to 60 Hz, 1 mm amplitude)
VE205G1x: 4.8 µm Certifications
Communication
10/100/1000 4 Mbps Ethernet Information
Technology
Equipment
Communication Protocols E365235
Ethernet/IP™, Modbus/TCP, PCCC, PROFINET®, TCP/IP, FTP, and
RS-232

3.2 PC Requirements
Operating System Processor
Microsoft® Windows® operating system version 7, 8, or 10 5 1 GHz minimum, 2 GHz+ recommended
System Type Screen Resolution
32-bit, 64-bit 1024 × 768 full color minimum, 1650 × 1050 full color recommended
Hard Drive Space Third-Party Software
80 MB (plus up to 280 MB for Microsoft .NET 4.5, if not already installed) Microsoft .NET 4.5, PDF Viewer (such as Adobe Acrobat)
Memory (RAM) USB Port
512 MB minimum, 1 GB+ recommended USB 3.0, recommended if a USB to Ethernet adapter used to
communicate with the sensor

3 This value can vary based on inspection settings.

4 1000 Mbps communication speed not available on 4-pin Ethernet models
5 Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

10 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Important: Administrative rights are required to install the Vision Manager software.

3.3 Dimensions
All measurements are listed in millimeters [inches], unless noted otherwise.

Engaging more
than 3.00 mm
will damage device.

* 41,6 [1.64] for 5 MP (VE205G1A) models

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 11

VE Series Smart Camera

3.4 Banner Engineering Corp. Software Copyright Notice

This software is protected by copyright, trade secret, and other intellectual property laws. You are only granted the right to use the software and only for the purposes described
by Banner. Banner reserves all other rights in this software. For so long as you have obtained an authorized copy of this software directly from Banner, Banner grants you a
limited, nonexclusive, nontransferable right and license to use this software.
You agree not to use, nor permit any third party to use, this software or content in a manner that violates any applicable law, regulation or terms of use under this Agreement.
You agree that you will not reproduce, modify, copy, deconstruct, sell, trade or resell this software or make it available to any file-sharing or application hosting service.
Disclaimer of Warranties. Your use of this software is entirely at your own risk, except as described in this agreement. This software is provided "AS-IS." To the maximum
extent permitted by applicable law, Banner, it affiliates, and its channel partners disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, including any warranty that the software is fit for a
particular purpose, title, merchantability, data loss, non-interference with or non-infringement of any intellectual property rights, or the accuracy, reliability, quality or content in or
linked to the services. Banner and its affiliates and channel partners do not warrant that the services are secure, free from bugs, viruses, interruption, errors, theft or destruction.
If the exclusions for implied warranties do not apply to you, any implied warranties are limited to 60 days from the date of first use of this software.
Limitation of Liability and Indemnity. Banner, its affiliates and channel partners are not liable for indirect, special, incidental, punitive or consequential damages, damages
relating to corruption, security, loss or theft of data, viruses, spyware, loss of business, revenue, profits, or investment, or use of software or hardware that does not meet Banner
minimum systems requirements. The above limitations apply even if Banner and its affiliates and channel partners have been advised of the possibility of such damages. This
Agreement sets forth the entire liability of Banner, its affiliates and your exclusive remedy with respect to the software use. You agree to indemnify and hold Banner and its
affiliates and channel partners harmless from any and all claims, liability and expenses, including reasonable attorney's fees and costs, arising out of your use of the Services or
breach of this Agreement (collectively referred to as "Claims"). Banner reserves the right at its sole discretion and at its own expense, to assume the exclusive defense and
control of any Claims. You agree to reasonably cooperate as requested by Banner in defense of any Claims.

3.5 Additional Copyright Information

The Vision Manager software includes code that is copyright (c) 1985, 1989 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the
University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

3.6 Trademarks
ControlLogix® is a trademark of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
EtherNet/IP™ is a trademark of ODVA, Inc.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
PROFINET® is a registered trademark of PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V.
All other trademarks and registered trademarks cited are the property of their respective owners.

12 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

4 Installation Instructions
4.1 Install the Accessories
1. VE sensor
Figure 3. Install the Accessories 2. O-ring (used with the sealed lens cover)
3. C-mount lens (available separately)
1 4. Filter (optional)
2 5. Sealed lens cover (optional)
3 5
4 An external light (optional) is not shown.

Note: A sealed lens cover and a ring light cannot be used

together.

1. If you are using a sealed lens cover: Remove the black thread protector (not shown) from the sensor (1).
2. If you are using a sealed lens cover: Fit a single o-ring (2) into the undercut area behind the sensor threads.
3. Remove the yellow temporary imager cover (not shown) from the sensor.

CAUTION: Do not remove the imager cover until you are ready to install the lens. Do not touch the
imager. Dirt or dust on the imager can affect sensing reliability.
4. Remove any protective covers from the lens. Handle the lens carefully to avoid smudges and dirt on the optical
elements.
5. Thread the lens (3) onto the sensor.
6. Make sure that the lens is focused; see Acquire a Good Image on p. 18.
7. Use the thumbscrews on the lens to lock the focus and aperture rings and to prevent movement that can occur during
cleaning or accidental contact.
8. If you are using a filter: Thread the filter (4) onto the front of the C-mount lens.
9. If you are using a linear polarization filter: Rotate the outer portion of the filter mount to determine the position where
glare is reduced the most, and use the locking thumbscrew to fasten the filter in position.
10. If you are using a sealed lens cover: Thread the sealed lens cover (5) onto the threaded portion of the sensor.
11. Or, if you are using an external light bracket: Attach an external light bracket to the sensor using the provided
hardware kit.

Note: For optimal imaging, provide adequate dissipation of heat. A good heat conductor, such as
aluminum, may be required.

4.2 Mount the Sensor

1. If a bracket is needed, mount the device onto the bracket.
2. Mount the device (or the device and the bracket) to the machine or equipment at the desired location. Do not tighten
the mounting screws at this time.

CAUTION: This device accepts M3×0.5-h6 screws. Engaging the screws more than 3.00 mm will
damage the device.
3. Check the device alignment.
4. Tighten the mounting screws to secure the device (or the device and the bracket) in the aligned position.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 13

VE Series Smart Camera

4.3 Connect the Cables

Figure 4. Cable Connections
1. Power, Discrete I/O connection
2. Light connection
2 3 3. Ethernet connection
1
4. Ethernet indicator
4

1. Connect the Ethernet cable to the sensor (3) and to the computer or Ethernet switch.
2. Connect the power, discrete I/O cable to the sensor (1), and the leads to the appropriate locations. See Table 1 on p.
14 for the power, discrete I/O connections.

CAUTION: Connect Sensor to Earth Ground

The device should be electrically connected to earth ground by at least one method, either through
the mounting hardware, or the shield of the power cable.
3. Connect the external light cable (optional) to the light connection (2) if the light is powered by the sensor.

CAUTION: Use Appropriate Power

If the light is powered by the sensor, the sensor power source must be 24 V DC. This connection
is for Banner lights only.

Table 1: Power and I/O Pinouts

Pin Wire Color Description Direction

1 White Discrete I/O #3 Input/Output

2 Brown 12 V dc to 30 V dc Input

3 Green I/O output common -

Important: For PNP (sourcing) outputs connect pin 3 to

+V dc, for NPN (sinking) outputs connect pin 3 to 0 V dc.
The discrete I/O pins are 1, 5, 8, 10, and 11.

4 Yellow RS-232 TX (transmit) Output

5 Gray Discrete I/O #5 Input/Output

6 Pink Trigger input Input

7 Blue Common Input

8 Red Discrete I/O #2 Input/Output

9 Orange I/O input common -

Important: For PNP (sourcing) inputs connect pin 9 to 0

V dc, for NPN (sinking) inputs connect pin 9 to +V dc.
The discrete I/O pins are 1, 5, 6, 8, 10, and 11.

10 Light Blue Discrete I/O #4 Input/Output

11 Black Discrete I/O #1 Input/Output

12 Violet RS-232 RX (receive) Input

Shield Bare metal Chassis ground -

14 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

4.3.1 Wiring Diagrams

Figure 5. PNP Output Figure 6. NPN Output

VE VE VE Output
Output Common +
Output
12–30 V dc Power +
Load Output
- Supply
Load 12-30V dc Power
- Supply
VE Output Output Common

Figure 7. PNP Input Figure 8. NPN Input

VE
VE Input VE
Input Common +
Input
+ 12–30 V dc Power
PNP Driver Input
- Supply
12–30 V dc Power NPN Driver
Opto-isolator - Supply
Opto-isolator
Input Common
VE Input

Figure 9. PNP Inputs and Outputs

PNP Inputs & Outputs

2
+
VE 7
-
12-30V dc
11
8
Load I/O 1 - Output* 1 = White
I/O 2 - Output*
2 = Brown
Load
1
Load I/O 3 - Output*
10
I/O 4 - Input**
3 = Green
5
I/O 5 - Input** 4 = Yellow
6 Trigger - Input 5 = Gray
3
Output Common
6 = Pink
9
Input Common 7 = Blue
4
RS-232 TX 8 = Red
12
RS-232 RX 9 = Orange
10 = Light Blue
Input Power + 11 = Black
12-30V dc
Supply - 12 = Violet
Output Power +
12-30V dc
Supply -

This is a typical example. Applications may vary.

*Programmable I/O shown set as an output in this example
**Programmable I/O shown set as an input in this example

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 15

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 10. NPN Inputs and Outputs

NPN Inputs & Outputs

2
+
VE 7
-
12–30 V dc
11
Load I/O 1 - Output* 1 = White
8
1
Load I/O 2 - Output* 2 = Brown
I/O 3 - Output*
10
Load
3 = Green
I/O 4 - Input**
5 4 = Yellow
I/O 5 - Input**
6 5 = Gray
Trigger - Input
6 = Pink
3
Output Common 7 = Blue
9
Input Common
4 8 = Red
RS-232 TX
12 9 = Orange
RS-232 RX
10 = Light Blue
11 = Black
Input Power - 12 = Violet
12–30 V dc
Supply +

Output Power -
12–30 V dc
Supply +

This is a typical example. Applications may vary.

* Programmable I/O shown set as an output in this example.
** Programmable I/O shown set as an input in this example.

4.4 Install the Software

Important: Administrative rights are required to install the Vision Manager software.

1. Download the latest version of the software from www.bannerengineering.com.

2. Navigate to and open the downloaded file.
3. Click Next to begin the installation process.
4. Confirm the software destination and availability for users and click Next.
5. Click Install to install the software.
6. Depending on your system settings, a popup window may appear prompting to allow Vision Manager to make
changes to your computer. Click Yes.
7. Click Close to exit the installer.

16 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

5 Getting Started
Power up the sensor, and verify that the power/error LED is ON green and that the Ethernet indicator is ON amber to verify
the Ethernet connection.

5.1 Connect to the Sensor

These instructions use Windows® operating system version 7, 8, or 10. 6
1. Confirm the network connections.
a) Click the Start button, then on the Start menu, click Control Panel.
b) In Control Panel, click Network and Internet, then click Network and Sharing Center, and then click Change
adapter settings.
c) Right-click on the connection that you want to change, then click Properties.
If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, enter the password or provide confirmation.
d) In the connection properties, click Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4), and then click Properties.
Figure 11. Local Area Connection Properties

e) In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IPv4) Properties, select Use the following IP address.
f) Make sure that the IP address is 192.168.0.2, and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
2. Open Vision Manager from the desktop or the Start menu.
The Sensor Neighborhood tab displays and lists the available sensors.
3. From Sensor Neighborhood, click to connect to the desired sensor.
The status changes from Available to Connected and the Sensor screen displays. Click to disconnect
from the sensor.
4. If the desired sensor is not listed, verify that:
• The network adapter connected to the sensor has the same subnet mask as the sensor (for example,
192.168.0.xxx); view the subnet mask in the Network Adapters list at Home > Sensor Neighborhood >
Network Adapters
• The Ethernet cable is the correct type
• The TCP/IPv4 settings are correct
Or, manually enter the sensor's IP address.

Note: The sensor's IP address and subnet mask are also available from the sensor display.

6 Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 17

VE Series Smart Camera

5.2 Acquire a Good Image

The sensor needs to capture a good image of each part to ensure that it correctly passes good parts and fails bad parts.
1. Make sure that the lighting is appropriate for your target. Use supplementary lighting, such as a ring light, if
necessary.
2. Click the Sensor screen.
3. Click the camera tool on Tools and Results.
The Inputs parameters display.
4. Set the trigger.
a) Expand the Trigger parameters.
b) In the Trigger Mode list, click Internal (continuous images).
5. Run Auto Exposure.
a) Expand the Imager parameters.
b) Expand the Auto Exposure parameters, and click Start to run.
6. Check the lighting on the part.
• Make sure that the lighting is constant and consistent (unchanging over time, no shadows or hot spots)
• Capture the shape and form of the target object with lighting that optimizes its contrast and separates the feature
of interest from the background. Depending on the target, consider other Banner lights
• Adjust the mounting angle to provide the clearest image of the part features you are inspecting
7. After checking and adjusting the lighting, run Auto Exposure a second time or adjust the exposure manually by
expanding the Exposure parameters and moving the slider or entering a specific exposure time.
8. Adjust the focus.
a) Place the part so that the area to be focused appears in the center of the Image pane.
b) Expand the Focus Info parameters.
c) Make sure that the Focus Info checkbox is selected.
d) Adjust the focus of the lens while monitoring the focus number.
The focus number is a number between 1 and 255. Use the Image pane to determine when the image is sharp
enough, or use the focus number as a guide. Turn the focus ring on the lens until the focus number is at the
highest possible number between 1 and 255. The focus number is also available on the sensor display.

Note: There is no optimal value for this number, but it can be used as a guide if you are setting
up more than one sensor that are focused on the same target.
e) Tighten the locking thumbscrews to secure the lens at the desired focus.

5.3 Set Up an Inspection

Vision Manager allows you to set up or make changes to an inspection while the sensor is running. Changes are
automatically saved as they are made.
1. From the Sensor screen, click in the upper right corner to view the inspection list.
2. Click Add New Inspection.
A new inspection is added to the list, the Image pane updates, and the Tools & Results tab shows only the camera
tool.

Note: The camera tool for the new inspection inherits the parameters of the camera tool for the
previous inspection, however the two are not linked together.
3. Add tools and adjust them as needed for the inspection.

5.3.1 Add a Tool

1. Click on the Tools & Results tab.
The Add Tool window opens.
2. Click the desired tool.

Note: Not all tools are available for all VE models, with the exception of Vision + ID models.

18 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Available on:
Tool Name Description Vision ID Models
Models

Evaluates pixel brightness within an ROI and computes the average grayscale x
Average Gray value. See Average Gray Tool on p. 63.

Inspects parts for uniformity of adhesive or sealant material, or for uniformity x

Bead of a gap. See Bead Tool on p. 67.

Finds and reads 1D and 2D barcodes. See Barcode Tool on p. 140. x

Barcode

Determines whether flaws are present on a part, or detects whether a feature x

Blemish exists on a part. See Blemish Tool on p. 77.

Detects and counts/locates groups of connected light or dark pixels within the x
Blob ROI and designates them as blobs (Binary Large Objects). After blobs are
found, they can be characterized by size and shape. See Blob Tool on p.
82.

Detects a single circle or piece of a circle (arc). See Circle Detect Tool on p. x
Circle Detect 93.

Detects and counts transitions between bright and dark pixels (edges). Counts x
Edge the total number of edges, and determines the position of each edge. See
Edge Tool on p. 100.

Locates a single, straight line segment by finding edge points along bright or x
Line Detect dark pixel transitions and fitting a line to those points. See Line Detect Tool on
p. 109

Finds the first edge on a part and compensates for translation and rotation of x x
Locate downstream tools (if selected). See Locate Tool on p. 114.

Verifies that a pattern, shape, or part in any orientation matches a reference x

Match pattern. Can also compensate for translation and rotation of downstream tools
(if selected). See Match Tool on p. 124.

Detects the edges of dark and bright segments and locates their midpoints. x
Object Counts dark and bright segments, and measures the width of each dark and
bright segment. See Object Tool on p. 132.

Performs mathematical operations using tool data or user-supplied constants. x x

Math Includes basic arithmetic, inequality expressions, and statistical information.
See Math Tool on p. 151.

Measures distance, calculates angles, and creates points and lines for use as x
Measure inputs to other tools. See Measure Tool on p. 155.

Uses Boolean logic to combine or convert tool results, or to drive discrete x x

Logic outputs from tool results. Logic tool data can be used to evaluate the results of
a single tool or multiple tools. See Logic Tool on p. 161.

The tool is added to Tools & Results and the region of interest (ROI) appears on the Image pane.
3. Configure the tool as needed for your application.
a) Resize and rotate the ROI around the feature to be analyzed.
b) Define or view parameters for the tool on the Input tab, such as ROI shape, threshold, or view the histogram.
c) Define pass or fail criteria on the Test tab, such as the count, size, or match.

5.3.2 Rename a Tool

The default tool name is tool01, tool02, and so on, where the word tool is replaced by the appropriate name (for example,
Locate01, Edge02, etc.).
1. On Tools & Results or on Tools Only, click the tool to select it.
2. Highlight the tool name.
3. Enter the desired tool name.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 19

VE Series Smart Camera

Note: Use only letters, numbers, spaces, and the underscore in the tool name.

5.3.3 Name an Inspection

The default inspection name is Inspection01, Inspection02, and so on. Rename the inspection to something meaningful to
the application.
1. Click Inspection Management, then click Manage.
Figure 12. Manage

2. Double-click the name of the desired inspection.

3. Enter the new inspection name.

Note: Use only letters, numbers, spaces, and the underscore in the inspection name.
4. Press Enter or click off of the name to save the new name.

5.3.4 Save an Inspection to a Computer, Network Drive, or Storage

Device
Vision Manager automatically saves inspections to the VE as they are created and modified. Save a copy of the inspection to
your computer or another network location if you want to be able to go back to previous settings.
Use the following procedure to save a copy of an inspection to your computer or a network location.
1. On the Inspection Management screen, click Transfer.
Figure 13. Transfer

2. Change the destination folder, if desired.

a) Click above the right column.
An explorer window opens.
b) Navigate to the desired location, network location, or storage device.
c) Click Select Folder.
The folder is selected and the window closes.
The path to the location displays above the right column.
3. Select the desired inspection from the inspection list in the left column.

20 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

4. Click .
Inspection name.idb displays in the right column and the inspection is transferred (saved) to the selected location.

5.3.5 Modify a Currently Running Inspection

1. On the Sensor screen, select the desired inspection from the Inspection list.
The inspection tools and parameters display.
2. Make the desired modifications to the inspection.

Important: Changes are automatically saved as they are made. Save a copy of the inspection if
you want to be able to go back to previous settings. Use the Emulator to set up or make changes to
an inspection offline.

5.3.6 Copy a Tool

Duplicate (copy) a tool to include more than one of the same tool in an inspection.
1. Click the desired tool to duplicate.
2. Click .
A duplicate of the tool is created with the same input and test parameters.
3. Set the tool parameters as desired. The two tools are not linked; changes are independent of each other.

5.3.7 Delete a Tool

Use the following procedure to delete a tool from an inspection.
1. Click the tool on Tools & Results or Tools Only to select it.
2. Click .
The tool is deleted.

Note: There is no undo option. A deleted tool cannot be recovered.

5.3.8 Delete a Tool and All Tools After It

Use the following procedure to delete a selected tool and all of the tools after it.
1. Click the tool on Tools & Results or on Tools Only to select it.
2. Click .
The message "Remove selected tool and all tools after it?" displays.
3. Click Continue.
The tools are deleted.

Note: There is no undo option. Deleted tools cannot be recovered.

5.3.9 Delete an Inspection

1. Click Inspection Management, then click Manage.
2. Select the inspection to be deleted.

Note: This inspection cannot be running and it cannot be selected to begin at startup.
3. Click .
The inspection name turns red and "Inspection marked for deletion" displays.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 21

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 14. Inspection Marked for Deletion

4. Click to another tab to delete the inspection, or click Undo to keep the inspection.

5.4 Configure the Discrete I/O

From the System Settings screen, select Discrete I/O to change the discrete I/O settings.
Figure 15. Discrete I/O

For more details, see Discrete I/O on p. 39.

22 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

6 Vision Manager Workspace

Vision Manager has five main working areas, or screens:
• Home Screen on p. 23—The Home screen provides access to connect to a sensor or emulator, update
firmware, and view sensor and Vision Manager software information.
• Sensor Screen on p. 29— The Sensor screen displays the information needed to create or modify an
inspection.
• Inspection Logs Screen on p. 34— The Inspection Logs screen displays saved images and inspection
information. Inspections logs can be viewed when the camera is offline.
• Inspection Management Screen on p. 35—The Inspection Management screen includes options to add
inspections to the currently connected sensor, to rename an inspection, and to transfer inspections between a
connected sensor and a network location or storage device.
• System Settings Screen on p. 38—The System Settings screen provides access to view and adjust sensor
information, discrete I/O, communications settings, system logs, and units.

6.1 Home Screen

The Home screen provides access to connect to a sensor or emulator, update firmware, and view sensor and Vision
Manager software information.
The following are available from the Home screen:
• Sensor Neighborhood
• Sensor Maintenance
• Emulators
• User Preferences
• About
Figure 16. Home Screen

Only one sensor can be connected to each instance of the software. Open more than one instance of Vision Manager if you
want to connect to more than one sensor at a time. Only one instance of the software can be connected to the Emulator at a
time.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 23

VE Series Smart Camera

6.1.1 Sensor Neighborhood

Use Sensor Neighborhood on the Home screen to connect to active sensors. Sensor Neighborhood opens by default
when the software is launched.

Active Sensors Tab

Use the Active Sensors tab in Sensor Neighborhood to connect to an active sensor. Available options vary depending on
the type of sensor to which Vision Manager is connected.
Navigate: Home > Sensor Neighborhood > Active Sensors.
This tab includes sensor information such as sensor status, sensor name, IP address, MAC address, and model number.
Sensors can also be added to Favorites.
Figure 17. Active Sensors Tab

Status Description

Available—Ready to connect

Unavailable—The device is unavailable because another instance of the Vision Manager software
is already connected to the device
Subnet Mismatch—Unable to connect because the network IP address subnet settings are
incompatible

Connected—The device is connected to this instance of the Vision Manager software

To connect to a sensor, click next to the desired sensor. To disconnect from a sensor, click .
To view or change sensor Status, MAC Address, Sensor Name, IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway, click .
To add the sensor to a Favorites Group, click . The icon changes to .
To manually connect to a sensor with a known IP address, enter the IP address in the Enter IP Address field and click .

Favorites Tab
Save sensors to the Favorites tab for easy access to them. Sensors are saved to groups.
Navigate: Home > Sensor Neighborhood > Favorites.

24 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 18. Favorites Tab

Click Add New Group to create a new Favorites Group. To add a sensor to the group, on the Active Sensors tab, click
or from the Favorites tab, enter the sensor IP address and click to verify the connection to the sensor and automatically
save it to the selected group.
To manually add a sensor with a known IP address to the Favorites tab, enter the IP address in the Enter IP Address field
and select the desired group.
To remove a sensor from a group, click the across from the sensor name. To move the sensor to another group, click the
and select the desired group.
To remove a group and all the sensors within the group, click the across from the group name.

Network Adapters Tab

Use the Network Adapters tab on Sensor Neighborhood to view the network adapters that the system searches to find
sensors.
Navigate: Home > Sensor Neighborhood > Network Adapters.
Figure 19. Network Adapters Tab

Network adapter information including Link Status (connected/not connected), Adapter name, IP Address, and Subnet Mask
is also available.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 25

VE Series Smart Camera

6.1.2 Sensor Maintenance

Use Sensor Maintenance on the Home screen to update the firmware on a sensor and to backup or restore the sensor.
Figure 20. Sensor Maintenance Tab

Sensor Maintenance includes sensor information such as sensor Status, Sensor Name, IP address, MAC address, Model
number, Firmware Version, and which sensors are tagged as favorites.
Actions include update firmware , view or change some sensor settings , and backup or restore sensor data .

Update the Firmware

1. From the Home screen, click Sensor Maintenance.
2. Make sure that the desired sensor is not connected to the Vision Manager software and that the status is Available.
3. Click next to the sensor and follow the prompts.

Note: During the firmware update process, there are options to restore the sensor to the factory
default settings and to create a backup before updating the firmware.

Important: All stored inspections are deleted when factory default settings are restored. All user
profile information (user names and passwords) is deleted when factory default settings are
restored. Ethernet settings and favorites lists are retained.

This process can take several minutes. Do not close the program or remove power from the sensor during the update
process.
When the process is complete, the sensor restarts and the status returns to Available. Vision Manager displays the
new firmware version in the Firmware Version column.

Backup or Restore the Sensor

System settings, inspections, and user profiles can be backed up and restored. Firmware is not included in the backup or
restore.
The backup file is saved to the location of your choice.
1. From the Home screen, click Sensor Maintenance.
2. Make sure that no sensors or emulators are connected to the Vision Manager software and that the desired sensor's
status is Available.
3. Click , then click Backup.
4. Follow the prompts to save a backup file.
A message displays saying that the backup was successful.
5. To restore the sensor data, click , then click Restore.

26 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

6. Follow the prompts to restore the sensor data. An Emulator backup file can be used to restore the sensor.

Note: This process can take several minutes.

Important: Selecting the Restore User Profiles checkbox overrides all of the user names and
passwords on the sensor that the restore file is being restored to.

A message displays saying that the restore was successful.

6.1.3 Emulators
Use Emulators on the Home screen to connect to the emulator.
Figure 21. Emulators

Click to connect to the desired emulator. This tab also displays the Image location on the computer, as well as the
emulator version information.
To access the emulator for different types of the VE models, select the desired type from the Type list before clicking . The
Vision option enables the vision and analysis tools. The ID option enables the identification and analysis tools. The Vision +
ID option enables all tools.
Click under Folder Location to change the directory for the reference images. The default directory for images is C:
\Users\Public\Documents\Banner Vision Manager\VE Series\VE xMP\Images. Both 8-bit monochrome
bitmap (BMP) images and inspection logs are supported. Bitmap images should be the same resolution as the VE camera. If
inspection logs are placed in the Images directory, the emulator automatically extracts the image out of the inspection log
and uses it to run the currently loaded inspection. Click to open the directory.
The Emulators tab includes all available features and all tools function the same as they do when running on a sensor. On
the emulator, execution time is not calculated.

Backup or Restore the Emulator

Emulator settings and inspections can be backed up and restored.
Save the backup file to the location of your choice.
1. From the Home screen, click Emulators.
2. Make sure that no sensors or emulators are connected to the Vision Manager software.
3. Click , then click Backup.
4. Follow the prompts to save a backup file.
A message displays saying that the backup was successful.
5. To restore the sensor data, click , then click Restore.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 27

VE Series Smart Camera

6. Follow the prompts to restore the sensor data. A sensor backup file can be used to restore the emulator.

Note: This process can take several minutes.

A message displays saying that the restore was successful.

6.1.4 User Preferences

Use User Preferences on the Home screen to set the Vision Manager software language.
The language can be changed at any time.

6.1.5 About
Use About to view Vision Manager software information, including the version number.

28 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

6.2 Sensor Screen

The Sensor screen displays the information needed to create or modify an inspection.
Figure 22. Sensor Screen

1. Screens—Home, Sensor, Inspection Logs, Inspection Management, System Settings

2. Manual Trigger button—Click to manually trigger the sensor
3. Inspection list—Select the desired inspection to start, and to view or modify the inspection
4. Summary pane—Includes the Inspection Summary, the I/O Summary, and the Test Summary
5. Parameters pane—Includes user-adjustable Inputs parameters or Test parameters for the tools in an inspection, depending on what is selected
in the Tools and Results pane
6. Tools and Results pane—Includes Tools and Results, Tools Only, and All Results, which display the camera tool, the tools that are included
in the current inspection, and the results of the inspection
7. Image Pane Parameters panel—Includes ROI view buttons, zoom, x and y coordinates, grayscale value, settings button, and full image display
button, as well as sensor messages
8. Image pane—Displays the current image captured by the sensor; this includes the region of interest (ROI) for the tool for the selected inspection

6.2.1 Using the Image Pane: Saving and Loading Images

To save the current image displayed in the Image pane as a .bmp file, right-click on the image.
To load saved .bmp (Windows bitmap) or .ilg (inspection log) image files into the VE for testing, select one or more files and
drag them into the Image pane. The loaded files are processed by the inspection tools as if they were new images taken by
the VE.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 29

VE Series Smart Camera

6.2.2 Image Pane Parameters

Use the Image Pane Parameters to change how the Image pane displays and to view status messages.
Figure 23. Image Pane Parameters

ROI View Buttons

Click to view all tool ROIs and annotations.
Click to view the ROI and annotations for the selected tool only.
Click to hide all ROIs annotations and view the image only.

Note: The Image Overlays parameter for each tool also control which ROI is shown and
this parameter overrides the ROI view buttons.

Zoom
Slide to zoom the Image pane in and out.
Status Messages
View status messages such as "Applying Changes" and "Waiting for Trigger". Some messages, such as "Applying
Changes," display only momentarily while a parameter change is serviced by the sensor. Other messages, such as
"Waiting for Trigger", require an action to be completed.
X and Y Coordinates and Grayscale Value
Displays the current x and y coordinates and grayscale value for the location the pointer is at in the Image pane.
Settings Button
Click to change some ROI settings.
• Change the size of the ROI labels
• Change the opacity of the background of the ROI labels
• Show or hide controls (change ROI shape, add a mask) in the labels, where applicable
• Change the size of the sizing handles
Full Image Display Mode Button
Click to expand the image to fill the screen. The image pane, image pane parameters, as well as passed, failed,
and missed counts are shown. Click to return to the standard view.
When in Full Image Display Mode, click to view the Test Summary Results and click to hide the Test
Summary Results.

6.2.3 Summary Pane

The Summary pane includes the Inspection Summary, the I/O Summary, and the Test Summary.

Inspection Summary
When expanded, the Inspection Summary displays inspection pass, fail, and missed trigger statistics since the last time the
inspection summary results were reset.
A green checkmark indicates that an inspection passed, and a red X indicates that an inspection failed. A dash indicates that
there is no information to display.

30 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 24. Inspection Summary

The History Trend below the pass/fail statistics provides another visual indication of whether or not an inspection passed, as
well as an indication of when changes are made.
• Green indicates that an inspection passed
• Red indicates that an inspection failed
• Blue indicates that a change was made to the inspection
• Pink indicates that a product change was made—either a new inspection was added or the inspection was changed
to a different one
The History Trend holds up to 400 entries and updates after an inspection is completed. The entries are recorded first in, first
out, with the newest entry displayed on the left of the History Trend. Point to an entry on the History Trend for information
about the entry. For example, pointing to a green entry displays the frame number.
Click Reset to clear the Inspection Summary statistics. The History Trend does not reset.
When collapsed, the Inspection Summary displays only pass and fail information. The green number on the left represents
the number of inspections that passed. The red number on the right represents the number of inspections that failed since
the last reset.

I/O Summary
When expanded, the I/O Summary displays input and output status information and system errors, if present.
When collapsed, no I/O Summary information is visible.
Figure 25. I/O Summary

Inputs and outputs display on the I/O Summary after they are configured from the System Settings screen (see
Configure the Discrete I/O on p. 22). Green indicates that the I/O is active. Light gray indicates that the I/O is inactive.
The System Error indicator flashes red when an error is present. View and clear the error from the System Settings
screen (see Logs on p. 47).
Figure 26. IO Summary with Error

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 31

VE Series Smart Camera

Test Summary
When expanded, the Test Summary shows results from the enabled Test parameters for each tool in the current inspection.
Failures are highlighted in red.
When collapsed, no Test Summary information is visible.
Figure 27. Test Summary with a Failure

6.2.4 Tools & Results

Tools & Results shows the camera tool and the inspection tools that are included in the current inspection, as well as the
results for the currently selected tool.
Figure 28. Tools & Results

Use Tool & Results to add and configure tools in an inspection and to view results. Click a camera tool or inspection tool on
Tools & Results to access the Parameters pane for that camera or tool. Click in the empty area below the tools to view
information about the inspection, such as Inspection Name and Execution Time. If Data export is enabled, the available data
also displays.
Figure 29. Tools & Results—Data Export Shown

See Using the Camera Tool on p. 59, Using the Inspection Tools: Vision Tools on p. 63, Using the Inspection Tools: ID
Tools on p. 140, and Using the Inspection Tools: Analysis Tools on p. 151 for additional tools information. See also Data
Export Tab on p. 44.

32 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

6.2.5 Tools Only

Tools Only shows the camera tool and the inspection tools that are included in the current inspection.
Figure 30. Tools Only

Use Tools Only to add and configure tools in an inspection. Click a camera tool or inspection tool on Tools Only to access
the Parameters pane for that camera or tool.
See Using the Camera Tool on p. 59, Using the Inspection Tools: Vision Tools on p. 63, Using the Inspection Tools: ID
Tools on p. 140, and Using the Inspection Tools: Analysis Tools on p. 151 for additional tools information.

6.2.6 All Results

All Results lists the results for the current inspection, camera tool, and inspection tools.
Figure 31. All Results

At a glance, view the Result (pass/fail/status), execution Time (in milliseconds), Pass Count, and Fail Count for each item.
Expand each item for additional details.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 33

VE Series Smart Camera

6.3 Inspection Logs Screen

The Inspection Logs screen displays saved images and inspection information. Inspections logs can be viewed when
the camera is offline.
Figure 32. Inspection Logs Screen

1. Log Sources pane—Choose the source for the inspections logs to view, and set the criteria for collecting logs
2. Loaded Logs pane—View and filter the inspection logs
3. Image pane—Displays the saved inspection image captured by the sensor. This includes the tools that were used in that inspection
4. Summary pane—Displays saved information from a specific inspection and frame number
5. Parameters pane—Displays the logged Input or Test parameters, depending on what is selected in the Tools & Results pane
6. Tools and Results pane—Includes the Tools & Results tab, the Tools Only tab, and the All Results tab, which display the camera tool, the
tools that are included in the logged frame, and the results of the inspection
7. Image Pane Parameters panel—Includes ROI view buttons, zoom, x and y coordinates, grayscale value, and the ROI label settings button, as
well as sensor messages

6.3.1 Log Sources

View logs from either the sensor or a network folder or storage device.
Click to move the inspection logs from the sensor to the computer. Click to navigate to saved inspection logs.
Thumbnail views of the images display in the Loaded Logs pane. While inspection logs are loading, the Percent Bar
displays and shows the percentage of inspection logs that have loaded; it is removed when all inspection logs have finished
loading.
Expand Sensor to set the criteria for what is collected in the inspection logs. Set the Log Criteria:
• All
• Pass Only

34 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

• Fail Only
• By Slot Number
• Remote Teach All
• Remote Teach Pass
• Remote Teach Fail
Set the Strategy:
• First N Logs
• Last N Logs
Set the Capture Limit (limits the number of inspection logs the sensor holds in internal memory):
• Low Count
• Medium Count
• High Count
Filter logs to be viewed by pass , fail , remote teach , or inspection number using the buttons to the left of the
inspection previews. Click to clear all filters.

6.3.2 Loaded Logs

After log information is loaded from the Log Sources pane, click on a thumbnail to view the full frame in the Image pane.
The Inspection Summary shows whether or not the inspection passed, which inspection was being used, which frame
number you are viewing, and the system and inspection CRCs. Click the camera tool or an inspection tool in the Tools and
Results pane to view additional logged information in the Parameters pane, such as camera exposure, the reference
pattern, or the filters used during the inspection, as well as to view specific results for the frame.

Note: Some parameters are disabled in the Inspection Logs. For example, if histogram information was
not collected during the inspection, it cannot be viewed from the log.

6.4 Inspection Management Screen

The Inspection Management screen includes options to add inspections to the currently connected sensor, to rename
an inspection, and to transfer inspections between a connected sensor and a network location or storage device.
The following are available from the Inspection Management screen:
• Manage
• Transfer
The inspection CRC is listed for each inspection on both the Manage and Transfer screens. When an inspection is created, it
is assigned a Cyclic Redundancy Check code, or CRC. The CRC is generated by considering each setting within the
inspection (this includes the input parameters of all tools). When a change is made to the input parameters of any tool within
the inspection, a new CRC is generated. Because of this, CRC becomes a very simple yet powerful way to determine if a
change was made to the inspection since the last time it was modified.

Note: Changing an inspection's name and slot number does not modify its CRC.

The system CRC is available on the System Settings tab.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 35

VE Series Smart Camera

6.4.1 Manage
Use Manage to add new inspections, delete existing inspections, rename inspections, set an inspection to run at startup, or
copy an inspection.
Figure 33. Manage

Also displayed are the sensor name, inspection name, and whether the inspection is running.

Copy an Inspection
Duplicate (copy) an inspection to use as a starting point for a new inspection.
1. On the Inspection Management screen, click Manage.
2. Locate the inspection to copy and click .
A duplicate of the inspection is created with the same tools and parameters and is added to the inspection list as
Inspection (#).
3. Adjust the inspection as desired. The two inspections are not linked; changes are independent of each other.

Delete an Inspection
1. Click Inspection Management, then click Manage.
2. Select the inspection to be deleted.

Note: This inspection cannot be running and it cannot be selected to begin at startup.
3. Click .
The inspection name turns red and "Inspection marked for deletion" displays.
Figure 34. Inspection Marked for Deletion

4. Click to another tab to delete the inspection, or click Undo to keep the inspection.

36 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Set an Inspection to Begin at Startup

Note: Only one inspection can begin at startup.

1. On the Inspection Management screen, click Manage.

2.
Locate the desired inspection and click .
The turns green and the inspection will begin at the next startup.

6.4.2 Transfer
Use Transfer to transfer inspections between a connected sensor and a computer, network drive, or storage device.
Figure 35. Transfer

Click to navigate to and select a different folder. Click to open the folder to view the files.

Save an Inspection to a Computer, Network Drive, or Storage Device

Vision Manager automatically saves inspections to the VE as they are created and modified. Save a copy of the inspection to
your computer or another network location if you want to be able to go back to previous settings.
Use the following procedure to save a copy of an inspection to your computer or a network location.
1. On the Inspection Management screen, click Transfer.
Figure 36. Transfer

2. Change the destination folder, if desired.

a) Click above the right column.
An explorer window opens.
b) Navigate to the desired location, network location, or storage device.
c) Click Select Folder.
The folder is selected and the window closes.
The path to the location displays above the right column.
3. Select the desired inspection from the inspection list in the left column.
4. Click .
Inspection name.idb displays in the right column and the inspection is transferred (saved) to the selected location.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 37

VE Series Smart Camera

Save Inspections to a VE Sensor

Inspections stored on a computer or network drive or created in the emulator can be saved to the connected VE sensor.
1. On the Inspection Management screen, click Transfer.
2. Select the desired location.
a) Click above the right column.
b) Navigate to the desired folder.
The path to the location displays above the right column.
3. In the list on the left, select (Next Empty Slot) to add the inspection to the list or select an existing inspection to
replace.
4. Select the desired inspection from the list on the right.
5. Click .
Inspection name displays in the left column and the inspection is transferred to the sensor.

6.5 System Settings Screen

The System Settings screen provides access to view and adjust sensor information, discrete I/O, communications
settings, system logs, and units.
The following are available from the System Settings screen:
• Sensor Info
• Discrete I/O
• Communications
• Logs
• Units
• User Profiles
• System Reset

6.5.1 Sensor Info

Use Sensor Info to view or change sensor information, including sensor name, IP address, subnet mask, and gateway.
Figure 37. Sensor Info

Click to access the sensor properties editing window. Click to refresh the information.
• Sensor Name—View or change the sensor name
• Model—View the model number of the sensor
• Serial Number—View the serial number of the sensor
• Firmware Version—View the current firmware version of the sensor
• Up Time—View the amount of time the sensor has been running since it was last powered on
• Hour Count—View the number of hours the sensor has been powered on over its lifetime
• Boot Count—View the number of times the sensor has been powered on over its lifetime
• System CRC—View the current system CRC number

38 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

The system Cyclic Redundancy Check code, or CRC is listed on the System Settings > System Info tab. The CRC is
generated by considering each setting within the system. When a change is made to the system parameters (including a
change to the inspection CRC) a new CRC is generated. Because of this, CRC becomes a very simple yet powerful way to
determine if a change was made to the system since the last time it was modified.

Note: Changing the following sensor features and information does not modify the system CRC:
• Sensor IP address
• Sensor subnet mask
• Sensor gateway
• Sensor name
• Sensor Serial Number
• Sensor Mac Address
• User Profile changes
• Updated pattern in match tool if remote teach feature was used to change it
• Updated data compare string in the barcode tool if remote teach feature was used to change it

The inspection logs show which CRC an image was acquired under. The system CRC is available to a PLC and can be sent
using Data Export on all protocols.
The inspection CRC is available on the Inspection Management tab.

6.5.2 Discrete I/O

Use Discrete I/O to view the I/O and pin numbers; view the status; and set the function, active level, output delay, latch type,
and output duration for each pin.
From the System Settings screen, select Discrete I/O to change the discrete I/O settings.
Figure 38. Discrete I/O

I/O
The VE has five configurable I/O. These are pins 1, 5, 8, 10, and 11.
Pin #
The pin number on the cable connection. See Table 1 on p. 14.
Wire Color
The corresponding wire color for each pin. See Table 1 on p. 14.
Status
Indicates whether or not the I/O is active.
Green = active
Gray = inactive

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 39

VE Series Smart Camera

Function
The following input and output options are available:
• Disabled—The pin is not configured
• General Output—Used in conjunction with the Logic Tool to configure individual discrete outputs based on
specific tool results
• Pass—Active when the inspection passes
• Fail—Active when the inspection fails
• Ready—Active when the sensor is ready to accept another trigger
• System Error—Active when a system error occurs
• Online—Active when the Camera is connected
• Missed Trigger—Active when a trigger is missed. This error flag remains active until a counter reset or power
cycle
• Product Change—The input is used in conjunction with one of the four I/O points programmed as Product
Select lines. The inspection loaded will be executed following a valid trigger. See Function: Product Change
on p. 40 for additional details on Product Change
• Product Select Bit 0/1/2/3—Available when Product Change is selected on another I/O; used in conjunction
with Product Change to indicate which inspection slot number to switch to. See Function: Product Change on
p. 40
• Remote Teach—Sets the pin to accept input pulses for remote teaching the sensor. See Using Remote
TEACH with the Match Tool on p. 132 and Using Remote TEACH with the Barcode Tool Data Compare
Test on p. 147
Invert
Select to switch when the I/O is active or inactive.
Output Delay (ms)
The time from when a trigger starts an inspection until the sensor output turns on. It is available for the General
Output, Pass, Fail, and Missed Trigger functions of the selected pin.

Note: If the inspection execution time is longer than the output delay, the output becomes
active immediately after the processing is finished.

Latch Type
Select the behavior of the I/O pin when in the active state; available when the I/O is configured as an output.
• Latched—Maintains state until the condition of the associated function changes; available for the following
functions: General Output, Pass, Fail, Ready, System Error, Online, and Missed Trigger
• Pulsed—Maintains active state for a selected period of time, then returns to the inactive state; available for
the following functions: General Output, Pass, Fail, System Error, and Missed Trigger
• Trigger Gated—Output signal is only active upon trigger signal being active
• Latched Until Trigger—Maintains state until a new trigger is received; available for the following functions:
General Output, Pass, Fail, and Missed Trigger
Output Duration (ms)
The length of time the output is active.
This option is available for the Latch Type = Pulsed.
Minimum Hold READY Time
When checked, this option holds the READY signal inactive for at least this minimum duration after receiving a valid
trigger.

Function: Product Change

The sensor can be commanded to load inspections from slots 1 to 15 using the combination of Product Change and Product
Select functions of the discrete I/O pins.
Set the state of the Product Select pins as described in Product Select Inputs on p. 41. Then set the state of the Product
Change pin to Active when the sensor is in the Ready state. The sensor immediately loads the selected inspection and is
ready to execute when it receives a trigger. For Product Change to be successful, select at least one of the I/O pins to
function as Product Select.

40 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Product Select Inputs

The VE has four dedicated Product Select lines that can be thought of as making a Binary-Coded Decimal (BCD) table.
Select at least two of the I/O pins to function as Product Select inputs because there is no inspection slot 0. Access
inspection slots 1 through 15 using the following pin combinations:
Inspection Number Product Select #3 Product Select #2 Product Select #1 Product Select #0

1 OFF OFF OFF ON

2 OFF OFF ON OFF

3 OFF OFF ON ON

4 OFF ON OFF OFF

5 OFF ON OFF ON

6 OFF ON ON OFF

7 OFF ON ON ON

8 ON OFF OFF OFF

9 ON OFF OFF ON

10 ON OFF ON OFF

11 ON OFF ON ON

12 ON ON OFF OFF

13 ON ON OFF ON

14 ON ON ON OFF

15 ON ON ON ON

6.5.3 Communications
Use Communications to view or change communication information, to set the industrial protocol, and to set image export,
data export, and serial connection settings.

Ethernet Settings Tab

Use the Ethernet Settings tab to view or change some Ethernet settings.
Navigate: System Settings > Communications > Ethernet Settings.
Figure 39. Ethernet Settings Tab

On the Ethernet Settings tab , click to access the sensor properties editing window and view or change the following:
• IP Address—View or change the IP address of the sensor
• Subnet Mask—View or change the subnet address of the sensor
• Gateway—View or change the gateway address of the sensor

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 41

VE Series Smart Camera

• MAC Address—View the MAC address of the sensor

Max Speed
To change the Max Speed, the maximum negotiation speed with the network, select the desired speed from the list:
• 1000 Full Duplex
• 100 Full Duplex (default)
• 100 Half Duplex
Bandwidth
To change the Bandwidth, use the slider to set the desired setting. The default is Max (10).
The bandwidth setting allows for controlling the network traffic between the VE and the Vision Manager software,
and impacts the viewing rate on the Image pane as well as the time it takes to load the inspection logs from the
sensor to the computer. This does not impact other communication channels, such as Image Export, Industrial
Protocols, or Data Export.
When set to Max, data transfer is not impacted. When set to less than Max, the amount of data and the transfer rate
from the device to the Vision Manager software is reduced. For example, setting the bandwidth to a low number
reduces the network traffic, increasing the time it takes to load the logs, but does not affect the sensor's basic
operation (inspection time, communication with a PLC, etc.).
Due to variations in each network, test several bandwidth settings to find the one that works best for your network
and needs.
The Bandwidth setting is available with VE firmware version 1.8.0 and later.

Serial Tab
Use the Serial tab to configure the serial connection.
Navigate: System Settings > Communications > Serial.
Figure 40. Serial Tab

The serial connection is used with the Data Export function. It uses pins 4 and 12. Pin 4 is RS-232 TX (transmit) and pin 12 is
RS232 RX (receive). On the Serial tab, set the following parameters to match the receiving device:

Baud Rate
• 115200 (default)
• 57600
• 38400
• 28800
• 19200
• 9600
Data Bits
• 8 bits (default)
• 7 bits
Parity Control
• None (default)
• Even
• Odd
Stop Bits
• 1 Bits (default)
• 2 Bits

42 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Note: Because there is no flow control for the serial connections, the sensor will not detect or log a lost or
broken connection.

Industrial Protocols Tab

Use the Industrial Protocols tab to set the protocol the sensor uses to communicate and to select output data (map) to send
to a PLC.
Navigate: System Settings > Communications > Industrial Protocols.
Figure 41. Industrial Protocols Tab

On the Industrial Protocols tab, select the desired protocol to enable it.
• Disabled (default)
• EtherNet/IP
• PROFINET
• Modbus/TCP
• PCCC
A 32 Bit Format setting displays if Ethernet/IP, Modbus/TCP, or PCCC is chosen. Select LSW-MSW or MSW-LSW from the
list.
Figure 42. Industrial Protocols Tab—EitherNet/IP Selected

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 43

VE Series Smart Camera

A customizable map to output camera or inspection tool-specific results also displays. The map includes the following:
• Register/Byte/Word (depending on the protocol selected)
• Inspection #
• Tool Type
• Tool Name
• Result
• Type
• Actions

Note:
• Inspection # changes automatically depending on which inspection includes the tool.
• Type changes automatically depending on how much space is available.
• Data in registers 1–16 are fixed and contained in the PLC input assemblies (EtherNet/IP, Modbus/
TCP, and PCCC).
Click Apply Changes to send the current map to the camera.

Click to print and save a PDF of the current map. The PDF includes all data, whether system-defined or user-defined.
Click above the map to return the map to the default settings. All user-defined output data is deleted. Click in the
Actions column to delete an individual result.
For additional information see:
• Set the Industrial Ethernet Protocol (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, Modbus/TCP, PCCC) on p. 180
• Tool-Specific Results: EtherNet/IP on p. 188
• Tool-Specific Results: Modbus/TCP on p. 209
• Tool-Specific Results: PCCC on p. 220
• Tool-Specific Results: PROFINET on p. 228

Data Export Tab

Use the Data Export tab to set the parameters used to export inspection results.
Navigate: System Settings > Communications > Data Export.
Figure 43. Data Export Tab

On the Data Export tab, set the data export parameters, including which results to export, which channel to use, and the port
number to use. Note that the port number cannot be the same as any other port in use.
Use the data export map to select the results to publish. Use to add additional entries at the end of the list. Click or
to add additional entries above or below the currently selected entry. Use and to move an entry to either up or down in
the map.

44 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Click above the map to return the map to the default settings. All user-defined output data is deleted. Click in the
Actions column to delete an individual entry.
Shown below the map is the data that is currently available to be exported.
The Frame Format settings are located to the right of the map and include the desired delimiter, start string, and end string.
The Missing Data Format settings are also located to the right of the map. These settings include the option to publish filler
characters in place of data that is missing in the current inspection. If Fill String is selected, enter the desired filler characters
in the Fill String field. Different filler characters can be published for missing numeric data or missing string data.
For additional information, see Data Export on p. 171.

Image Export Tab

Use the Image Export tab to set the parameters used to export images.
Navigate: System Settings > Communications > Image Export.
Image Export is disabled by default. On the Image Export tab, set which images to export, then select the method.

Export
Set which images to export:
• Disabled (default)
• All
• Pass only
• Fail only

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 45

VE Series Smart Camera

Ethernet Protocol
Choose which protocol to use to export images:
• TCP/IP
• FTP
Figure 44. TCP/IP Settings

Figure 45. FTP Settings

See Image Export: TCP/IP on p. 173 and Image Export: FTP on p. 176 for more information.

Input String Tab

Use the Input String tab to set the parameters used to send information to the sensor from an external Ethernet source. If
desired, export the data using Data Export.
Navigate: System Settings > Communications > Input String.

46 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 46. Input String Tab

Input String is disabled by default. On the Input String tab, configure the Port Number, String Header, and String Footer
to enable the sensor to receive an input string. For example, a VIN number supplied by a PLC to the sensor. This aids in
traceability. The string value is set only through the Ethernet source, not in Vision Manager. The maximum size, including the
header, content, and footer, is 50 bytes.
For additional information, see Input String: TCP/IP on p. 178.

6.5.4 Logs
The Logs default view is the System tab. Use the System Tab to view, export, or clear system logs and communication
logs. Select or clear the Display checkboxes to customize which events are shown.
Navigate: System Settings > Logs > System.
Figure 47. System Tab

To clear a system error flag (or state), click Clear System Error.

Note: The system error log entry will not be cleared from the log.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 47

VE Series Smart Camera

To export system logs, click Export Log and follow the prompts. Logs are exported as a .slog file.
To clear the log, click Clear Log.
View a system log exported from another sensor using the View Exported Logs tab.
Navigate: System Settings > Logs > View Exported Log. Click Load Log and navigate to the desired log file to view it.
Figure 48. View Exported Log Tab

6.5.5 Units
Use Units to select a unit to display, to adjust the precision, or to perform a perspective correction.
The VE Series Smart Camera computes tool distance and area values in units of pixels. The Scaling mode allows users to
convert pixels to user defined measurements units (for example, millimeters).
When the camera is not perpendicular to the part being inspected there is a natural perspective distortion, causing tool
distance and area values to vary across the image. The Perspective Correction mode addresses this situation.
Perspective Correction can also be used to adjust the camera's native coordinate system, for example matching the
coordinate system of a robot interfacing with the camera.
Use Precision to set the number of decimal places used in Distance and Area tool results.

Units and Calibration

Use Units and Calibration to select a unit to display, to adjust the precision, or to correct for perspective distortion.
Select either Scaling or Perspective Correction from the Mode list.

48 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 49. Units and Calibration

Scaling
Use the Scaling mode to select a unit to display and to publish results that represent distance, size, and location
calculations.
Navigate: System Settings > Units > Units and Calibration, then select Scaling from the Mode list.
Figure 50. Scaling

By default, distance, size, and location calculations are shown in pixels. To change the displayed units, select the desired
measurement unit and parameters. The following Measurement Units are available:
• Microns (µm)
• Millimeters (mm)
• Centimeters (cm)
• Meters (m)
• Mils (mil)
• Inches (in)
• Feet (ft)
• Yard (yd)
Click Apply Changes to save the changes. Applying a scaling factor changes the measurements listed in the Tools and
Results to the selected unit and applies the scale to all inspections.

Scale Units Using a Known Measurement

Use a known measurement, such as ruler, to configure the scaling factor for converting pixels to the desired unit.
The conversion factor for using scaled units can be determined using any object of a known size. For illustration purposes,
this example uses a ruler as the object.

Note: This procedure is an example only.

Note:
• Make sure the camera focus is as sharp as possible
• Span more pixels for increased accuracy
• Use objects closer to the center of the FOV to limit the distortion that naturally occurs closer to the
edges of the FOV

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 49

VE Series Smart Camera

1. Place the ruler in the FOV.

2. Add a Measure tool.
3. Point to the 0 line on the ruler and write down the x and y coordinates shown in the Image Parameters pane.
Figure 51. X and Y Coordinates

4. Expand Measure from... and select Constant.

5. In the Point (X, Y) field, enter the x and y coordinates from step 3.
6. Point to the 10 mm (1 cm) line on the ruler and write down the x coordinate shown in the Image Parameters pane.
7. Expand Measure to... and select Constant.
8. In the Point (X, Y) field, enter the x you wrote down in step 6 and y coordinate from step 3. (The y coordinates must
be the same.)
The Measure tool measures between the two points.
9. Write down the Distance (px) show in Tools & Results.
In this example, the distance is 101.00 px.

50 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 52. Distance Measurement Between the Two Points

10. On the System Settings screen, click Units.

11. From the Mode list, select Scaling.
The scaling parameters display.
12. Select the desired Measurement Unit. For this example, the unit is Millimeters.
13. In the Measurement in Pixels field, enter the distance from step 9.
14. In the Measurement in Millimeters field, enter 10 because the known distance was 10 mm.
Figure 53. Scaling

15. Click Apply Changes.

Applying a scaling factor affects all existing inspections. The currently running inspection is immediately modified on
the next trigger and other inspections are modified when they are loaded.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 51

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 54. Tools and Results Showing the New Units

Perspective Correction
Use the Perspective Correction mode to enter real world coordinates, select a unit to display, and publish results which
represent locations and angles (except Blob Major Axis Angle).
Navigate: System Settings > Units > Units and Calibration, then select Perspective correction from the Mode list.
While configuring the perspective correction, inspections are suspended.
Figure 55. Perspective Correction

The Inspection list changes to a Calibration list. Up to five perspective corrections (calibrations) can be stored. Select the
appropriate Calibration # from the Inputs parameters on the Camera tool found on the Sensors tab. By default, the first
calibration created is applied to all inspections (this does not apply to the Emulator).

52 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 56. Perspective Correction Calibration Parameter

When Perspective Correction is used, All Results includes information about the Units.
Figure 57. All Results

Using Perspective Correction

Follow theses steps for an example use of Perspective Correction mode.
Cancel the process at any time by clicking Abort.

Note: This procedure is an example only.

1. Go to System Settings > Units > Units and Calibration, then select Perspective Correction from the Mode
list.

Important: Inspections are suspended during this time.

2. If needed, set the Exposure, Gain, or Auto Exposure on the Inputs parameters pane.
These settings are saved with the Calibration.
3. Select the desired measurement unit from the Real World Unit list.
This example uses millimeters.
4. If desired, click to add additional calibration points.
This example uses a fifth point. Up to 20 points can be added.
5. Move the P1, P2, P3, P4, and P5 calibration points to the desired location on the image.
The points should be spread out and accurately placed in the desired region of measurement.
When a calibration point is selected, the corresponding row in the Real World Coordinates table is highlighted.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 53

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 58. Points Spread Out and Accurately Placed on the Image

6. In the Real World Coordinates table, enter the corresponding actual coordinates for each calibration point.
Figure 59. Real World Coordinates

7. Click Apply Changes.

The Calibration Summary pane updates to show the status, scaling factor, and other information, including the
Computed Fit Error.
Figure 60. Calibration Summary

The Computed Fit Error is the distance between a user-defined point in the real world coordinate space and the
computed point, based on the fit of all points in the real world coordinate space. Vision Manager displays the
minimum and maximum computed fit errors for all user-defined points when five or more points are used. If only four
points are used, there is no Computed Fit Error.

54 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

The Inputs parameters pane for the Camera tool (on the Sensor tab) now includes a Calibration dropdown.
Figure 61. Perspective Correction Calibration Parameter

8. If needed, select and add additional Perspective Correction Calibrations from the Calibration list at the top right of
the screen.
9. Select the desired Perspective Correction calibration for your inspection from the Calibration parameter list on the
Inputs parameters pane for the Camera tool.
Only one Perspective Correction Calibration can be associated with each inspection.

Precision
Use Precision to set the number of decimal places shown and exported.
Navigate: System Settings > Units > Precision.
Figure 62. Precision

Select the desired number of decimal places, from 1 to 6, that display throughout the software and in exported data. In
general, the number of decimal places chosen is the number used, however, there are a few exceptions. See the following
descriptions:

Floating Point Representation

All input values represented as decimals are single 32-bit floating point values. The precision varies based on the
range; the bigger the floating number, the less precision it may have. As a result, the values entered manually may
be automatically adjusted to the closest floating point value.
For example, if the precision is set at 6 decimal digits and the number 123.456789 is entered, this is not a valid
floating point number. However the closest floating point number is 123.456787109375, so the value is
approximated to 123.456787.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 55

VE Series Smart Camera

Camera Exposure
Camera exposure time is restricted by the minimum change the imager can perform. As a result, the values entered
manually may be automatically adjusted to the next value accepted by the imager.
Imager exposure precision:
• WVGA: 14 µs
• 1.3 MP: 14 µs
• 2 MP: 15 µs
• 5 MP: 10 µs
External Strobe
The external strobe duration and the external strobe exposure delay are restricted to 1 µs resolution. As a result, the
values entered by the user may be automatically adjusted to the next µs value.

6.5.6 User Profiles

Use User Profiles to prevent users from accessing specific features or making changes to the system. When User Profiles is
enabled users are required to enter a user name and password to access the sensor. Users cannot access the system
without a valid login.
User Profiles are specific to each sensor. Enable User Profiles on each sensor that requires extra security.
Note that when User Profiles are enabled, the sensor display is available as read-only. No editing can be done directly from
the sensor until User Profiles are disabled for that sensor.

Users
Use the Users tab to manage the use of user names and passwords and to view or change the type of user, user name, and
password for each user. Passwords are not required.
Navigate: System Settings > User Profiles > Users.
Figure 63. Users Tab

User Profiles are disabled by default. To enable User Profiles, select Enabled from the User Profiles list. This enables User
Profiles for the sensor you are currently connect to. The next time you connect to the sensor, you must enter a user name
and password to access the sensor, inspections, and other information.

Add a User
Use this procedure to add a new user to the system. Only an Administrator can add new users.
1. Click .
A new user is added and the Username field is active.
2. Enter the user name in the Username field.

Note: Use only letters, numbers, spaces, and the underscore in your user name.
3. Click Set Password to add a password, if desired.
The Change Password screen displays.

56 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

4. Enter and confirm the desired password.

5. Click Continue.
6. Select the type of user from the Profile list.
The type of user determines the level of access the user has. The level of access can be changed from the Profiles
tab. See Profiles on p. 57.
7. Click Apply Changes.

Change a Password
Use this procedure to change a password. Users can change their own password. An Administrator can change any
password.

Note: If you are a non-Administrator user and you lose your password, an Administrator can change your
password to a new one. If you are an Administrator and you lose your password, contact Banner
Engineering.

1. Click System Settings > User Profiles.

An Administrator sees all available user names. Any other user sees only their own name.
2. Click inside the Password field next to the desired user.
The Change Password window displays.
3. Enter and confirm the new password, then click Continue.
4. Click Apply Changes.

Change a User Name

Use this procedure to change a user name. Only an Administrator can change a user name.
1. Click System Settings > User Profiles.
2. Click inside the Username field for the desired user.
The field becomes active.
3. Enter the desired user name.
4. Click Apply Changes.

Profiles
Use the Profiles tab to determine the level of access given to each type of user (user profile).
Navigate: System Settings > User Profiles > Profiles.
Figure 64. Profiles Tab

The Profiles tab shows the functions that are enabled or disabled for each user profile. Only an Administrator can change
the functions or the profile names. Select and clear the check boxes to enable or disable the desired functions for each user
profile. The selected functions apply to every user of that user profile. Click to return this screen to the default functions for
each user profile.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 57

VE Series Smart Camera

When an unauthorized user attempts to access a restricted feature, a warning displays that the user is not authorized. In
many cases, a displays next to items in the software to indicate that the item is not available for the current user.
An Administrator user has all available functions, and this column is not editable. Using the default selections, a Monitor user
has the fewest available functions.

6.5.7 System Reset

Use System Reset to reboot the sensor or to restore the sensor to the factory default settings.
Click Reboot Sensor to stop, shutdown, and restart the sensor. The start-up inspection is loaded after the sensor reboot.
Click Reset to Factory Defaults to restore the sensor to the factory default settings.

Important: All stored inspections are deleted when factory default settings are restored. All user profile
information (user names and passwords) is deleted when factory default settings are restored. Ethernet
settings and favorites lists are retained.

58 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

7 Using the Camera Tool

The camera tool controls the sensor's camera function during an inspection. Configure the camera tool using the parameters
in the Parameters pane:
• Imager
• Focus Info
• Trigger
• External Strobe
• Image Histogram
Figure 65. Camera Tool Input Parameters

When the camera tool is selected, it is highlighted orange in Tools & Results and in Tools Only, the Inputs tab displays on
the Parameters pane, and the camera tool results are highlighted in All Results.

7.1 Imager
Use the Imager parameters to adjust the exposure and gain.
Figure 66. Imager

Exposure
Exposure time is the amount of time the camera allows light to energize the imager chip. Increasing the exposure
time allows more light to energize the imager chip, which brightens the picture. Use the slider or enter the desired
exposure time in milliseconds.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 59

VE Series Smart Camera

Gain
Gain is an electronic boost to the image signal. Increasing gain increases image brightness without increasing
exposure time. Use the slider or enter the desired gain number.

Note: Gain brightens both the light pixels and the dark pixels. High gain values will make the
image appear grainy.

Auto Exposure
During Auto Exposure, the exposure time and gain are optimized for the current inspection. Click Start to begin Auto
Exposure.

Note: Several triggers may be required to calculate the optimized values for exposure and
gain.

7.2 Trigger
Use the Trigger parameters to set the method and rate at which the sensor captures images. Trigger parameters are stored
in the inspection file and can be different for each inspection.
Figure 67. Trigger

Internal (default)
The sensor triggers itself at a user-defined rate. Use the slider or enter the desired rate, from 10 ms to 10,000 ms.
The default rate is 100 ms.

External
The sensor is triggered either manually using the trigger button in the Vision Manager software or it is triggered
by an external source (via the trigger pin or Ethernet), such as a photoelectric sensor. The external trigger option has
the following parameters:
• Trigger Polarity—Sets when the image is captured compared to the trigger signal. Choose Leading Edge
to capture images at the leading edge of a trigger signal. Choose Trailing Edge to capture images at the
trailing edge of the trigger signal. The default is Leading Edge.
• Trigger Delay—Sets the fixed time from the instant the sensor receives a valid trigger to the instant the
sensor captures the image. Use the slider or enter the desired time in milliseconds, from 0 ms to 10,000 ms.
The default is 0 ms.
• Minimum Trigger Width—Eliminates unwanted triggers by accepting triggers only if they last for a specified
duration. Use the slider or enter the desired minimum trigger width in milliseconds, from 1 ms to 5,000 ms.
The default is 1 ms.
• Trigger Divide—Sets the logic for how valid trigger inputs are related to actual images taken. If the Trigger
Divide is set to 1, an image is captured in response to every valid trigger. If it is set to 2, an image is captured
in response to every second valid trigger, and so on. Use the slider or enter the desired trigger divide, from 1
to 1,000. The default is 1.

60 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Free Run
The sensor immediately issues a new trigger at the end of an inspection.

Industrial Ethernet
The Industrial Ethernet communications channel controls the trigger. A PLC or HMI triggers the camera tool over an
Industrial Ethernet protocol such as EtherNet/IP or PROFINET. The trigger pin no longer functions, but the manual
trigger button in the Vision Manager software and the TCP Input String function can also still trigger the camera
tool.

7.3 Focus Information

Select the Focus Info checkbox and expand the parameter to view the current focus number for the installed lens.
Figure 68. Focus Info

The focus number is a number between 1 and 255. Use the Image pane to determine when the image is sharp enough, or
use the focus number as a guide. Turn the focus ring on the lens until the focus number is at the highest possible number
between 1 and 255. The focus number is also available on the sensor display.

Note: There is no optimal value for this number, but it can be used as a guide if you are setting up more
than one sensor that are focused on the same target.

7.4 External Strobe

Use External Strobe to control an external light connected to the sensor.
Figure 69. External Strobe

Strobe Type
The strobe type of the VE Series camera should match the style of external light used, otherwise the ON/OFF
behavior of the light will be inverted.
• Active Low—A 0 V dc external strobe signal is provided by the VE Series camera when the external light
should be ON. A +5 V dc external strobe signal is provided by the VE Series camera when the external light
should be OFF. This is the default strobe type setting for the VE Series camera and many of the external
vision lights Banner offers.
• Active High—A +5 V dc external strobe signal is provided by the VE Series camera when the external light
should be ON. A 0 V dc external strobe signal is provided by the VE Series camera when the external light
should be OFF.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 61

VE Series Smart Camera

Mode
• Always Off—The external light is always OFF
• Always On—The external light is always ON
• Exposure Based—The external light is ON for the duration of the camera exposure time
• Time Based—The external light is ON for the duration of a user-defined time period
Exposure Delay
The external light turns ON after a user-defined time delay, in milliseconds, after a valid trigger. Available only when
the Mode is Exposure Based or Time Based.
Duration
The external light is ON for a user-defined amount of time, in milliseconds. Available only when the Mode is Time
Based.

7.5 Camera Tool: Results

Click the camera tool on Tools & Results or expand the camera tool on All Results to view camera information.
Figure 70. Camera Tool Results

Focus Number
The focus number for the frame being viewed, if the Focus Number parameter is enabled in the Camera tool. See
Focus Information on p. 61 for more information on the Focus Number.
Execution Time
The execution time for the camera tool. This is the total time required to capture an image.
Expand Execution Time to see the historical minimum and maximum execution times up to this point for the
selected tool.
Status
Status and error messages display as appropriate.

62 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

8 Using the Inspection Tools: Vision Tools

Vision sensor tools include Average Gray, Bead, Blemish, Blob, Edge, Locate, Match, and Object.
Click a tool on Tools & Results or on Tools Only to access the Parameters pane for that tool. The Parameters pane
contains both an Inputs tab and a Test tab. Define parameters for the tool itself on the Inputs tab. Define pass or fail criteria
for the tool on the Test tab. When a tool is selected, the tool is highlighted orange in Tools & Results and in Tools Only, the
tool ROI is selected in the Image pane, and the tool results are highlighted in All Results.
For many of the parameters, move the slider to set the desired number, or move both sliders to set minimum and maximum
limits, where applicable. Numbers and limits can also be entered manually.
In parameters with colors in the sliders, vertical green bars represent current image information. Light gray backgrounds
indicate the range over which a value has varied over time.

8.1 Average Gray Tool

Use the Average Gray tool to determine the brightness levels of pixels found within the ROI.
Each pixel has a grayscale intensity value from 0 to 255, where 0 is black and 255 is white. The tool records the grayscale
value of each pixel in an ROI and averages them. With this information, the tool can detect changes in intensity that can
indicate several conditions, such as missing objects, holes, texture changes, and possible color changes.
Example applications:
• Spot-check for holes
• Check for a change in surface texture
• Check for presence/absence of a label or other objects

8.1.1 Average Gray Tool: Input Parameters

Use the Input parameters to configure how the tool analyzes an image.
Figure 71. Average Gray Tool—Input Parameters

ROI
The Region of Interest (ROI) is the user-defined group of pixels in the image that the sensor analyzes.
Figure 72. ROI Shape Selection

Resize and rotate the ROI around the feature to be analyzed. Change the shape of the ROI to a square, ellipse, or
circle as needed by expanding ROI on the Parameters pane and selecting the desired shape. An ROI can be as large as the
entire Field of View (FOV). The ROI automatically displays on the Image pane when a tool is added.
Adjust the placement of the ROI more precisely by using the arrow keys on the computer keyboard.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 63

VE Series Smart Camera

Masks
Add and define a mask to exclude a group of pixels from the tool analysis.
Figure 73. Masks Parameters

A mask created for a tool will not apply to any other tool in the inspection. Up to 10 masks can be added to a tool.
1. Expand Masks on the Inputs tab.
2. Click . The mask ROI automatically displays on the Image pane.
3. Select the mask shape. The mask ROI can be rectangular, elliptical, or circular.
4. Resize and rotate the mask ROI around the pixels to be excluded.
5. To delete a mask, click .

Pixel Intensity Range

Set the intensity range of pixels to analyze. Pixels with brightness values outside of this range are ignored.
Figure 74. Pixel Intensity Range Parameters

The default settings of 0 to 255 allow all pixels to be included in the average calculation.

Note: An average grayscale result of – indicates that all pixels in the ROI have been excluded by the pixel
intensity range parameter.

Image Overlays
Choose whether to display or hide the ROI or masks.
Figure 75. Image Overlays—Default

These options override the ROI view buttons on the Image Pane Parameters when no tool is selected. When a
specific tool is selected, the ROI information is shown.

Hide ROI
Hides the ROI when the tool is not selected.
Hide Masks
Hides the Mask ROI when the tool is not selected.

64 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Tool Histogram
The Tool Histogram graphically displays pixel intensity information within the current ROI.
Figure 76. Example Histogram

Select the Tool Histogram checkbox to enable the histogram. The default is enabled. Expand the Tool Histogram
parameter to view the histogram.
The histogram is a display of the grayscale values on the x axis and the number of pixels on the y axis. The histogram
displays the amount of pixels for each grayscale value. The graph displays information for all grayscale values (0 to 255).
Move the pointer anywhere over the histogram to view specific information. The information updates as the position of the
pointer changes.

Inspection Pass/Fail
Select the Contribute to Inspection Pass/Fail check box (default) if the tool will influence the Pass/Fail status of the
inspection.
Figure 77. Inspection Pass/Fail

The Pass/Fail contribution influences the following:

• Discrete output Pass
• Discrete output Fail
• Pass/Fail results counter
• Pass (Green) and Fail (red) LEDs on the Sensor
Select this checkbox if the overall Pass/Fail status of the inspection is dependent on the current tool.

8.1.2 Average Gray Tool: Test Parameters

Use the Test parameters to configure the pass/fail conditions for the tool.
Select the parameter checkbox to enable it. Where applicable, the vertical green bar shows the current parameter
information and the light gray backgrounds show the range over which a value has varied over time.
Where applicable, use the sliders or enter the minimum and maximum for the selected test parameters.
The current data found and the range of historical data found are shown for applicable Test parameters. The historical data
begins from the last reset.

Figure 78. Average Gray Tool—Test Parameters

Average Grayscale
The grayscale value range.
Standard Deviation
The standard deviation range.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 65

VE Series Smart Camera

8.1.3 Average Gray Tool: Results

Tools & Results and All Results list information from the current and previous inspections.
A red box around a tool indicates that the tool failed. Status provides information about the specific failure.
All Results displays the Result, Time, Pass Count, and Fail Count information at a glance. Expand the inspection tool to see
specific results for that tool.

Average Grayscale
The average grayscale value of the pixels in the ROI.
Standard Deviation
The standard deviation of the average grayscale value for the pixels in the ROI.
Execution Time
The execution time, in milliseconds, for the currently selected tool in the current inspection.
Expand Execution Time to see the historical minimum and maximum execution times up to this point for the
selected tool.
Use the reset button in the Inspection Summary to reset these historical values.
Status
Status and error messages display as appropriate.

8.1.4 Using the Average Gray Tool

Follow these steps for a typical presence/absence Average Gray inspection.

Note: This procedure is an example only.

1. Add an Average Gray tool to the inspection.

2. Adjust the ROI to frame the desired feature.
3. Set the Test parameters to set the pass/fail criteria.
a) On the Test tab, select the Average Grayscale checkbox.
This option sets the grayscale range that must be present in the ROI so that a part passes.
b) Move the sliders or enter the minimum and maximum grayscale. Inspections outside of this range will fail. For this
example, the minimum is 56.12 and the maximum is 74.83.
The green bar indicates the current grayscale and the light gray background indicates the grayscale over time
since the last reset.
4. Test a complete range of good and bad samples to make sure that the sensor accepts good parts and rejects bad
parts.

Figure 79. Average Gray—Pass Figure 80. Average Gray—Fail

66 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

8.2 Bead Tool

Use the Bead tool to inspect parts for uniformity of adhesive or sealant material, or for uniformity of a gap. In an industrial
setting, this "bead" of material is commonly applied in a strip along a known path. The Bead tool looks at this pre-defined
path and verifies whether the adhesive or sealant has been correctly applied.
For the purposes of this tool, a bead is any long, narrow strip of approximately consistent width and approximately consistent
color. The bead must have sufficient contrast with the background so that a simple grayscale threshold scheme can separate
the two. Background clutter and optical noise, such as shiny spots or holes in the bead, are permitted, but their presence
may degrade the robustness of a bead inspection.
The Bead tool assumes that the bead material has been applied by a mechanized system and is consistent in location and
direction. The tool does not attempt to detect, follow, or account for variations in bead location.
Example applications:
• Detect uniformity of a bead of adhesive
• Detect uniformity of a gap between two adjacent materials

8.2.1 Bead Tool: Input Parameters

Use the Input parameters to configure how the tool analyzes an image.
Figure 81. Bead Tool—Input Parameters

ROI
The Region of Interest (ROI) is the user-defined group of pixels in the image that the sensor analyzes.
Figure 82. Bead Tool ROI

The ROI is configurable to follow the desired path of the adhesive or sealant being analyzed. Adjust the width of the ROI and
set the sample rate. From the list select the frequency of bead width measurements: Every Pixel, Every 2nd Pixel, or Every
4th Pixel. See Bead Tool: Adjust the ROI on p. 73.
Adjust the placement of the ROI more precisely by using the arrow keys on the computer keyboard.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 67

VE Series Smart Camera

Masks
Add and define a mask to exclude a group of pixels from the tool analysis.
Figure 83. Masks Parameters

A mask created for a tool will not apply to any other tool in the inspection. Up to 10 masks can be added to a tool.
1. Expand Masks on the Inputs tab.
2. Click . The mask ROI automatically displays on the Image pane.
3. Select the mask shape. The mask ROI can be rectangular, elliptical, or circular.
4. Resize and rotate the mask ROI around the pixels to be excluded.
5. To delete a mask, click .

Threshold
The threshold parameter separates the bead from the background, in terms of contrast.

Threshold Type: Adaptive

Select Adaptive when there are lighting changes that cause the acquired image to change.
Figure 84. Threshold Type—Adaptive

An adaptive threshold is a technique that adjusts the threshold for the tool based upon lighting changes and image content
within the ROI. It performs best if used with bi-modal images, where most pixels fall into two groups of different brightness
levels. Adaptive threshold chooses the current threshold value by converging to a value based on the average value of the
pixels above and below the previous threshold value; it will not move the value of the threshold above or below the minimum
and maximum limits.

Adaptive Threshold: Bead/Blob Type

Defines whether the bead/blob is dark against a relatively brighter background or bright against a darker background.
This parameter defines the appearance of the feature of interest. For example, if you have a dark adhesive or part on a bright
background, choose Dark.
Choosing Dark with an adaptive threshold type causes the tool to limit the threshold to the range specified by the threshold
level minimum and maximum limits. The tool identifies all grouped pixels below the threshold chosen as dark beads/blobs.
Choosing Bright with an adaptive threshold type causes the tool to limit the threshold to the range specified by the threshold
level minimum and maximum limits. The tool identifies all grouped pixels above the specified minimum limit and less than or
equal to the maximum limit as bright beads/blobs.

68 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Adaptive Threshold: Threshold

Use the sliders or enter the desired minimum and maximum possible grayscale threshold.
The tool chooses a threshold value near the middle of the grayscale distribution, and the sliders represent boundaries
beyond which you do not want the tool to move the threshold setting. The green lines show the locations of where most of
the pixels' grayscale values are grouped. If the Tool Histogram option is clear, the green lines will not appear. The chosen
Adaptive Threshold value will be shown within the tool results.

Reject Level
When the Bead/Blob Type is set to Bright, use the Reject Level to narrow the range of pixel intensities to be considered in
an inspection. All pixels brighter than the Reject Level are ignored.
Leaving the Reject Level at the default of 255 means that the tool takes into consideration all grayscale levels in the ROI
from 0 (black) to 255 (white).

Reject Level Example

Consider setting up an inspection for a relatively bright object that ranges from 180 to 200 in pixel intensity and takes up 15
percent of the FOV. The remaining 85 percent of the FOV ranges from 230 to 255 in pixel intensity. Setting a Reject Level of
220 allows the tool to pay attention to only the bright object being inspected. Masking the bright parts of the FOV is not
necessary because only pixels whose intensity is less than the Reject Level will contribute to bright beads/blobs.

Threshold Type: Fixed

Select Fixed when the lighting and image content remain relatively constant for all inspections.
Figure 85. Threshold Type—Fixed

Fixed Threshold: Bead/Blob Type

Defines whether the bead/blob is dark against a relatively brighter background or bright against a darker background.
This parameter defines the appearance of the feature of interest. For example, if you have a dark adhesive or part on a bright
background, choose Dark.
Choosing Dark with a fixed threshold type causes the tool to fix the threshold at the level specified by the Threshold level
parameter. The tool identifies all grouped pixels below the specified threshold as dark beads/blobs.
Choosing Bright with a fixed threshold type causes the tool to fix the threshold at the Bright level specified by the Threshold
level parameter. The tool identifies all grouped pixels above the specified Bright threshold and less than or equal to the
Reject level as bright beads/blobs.

Fixed Threshold: Threshold

Use the slider to define the dark/bright cutoff point.
Any pixels brighter than this point define the bright bead while those darker than this point define the dark bead.

Reject Level
When the Bead/Blob Type is set to Bright, use the Reject Level to narrow the range of pixel intensities to be considered in
an inspection. All pixels brighter than the Reject Level are ignored.
Leaving the Reject Level at the default of 255 means that the tool takes into consideration all grayscale levels in the ROI
from 0 (black) to 255 (white).

Reject Level Example

Consider setting up an inspection for a relatively bright object that ranges from 180 to 200 in pixel intensity and takes up 15
percent of the FOV. The remaining 85 percent of the FOV ranges from 230 to 255 in pixel intensity. Setting a Reject Level of
220 allows the tool to pay attention to only the bright object being inspected. Masking the bright parts of the FOV is not
necessary because only pixels whose intensity is less than the Reject Level will contribute to bright beads/blobs.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 69

VE Series Smart Camera

Good Bead Width

Move the sliders or enter the desired minimum and maximum bead width.
The red section is bead that is too narrow or is a gap. The green section is good bead width. The blue section is bead that is
too wide.
Figure 86. Good Bead Width

Filters
Select the checkbox to ignore boundary pixels.
Figure 87. Bead Tool Filters

Boundary pixels are bead pixels that touch the ROI. If boundary pixels are ignored, one or more segments may also be
ignored.

Image Overlays
Choose whether to display or hide the annotations, ROI, or masks when this tool is not selected. Masks are hidden by
default.
Figure 88. Image Overlays—Default

These options override the ROI view buttons on the Image Pane Parameters when no tool is selected. When a
specific tool is selected, the ROI information is shown.

70 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Hide Annotations
Hides the annotations on the live image for the tool, even when the tool is selected.

Figure 89. Show Bead Tool Annotations

Figure 90. Hide Bead Tool Annotations

Hide ROI
Hides the ROI when the tool is not selected.
Hide Masks
Hides the Mask ROI when the tool is not selected.

Tool Histogram
The Tool Histogram graphically displays pixel intensity information within the current ROI.
Figure 91. Example Histogram

Select the Tool Histogram checkbox to enable the histogram. The default is enabled. Expand the Tool Histogram
parameter to view the histogram.
The histogram is a display of the grayscale values on the x axis and the number of pixels on the y axis. The histogram
displays the amount of pixels for each grayscale value. The graph displays information for all grayscale values (0 to 255).
Move the pointer anywhere over the histogram to view specific information. The information updates as the position of the
pointer changes.

Inspection Pass/Fail
Select the Contribute to Inspection Pass/Fail check box (default) if the tool will influence the Pass/Fail status of the
inspection.
Figure 92. Inspection Pass/Fail

The Pass/Fail contribution influences the following:

• Discrete output Pass
• Discrete output Fail
• Pass/Fail results counter
• Pass (Green) and Fail (red) LEDs on the Sensor
Select this checkbox if the overall Pass/Fail status of the inspection is dependent on the current tool.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 71

VE Series Smart Camera

8.2.2 Bead Tool: Test Parameters

Use the Test parameters to configure the pass/fail conditions for the tool.
Select the parameter checkbox to enable it. Where applicable, the vertical green bar shows the current parameter
information and the light gray backgrounds show the range over which a value has varied over time.
Where applicable, use the sliders or enter the minimum and maximum for the selected test parameters.
The current data found and the range of historical data found are shown for applicable Test parameters. The historical data
begins from the last reset.

Figure 93. Test Parameters

Count - Good
The number of good beads.
Count - Narrow/Gap
The number of narrow beads.
Count - Wide
The number of wide beads.
Largest Width
The maximum width found.
Smallest Width
The minimum width found.
Average Width
The average width found.
Total Length - Good
The total length of good beads.
Total Length - Narrow/Gap
The total length of narrow beads.
Total Length - Wide
The total length of wide beads.
Longest Length - Good
The longest good bead length.
Longest Length - Narrow/Gap
The longest narrow bead length.
Longest Length - Wide
The longest length of wide beads.

8.2.3 Bead Tool: Results

Tools & Results and All Results list information from the current and previous inspections.
A red box around a tool indicates that the tool failed. Status provides information about the specific failure.
All Results displays the Result, Time, Pass Count, and Fail Count information at a glance. Expand the inspection tool to see
specific results for that tool.

Count - Good
The number of beads that fall within the user-defined good bead width.
Expand Count - Good to see the length of each bead, the total length of all beads, and the longest length.
Count - Narrow/Gap
The number of narrow beads or gaps that qualify as having a narrow bead width.
Expand Count - Narrow/Gap to see the length of each bead, the total length of all beads, and the longest length.
Count - Wide
The number of wide beads that qualify as having a wide bead width.
Expand Count - Wide to see the length of each bead, the total length of all beads, and the longest length.

72 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Average Width
The average width of all beads.
Expand Average Width to see the largest width and the smallest width.
Adaptive Threshold
The grayscale value used to detect the bead when the Threshold Type is Adaptive. If the tool cannot calculate this
value, or if the Threshold Type is Fixed, this value displays as --.
Execution Time
The execution time, in milliseconds, for the currently selected tool in the current inspection.
Expand Execution Time to see the historical minimum and maximum execution times up to this point for the
selected tool.
Use the reset button in the Inspection Summary to reset these historical values.
Status
Status and error messages display as appropriate.

8.2.4 Bead Tool: Adjust the ROI

Follow these steps to adjust the Bead tool ROI.

Note: This procedure is an example only. Use the appropriate steps to adjust the Bead tool ROI for your
application.

1. Add a Bead tool to the inspection.

Figure 94. Add a Bead Tool

2. Move the ROI over the bead to be inspected.

3. Move an anchor point to a new position by clicking on the anchor point when the Hand icon displays.
Figure 95. Click to Move Anchor Point

4. Click the plus sign on either end of the bead ROI to add more anchor points.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 73

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 96. Add Anchor Point

5. Click on a line to add an inline anchor point.

a) Point to the ROI line; the pointer changes to a +.
Figure 97. Add Inline Anchor Point

b) Click to select the location for the new anchor point; is added on the line.
Figure 98. Inline Anchor Point Location Selected

c) Click the point again to set the location on the line. The changes to .
Figure 99. Inline Anchor Point Set

6. Click on an anchor point and the Trash icon displays above it; click the Trash to delete the point.
Figure 100. Click to Delete Anchor Point

7. Use the ROI sliders in the Input tab to change the ROI width.
Figure 101. Bead Tool ROI Width

74 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

8. Use the Good Bead Width parameter under Characteristics to define the good bead width.
Green indicates that the bead width is acceptable. Red indicates that the bead width is too narrow or that a gap
exists. Blue indicates that the bead width is too wide.
Figure 102. Good, Narrow, and Wide Adhesive Widths

8.2.5 Using the Bead Tool

Follow these steps to configure a Bead tool for a dark adhesive on a bright background.

Note: This procedure is an example only.

In this example, scaling is on (System Settings > Units > Scaling) with the Measurement Unit set at Millimeters, the
Measurement in Pixels set at 810, and the Measurement in Millimeters set at 70.
1. Add a Bead tool to the inspection.
2. Adjust the ROI path and width to match the adhesive bead.
See Bead Tool: Adjust the ROI on p. 73.
Figure 103. Bead ROI

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 75

VE Series Smart Camera

3. Set the threshold.

a) Expand the Threshold parameters.
b) From the Threshold Type list, select Fixed.
Select Fixed when the lighting and image content remain relatively constant for all inspections.
c) From the Bead Type list, select Dark because in this case the adhesive is dark against a bright background.
d) Expand the Threshold parameters.
e) Move the slider until the adhesive bead shows as green in the ROI and the background is ignored. In this
example, that number is 137.
Figure 104. Threshold

4. Set the bead width.

a) Expand the Good Bead Width parameter.
b) Move the sliders to define the minimum and maximum acceptable bead width. In this example, the minimum bead
width is 1.72 mm and the maximum bead width is 4.83 mm.
Figure 105. Good Bead Width

5. Set the test parameters to set the pass/fail criteria.

a) On the Test tab, select the Count - Good checkbox to enable the test parameter.
This option sets the number of good beads that must be present with the tool parameters so that a part passes.
b) Expand Count - Good and move the sliders or enter the minimum and maximum as 1 and 1.
This means that the inspection must find one and only one bead within the ROI that meets the Good Bead Width
definition.
c) Select the Count - Narrow/Gap checkbox to enable the test parameter.
This option sets the allowable number of gaps in the bead.

76 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

d) Move the sliders or enter the minimum and maximum as 0 and 0.

This means that no gaps are allowed. If gaps are found, the inspection fails.
Figure 106. Test Criteria

6. Test a complete range of good and bad samples to make sure that the sensor accepts good parts and rejects bad
parts.

Figure 107. Bad Part—Narrow Bead Width Figure 108. Bad Part—Gap

8.3 Blemish Tool

Use the Blemish tool to determine whether flaws are present on a part (for example, scratches on a disc), or to make sure
that a feature exists on a part.
Although finding features is more commonly an application for a Blob tool, the Blemish tool may be a better option to find a
feature when dealing with variable materials or inconsistent lighting.
Example applications:
• Check for scratches on a part, and reject parts where the scratches are too numerous or larger than acceptable
• Check for the presence of a label or marking on a part that may vary in brightness level

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 77

VE Series Smart Camera

8.3.1 Blemish Tool: Input Parameters

Use the Input parameters to configure how the tool analyzes an image.
Figure 109. Blemish Tool—Input Parameters

ROI
The Region of Interest (ROI) is the user-defined group of pixels in the image that the sensor analyzes.
Figure 110. ROI Shape Selection

Resize and rotate the ROI around the feature to be analyzed. Change the shape of the ROI to a square, ellipse, or
circle as needed by expanding ROI on the Parameters pane and selecting the desired shape. An ROI can be as large as the
entire Field of View (FOV). The ROI automatically displays on the Image pane when a tool is added.
Adjust the placement of the ROI more precisely by using the arrow keys on the computer keyboard.

Masks
Add and define a mask to exclude a group of pixels from the tool analysis.
Figure 111. Masks Parameters

A mask created for a tool will not apply to any other tool in the inspection. Up to 10 masks can be added to a tool.
1. Expand Masks on the Inputs tab.
2. Click . The mask ROI automatically displays on the Image pane.
3. Select the mask shape. The mask ROI can be rectangular, elliptical, or circular.
4. Resize and rotate the mask ROI around the pixels to be excluded.
5. To delete a mask, click .

78 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Sensitivity
Set the Sensitivity to define how sensitive the sensor is to finding blemish or other edges within the ROI. The sensitivity
value helps account for light variations that can affect how well the sensor detects edges on inspected parts.
Figure 112. Sensitivity

The Sensitivity scale is from 0 to 100 where 0 means least sensitive and 100 means most sensitive. If set near 0, the sensor
finds very sharp edges with strong contrast. If set near 100, the sensor finds very dim or blurry edges, and may be unstable.
The default is 80.

Edge Length Range

Shows the different contiguous edge segments found.
Figure 113. Edge Length Range

Use the sliders to specify the edge length range in pixels. Edges found within this range will be considered when calculating
the Pass Count. Green represents lengths within the specified range and yellow represents lengths outside of the specified
range.

Image Overlays
Choose whether to display or hide the annotations, ROI, or masks when this tool is not selected. Masks are hidden by
default.
Figure 114. Image Overlays—Default

These options override the ROI view buttons on the Image Pane Parameters when no tool is selected. When a
specific tool is selected, the ROI information is shown.

Hide Annotations
Hides the annotations on the live image for the tool, even when the tool is selected.

Figure 115. Show Blemish Tool Annotations Figure 116. Hide Blemish Tool Annotations

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 79

VE Series Smart Camera

Hide ROI
Hides the ROI when the tool is not selected.
Hide Masks
Hides the Mask ROI when the tool is not selected.

Tool Histogram
The Tool Histogram graphically displays pixel intensity information within the current ROI.
Figure 117. Example Histogram

Select the Tool Histogram checkbox to enable the histogram. The default is enabled. Expand the Tool Histogram
parameter to view the histogram.
The histogram is a display of the grayscale values on the x axis and the number of pixels on the y axis. The histogram
displays the amount of pixels for each grayscale value. The graph displays information for all grayscale values (0 to 255).
Move the pointer anywhere over the histogram to view specific information. The information updates as the position of the
pointer changes.

Inspection Pass/Fail
Select the Contribute to Inspection Pass/Fail check box (default) if the tool will influence the Pass/Fail status of the
inspection.
Figure 118. Inspection Pass/Fail

The Pass/Fail contribution influences the following:

• Discrete output Pass
• Discrete output Fail
• Pass/Fail results counter
• Pass (Green) and Fail (red) LEDs on the Sensor
Select this checkbox if the overall Pass/Fail status of the inspection is dependent on the current tool.

8.3.2 Blemish Tool: Test Parameters

Use the Test parameters to configure the pass/fail conditions for the tool.
Select the parameter checkbox to enable it. Where applicable, the vertical green bar shows the current parameter
information and the light gray backgrounds show the range over which a value has varied over time.
Where applicable, use the sliders or enter the minimum and maximum for the selected test parameters.
The current data found and the range of historical data found are shown for applicable Test parameters. The historical data
begins from the last reset.

80 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 119. Blemish Tool—Test Parameters

Count
The total number of edge pixels.

8.3.3 Blemish Tool: Results

Tools & Results and All Results list information from the current and previous inspections.
A red box around a tool indicates that the tool failed. Status provides information about the specific failure.
All Results displays the Result, Time, Pass Count, and Fail Count information at a glance. Expand the inspection tool to see
specific results for that tool.

Count
The total number of edge pixels counted.
Length Range
The minimum and maximum edge lengths found.
Expand Length Range to see the minimum and maximum edge pixels counted, and the total edge pixels for each
blemish.
Execution Time
The execution time, in milliseconds, for the currently selected tool in the current inspection.
Expand Execution Time to see the historical minimum and maximum execution times up to this point for the
selected tool.
Use the reset button in the Inspection Summary to reset these historical values.
Status
Status and error messages display as appropriate.

8.3.4 Using the Blemish Tool

Follow these steps for an example Blemish inspection to check for a date/lot code on a product.

Note: This procedure is an example only.

1. Add a Blemish tool to the inspection.

2. Adjust the ROI to frame the date/lot code.
3. Set the sensitivity.
a) Expand the Sensitivity parameters.
b) Move the slider or enter 75 for this example.
A low sensitivity setting finds only high contrast edges, while a high sensitivity setting finds lower contrast edges
as well. Note that the color does not matter; the tool will still find the edges of the date/lot code.

Figure 120. Light Date/Lot Code on a Dark Background Figure 121. Dark Date/Lot Code on a Light Background

4. Leave the default minimum and maximum edge length range (100 px and 165000 px).

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 81

VE Series Smart Camera

This defines how long the edge has to be before it is counted and how small it can be before it is ignored. Green
means that the edge is within the criteria to be counted and yellow means it is outside of the criteria and is being
ignored.
5. Set the Test parameters to set the pass/fail criteria.
a) On the Test tab, select the Count checkbox.
This option sets the number of edges that must be present within the ROI that match the inspection parameters
so that the tool passes.
b) Move the sliders or enter the minimum count at 242 and the maximum count at 233230.
For example, a minimum and maximum count of 0 and 0 means that the part must have zero edges within the
ROI that match the inspection parameters. In this case, the part must be blemish-free.

Note: The green bar indicates the current count and the light gray background indicate the
count over time since the last reset.
6. Test a complete range of good and bad samples to make sure that the sensor accepts good parts and rejects bad
parts.
Figure 122. Bad Part—Missing Date/Lot Code

8.4 Blob Tool

Use the Blob tool to detect and count groups of like-colored pixels within the ROI.
A user-selected range of brightness levels defines the pixels of interest. Then, the Blob tool merges pixels of interest that
touch each other into groups, called blobs. The Blob tool then counts the number of blobs in the ROI, calculates their size in
pixel area, and defines each blob’s center of mass location.
Example applications:
• Count pills
• Measure hole size
• Verify the number of characters in a date/lot code
• Detect LCD segments
• Detect missing products during packaging

82 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

8.4.1 Blob Tool: Input Parameters

Use the Input parameters to configure how the tool analyzes an image.
Figure 123. Blob Tool—Input Parameters

ROI
The Region of Interest (ROI) is the user-defined group of pixels in the image that the sensor analyzes.
Figure 124. ROI Shape Selection

Resize and rotate the ROI around the feature to be analyzed. Change the shape of the ROI to a square, ellipse, or
circle as needed by expanding ROI on the Parameters pane and selecting the desired shape. An ROI can be as large as the
entire Field of View (FOV). The ROI automatically displays on the Image pane when a tool is added.
Adjust the placement of the ROI more precisely by using the arrow keys on the computer keyboard.

Masks
Add and define a mask to exclude a group of pixels from the tool analysis.
Figure 125. Masks Parameters

A mask created for a tool will not apply to any other tool in the inspection. Up to 10 masks can be added to a tool.
1. Expand Masks on the Inputs tab.
2. Click . The mask ROI automatically displays on the Image pane.
3. Select the mask shape. The mask ROI can be rectangular, elliptical, or circular.
4. Resize and rotate the mask ROI around the pixels to be excluded.
5. To delete a mask, click .

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 83

VE Series Smart Camera

Threshold
The threshold parameter is used to mark a transition point.

Threshold Type: Adaptive

Select Adaptive when there are lighting changes that cause the acquired image to change.
Figure 126. Threshold Type—Adaptive

An adaptive threshold is a technique that adjusts the threshold for the tool based upon lighting changes and image content
within the ROI. It performs best if used with bi-modal images, where most pixels fall into two groups of different brightness
levels. Adaptive threshold chooses the current threshold value by converging to a value based on the average value of the
pixels above and below the previous threshold value; it will not move the value of the threshold above or below the minimum
and maximum limits.

Adaptive Threshold: Bead/Blob Type

Defines whether the bead/blob is dark against a relatively brighter background or bright against a darker background.
This parameter defines the appearance of the feature of interest. For example, if you have a dark adhesive or part on a bright
background, choose Dark.
Choosing Dark with an adaptive threshold type causes the tool to limit the threshold to the range specified by the threshold
level minimum and maximum limits. The tool identifies all grouped pixels below the threshold chosen as dark beads/blobs.
Choosing Bright with an adaptive threshold type causes the tool to limit the threshold to the range specified by the threshold
level minimum and maximum limits. The tool identifies all grouped pixels above the specified minimum limit and less than or
equal to the maximum limit as bright beads/blobs.

Adaptive Threshold: Threshold

Use the sliders or enter the desired minimum and maximum possible grayscale threshold.
The tool chooses a threshold value near the middle of the grayscale distribution, and the sliders represent boundaries
beyond which you do not want the tool to move the threshold setting. The green lines show the locations of where most of
the pixels' grayscale values are grouped. If the Tool Histogram option is clear, the green lines will not appear. The chosen
Adaptive Threshold value will be shown within the tool results.

Reject Level
When the Bead/Blob Type is set to Bright, use the Reject Level to narrow the range of pixel intensities to be considered in
an inspection. All pixels brighter than the Reject Level are ignored.
Leaving the Reject Level at the default of 255 means that the tool takes into consideration all grayscale levels in the ROI
from 0 (black) to 255 (white).

Reject Level Example

Consider setting up an inspection for a relatively bright object that ranges from 180 to 200 in pixel intensity and takes up 15
percent of the FOV. The remaining 85 percent of the FOV ranges from 230 to 255 in pixel intensity. Setting a Reject Level of
220 allows the tool to pay attention to only the bright object being inspected. Masking the bright parts of the FOV is not
necessary because only pixels whose intensity is less than the Reject Level will contribute to bright beads/blobs.

84 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Threshold Type: Fixed

Select Fixed when the lighting and image content remain relatively constant for all inspections.
Figure 127. Threshold Type—Fixed

Fixed Threshold: Threshold

Use the sliders to define the range of brightness values of interest.
The green lines show the locations of where most of the pixels' grayscale values are grouped. If the Tool Histogram option is
clear, the green lines are not shown.

Area Range
Set the size range of blobs that the tool will count.
Figure 128. Area Range

Green represents blobs that are within the set range, and yellow represents blobs that are outside of the set range.

Blob Statistics
Select to calculate and display advanced results on Tools & Results and All Results.
Figure 129. Blob Statistics

When enabled, Perimeter, Compactness, Major Axis Length, Minor Axis Length, Major Axis Angle, Eccentricity, Minimum
Radius, Maximum Radius, Minimum Radius Position, Maximum Radius Position, Top Left Position X, Top Left Position Y,
Bottom Right Position X, and Bottom Right Position Y are calculated in addition to Area and Centroid.

Filters
Set filters for tool analysis.
Figure 130. Blob Tool Filters

Discard Blobs that Touch ROI

Select to exclude blobs that touch the perimeter of the ROI.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 85

VE Series Smart Camera

Fill Holes within Blob

Select to ignore (by filling) small features such as scratches and glare that might otherwise appear as small
imperfections or non-blobs within a larger blob. After selecting this option, use the slider or enter the size of the
largest hole to fill.

Image Overlays
Choose whether to display or hide the annotations, ROI, or masks when this tool is not selected. Masks are hidden by
default.
Figure 131. Image Overlays—Default

These options override the ROI view buttons on the Image Pane Parameters when no tool is selected. When a
specific tool is selected, the ROI information is shown.

Hide Annotations
Hides the annotations on the live image for the tool, even when the tool is selected.

Figure 132. Show Blob Tool Annotations Figure 133. Hide Blob Tool Annotations

Hide ROI
Hides the ROI when the tool is not selected.
Hide Masks
Hides the Mask ROI when the tool is not selected.

Tool Histogram
The Tool Histogram graphically displays pixel intensity information within the current ROI.
Figure 134. Example Histogram

Select the Tool Histogram checkbox to enable the histogram. The default is enabled. Expand the Tool Histogram
parameter to view the histogram.
The histogram is a display of the grayscale values on the x axis and the number of pixels on the y axis. The histogram
displays the amount of pixels for each grayscale value. The graph displays information for all grayscale values (0 to 255).
Move the pointer anywhere over the histogram to view specific information. The information updates as the position of the
pointer changes.

86 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Inspection Pass/Fail
Select the Contribute to Inspection Pass/Fail check box (default) if the tool will influence the Pass/Fail status of the
inspection.
Figure 135. Inspection Pass/Fail

The Pass/Fail contribution influences the following:

• Discrete output Pass
• Discrete output Fail
• Pass/Fail results counter
• Pass (Green) and Fail (red) LEDs on the Sensor
Select this checkbox if the overall Pass/Fail status of the inspection is dependent on the current tool.

8.4.2 Blob Tool: Test Parameters

Use the Test parameters to configure the pass/fail conditions for the tool.
Select the parameter checkbox to enable it. Where applicable, the vertical green bar shows the current parameter
information and the light gray backgrounds show the range over which a value has varied over time.
Where applicable, use the sliders or enter the minimum and maximum for the selected test parameters.
The current data found and the range of historical data found are shown for applicable Test parameters. The historical data
begins from the last reset.

Figure 136. Blob Tool—Test Parameters

Count
The number of blobs found.
Total Area
The total area of all of the blobs found.
Individual Blobs
From the Blob(s) to test dropdown list, select All
Blobs, First Blob, or Specific Blob, to view area
and centroid information about the blobs.
When Specific Blob is selected, choose the specific
blob using the Blob Index.
To verify if blobs within the ROI are of a specific area,
select the Area checkbox and use the sliders or enter
the minimum and maximum blob size.
When Calculate Blob Statistics is enabled,
additional parameters for the selected blob become
available. These include Perimeter, Compactness,
Major Axis Length, Minor Axis Length, Eccentricity,
Minimum Radius, Maximum Radius, Major Axis
Angle, Top Left Position X, Top Left Position Y,
Bottom Right Position X, and Bottom Right Position Y.

8.4.3 Blob Tool: Results

Tools & Results and All Results list information from the current and previous inspections.
A red box around a tool indicates that the tool failed. Status provides information about the specific failure.
All Results displays the Result, Time, Pass Count, and Fail Count information at a glance. Expand the inspection tool to see
specific results for that tool.

Count
The number of blobs found.
Total Area
The total area of all of the blobs found.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 87

VE Series Smart Camera

Area Range
The minimum and maximum areas of the blobs found.
Expand Area Range to see the area and centroid (center point) for each blob.
Click a blob's area range to highlight that blob on the Image pane.
Statistics
Advanced statistical information about each blob.
When enabled, Perimeter, Compactness, Major Axis Length, Minor Axis Length, Major Axis Angle, Eccentricity,
Minimum Radius, Maximum Radius, Minimum Radius Position, Maximum Radius Position, Top Left Position X, Top
Left Position Y, Bottom Right Position X, and Bottom Right Position Y are calculated in addition to Area and
Centroid.
Available when Calculate Blob Statistics is checked. See the following sections for more details.
Adaptive Threshold
The grayscale value for the software-selected threshold value used to generate the blobs.
This result is blank if the threshold type is set to Fixed.
Execution Time
The execution time, in milliseconds, for the currently selected tool in the current inspection.
Expand Execution Time to see the historical minimum and maximum execution times up to this point for the
selected tool.
Use the reset button in the Inspection Summary to reset these historical values.
Status
Status and error messages display as appropriate.

Area
The area (A) is a count of the total number of pixels that belong to the blob.

Centroid
The centroid (xc, yc) is the point at the center of mass of the blob.
For simple blobs such as solid circles, ellipses, or rectangles, this is the center of the shape. For more complicated shapes it
is helpful to imagine a piece of cardboard cut in the shape of the blob. The centroid is the point where you could balance the
cardboard on the tip of a pencil. For complicated shapes—especially shapes with unfilled holes—the centroid might lie
outside of the shape.
The x coordinate of the centroid is calculated by adding the x coordinates of each pixel in the blob and dividing by the area.
The y coordinate is similar:

Perimeter
The perimeter (P) gives an approximate measurement of the length of the circumference of the blob.
Because blobs are built from individual pixels, it is most practical to estimate the perimeter by counting the contributions of
individual pixels on the blob's boundary. The following describes the exact values that are added to the perimeter for each
possible pixel configuration. In each example, the description refers to the center pixel in the corresponding pictures.
A pixel with no neighbors that belong to the same blob contributes 3.14
linear pixels to the perimeter of the blob. This can happen only in a blob
that has an area of one. Since such small blobs are usually ignored, this
circumstance is rare.

88 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

A pixel with one neighbor that belongs to the same blob contributes
2.571 linear pixels to the perimeter of the blob.

A pixel with two neighbors that belong to the same blob, forming a
straight line, contributes exactly 2 linear pixels to the perimeter of the
blob.

A pixel with two neighbors that belong to the same blob, forming a
corner, contributes 1.414 linear pixels to the perimeter of the blob.

A pixel with three neighbors that belong to the same blob contributes
exactly 1 linear pixel to the perimeter of the blob.

A pixel with four neighbors that belong to the same blob contributes
nothing to the perimeter of the blob.

This method of counting slightly overestimates the "true" perimeter. For example, a circle with a radius of 100 pixels has a
computed perimeter of approximately 660 pixels, compared with the expected value of 628 pixels.
If the sensor is configured to convert pixel distances to other units, (for example, millimeters), the perimeter is given in those
units. If the blob contains holes that have not been filled, the length of the perimeter includes the points on the perimeters of
these holes.

Compactness
Compactness is a measurement of the space a blob occupies.
The compactness is high for blobs that are nearly circular and low for blobs that are elongated or complicated.

compactness =
Where A is the area and P is the perimeter of the Blob in question. An idealized circle would have a compactness of 100, but
because the perimeter is approximated (see above), the highest realistic value for most blobs is roughly 90. Very small blobs
with just a handful of pixels may reach or even exceed the theoretical maximum of 100, again because of the approximations
in the perimeter calculation.

Major Axis Length, Minor Axis Length, and Major Axis Angle
Major Axis Length, Minor Axis Length, and Major Axis Angle are determined using a best fit ellipse.
To understand Major Axis Length, Minor Axis Length, and Major Axis Angle, it is important to note that these are not
measurements of the blob itself because the blob may be an irregular shape. Rather, these measurements are determined
by a well-defined shape, a "best fit ellipse".
Figure 137. Best Fit Ellipse

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 89

VE Series Smart Camera

These three results combine to give information about the elongation and orientation of a blob . The equations used to
compute these statistics are complicated, but the results usually have an intuitively useful meaning, described below. The
first step in computing these results is to compute the M2,0, M0,2 and M1,1 statistical moments:

where A is the area, (xc, yc) are the coordinates of the centroid, and (xi, yi) are the coordinates of pixel i. These values
represent the variance with respect to x, the variance with respect to y, and the covariance, respectively. The final results can
be calculated as follows:

Major Axis Length

Minor Axis Length

Major Axis Angle

The following table gives a more practical perspective on how to interpret these results. If the sensor is configured to convert
pixels to other units, the major and minor axis lengths are given in those units. The major axis angle is always given in
degrees.

Blob Shape Meaning of Major Axis Meaning of Minor Axis Meaning of Major Axis
Length Length angle
Circular, no holes Diameter of the circle Equal to the major axis Unstable
length
Elliptical, no holes Length of the ellipse Width of the ellipse Orientation of the ellipse
Square, no holes Diameter of a circle that best Equal to the major axis Unstable
approximates the square length
Rectangular, no holes Length of an ellipse that best Width of an ellipse that best Orientation of the rectangle
approximates the rectangle approximates the rectangle
Complicated shape, no holes Length of an ellipse that best Width of an ellipse that best Orientation of the shape—
approximates the shape approximates the shape unstable if length and width
are nearly equal

90 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Blob Shape Meaning of Major Axis Meaning of Minor Axis Meaning of Major Axis
Length Length angle
Any shape with holes Results vary depending on Results vary depending on Results vary depending on
exact shape—experiment on exact shape—experiment on exact shape—experiment on
your particular shape your particular shape your particular shape

Eccentricity
The eccentricity of a blob is the length of the major axis divided by the length of the minor axis.
For circular regions and other regions with radial symmetry (such as a square), the value will be very close to 1. For
elongated regions, the value will increase.

Max Radius and Max Radius Position

The Maximum Radius of a blob is the distance from the centroid of the blob to the farthest pixel on that blob's perimeter. The
Maximum Radius Position gives the pixel coordinates of that farthest perimeter point.
If the sensor is configured to convert pixels to other units, the maximum radius will be given in those units.

Min Radius and Min Radius Position

The Minimum Radius of a blob is the distance from the centroid of the blob to the closest pixel on that blob's perimeter. The
Minimum Radius Position gives the pixel coordinates of that closest perimeter point.
If the blob contains unfilled holes, the minimum radius position may be on the perimeter of a hole. If the sensor is configured
to convert pixels to other units, the minimum radius will be given in those units.

Top Left Position X, Top Left Position Y, Bottom Right Position X, and Bottom
Right Position Y
The top left and bottom right coordinates are determined using a bounding box around each blob. These positions represent
the maximum and minimum coordinates of each blob.
Figure 138. Blob Bounding Box

Top Left
Position
(x,y)

Bottom Right
Position (x,y)

8.4.4 Using the Blob Tool

Follow these steps for an example blob inspection in a pill counting application.

Note: This procedure is an example only.

1. Add a Blob tool to the inspection.

2. Adjust the ROI to frame the first set of pills in the blister pack.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 91

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 139. Adjust ROI

3. Set the threshold.

a) Expand the Threshold parameters.
b) From the Threshold Type list, select Fixed.
Select Fixed when the lighting and image content remain relatively constant for all inspections.
c) Expand the second Threshold parameters.
d) Move the sliders to define the minimum and maximum threshold.
This sets a minimum and maximum brightness within the ROI to include or exclude.
Figure 140. Threshold

4. Set the area range.

This defines the size range of pixel groups to include or exclude.
a) Expand the Area Range parameters.
b) Move the sliders to define the minimum and maximum size of pixel groups.
Yellow indicates that a group of pixels is outside of the set range.

92 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 141. Area Range

5. Set the Test parameters to set the pass/fail criteria.

a) On the Test tab, select the Count checkbox to enable the test parameter.
This option sets the number of blobs that must be present within the ROI that match the inspection parameters so
that the tool passes.
b) Expand Count and move the sliders or enter the minimum and maximum count as 10 and 10.

Note: The green bar indicates the current count and the light gray background indicates the
count over time.
6. Copy the Blob tool.
a) With the Blob tool selected, click .
The tool and all of the settings are duplicated (copied) and all of the tools are deselected.
b) Select one of the Blob tools and click a second time.
There are now three Blob tools with the same settings.
7. Click Blob02 (the second Blob tool) and move the ROI over the second blister pack.
8. Click Blob03 (the third Blob tool) and move the ROI over the third blister pack.
9. Click to show all three ROI at the same time.
10. Test a complete range of good and bad samples to make sure that the sensor accepts good parts and rejects bad
parts.

Figure 142. Bad Part—Missing Pill Figure 143. Bad Part—Broken Pill

8.5 Circle Detect Tool

Use the Circle Detect tool to find a single circle or a piece of a circle (arc).
The Circle Detect tool finds many edge points along the transitions between bright and dark pixels and then fits a circular
shape to some or all of these points. The tool can determine a bend radius and the circumference of a circular part. The tool
finds only one circle within the ROI—either the best circle (using the Best Points option) or the average circle (using the All
Points option).

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 93

VE Series Smart Camera

Example applications:
• Find flaws such as chips or metal spurs along a punched or drilled hole
• Measure hole size
• Measure the size of a disk
• Verify that the neck on a vial or bottle is the correct size
• Measure the bend radius of an electronic component
• Find the radius of a circle that is too big to fit in the image

8.5.1 Circle Detect Tool: Input Parameters

Use the Input parameters to configure how the tool analyzes an image.
Figure 144. Circle Detect Tool—Input Parameters

ROI
The Region of Interest (ROI) is the user-defined group of pixels in the image that the sensor analyzes.
Figure 145. Circle Detect Tool ROI

The ROI is two concentric circles that can also be configured as an arc. Resize or reshape the ROI around the feature
to be analyzed. Tool analysis follows the direction of the arrow. The ROI automatically displays on the Image pane when a
tool is added.
Adjust the placement of the ROI more precisely by using the arrow keys on the computer keyboard.
Use the two circles to surround the specific circle of interest and avoid other edges, and to improve the execution time by
reducing the number of pixels that are analyzed.

ROI Width
Larger ROIs find more edges, however if too many edges are outliers, the desired circle may not be found. Smaller
ROIs execute faster.
The tool works best when the inner ring of the ROI is completely inside the circle being detected, and when the ROI
and the circle being detected are concentric.

94 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Sample Rate
The sample rate sets the spacing between scan lines along the width of the ROI (one sample for every pixel, one
sample every second pixel, etc.). When the sample rate includes more pixels, more edges, more precise results, and
small flaws are found. The highest sample rate is Every Pixel. When the sample rate includes fewer pixels, fewer,
more widely spaced edges are found. The lowest sample rate is Every 64th Pixel. This creates a trade-off between
speed and precision. Lower sample rates execute faster, and higher sample rates find more precise results and are
capable of detecting smaller flaws.

Threshold
Indicates the rate of change of grayscale values that is needed to detect an edge.
Figure 146. Threshold Parameters

Edges are detected by measuring transitions from bright to dark or dark to bright. Enter a threshold in the range from 1 to
255. The default value is 20. As this value is reduced, the tool finds weak, blurry, or more gradual lines or edges. At lower
thresholds, unwanted transitions such as background noise may become edges. Detected edges are combined to find
potential circles.

Edge Polarity
Edge Polarity defines the type of edges that the tool finds.
• Dark to Bright—Finds edges where pixel intensities start below the threshold value and cross above the threshold
value
• Bright to Dark—Finds edges where pixel intensities start above the threshold value and cross below the threshold
value
• Bright or Dark—Finds any edge

Search For
Set the type of object that the Line Detect tool searches for.

Circle, Best Points

Automatically determines which edge points make the best circle and ignores the rest of the points. The points that
are included are shown on the image in orange, while the points that are ignored are in yellow. Best Points is
tolerant of noise or extra edges in the ROI, but under some circumstances, it may ignore edges that should be
included.
Circle, All Points
Finds a circle that explains all of the edges as well as possible; all found points are included in the analysis. Found
points are shown on the image in orange. All Points is faster than Best Points, but works poorly if there are extra
edges or noise within the ROI. All Points is useful if if the circle being examined is irregular or elliptical.
Circular Arc
Finds a piece of a circle. Use this setting to find the start or end angle of an arc or bend or to measure the angle
subtended by a bend. Circular Arc mode operates on best points.

Image Overlays
Choose whether to display or hide the annotations or the ROI when this tool is not selected.
Figure 147. Image Overlays—Default

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 95

VE Series Smart Camera

These options override the ROI view buttons on the Image Pane Parameters when no tool is selected. When a
specific tool is selected, the ROI information is shown.

Hide Annotations
Hides the annotations on the live image for the tool, even when the tool is selected.

Figure 148. Show Circle Detect Tool Annotations Figure 149. Hide Circle Detect Tool Annotations

Hide ROI
Hides the ROI when the tool is not selected.

Tool Histogram
The Tool Histogram graphically displays pixel intensity information within the current ROI.
Figure 150. Example Histogram

Select the Tool Histogram checkbox to enable the histogram. The default is enabled. Expand the Tool Histogram
parameter to view the histogram.
The histogram is a display of the grayscale values on the x axis and the number of pixels on the y axis. The histogram
displays the amount of pixels for each grayscale value. The graph displays information for all grayscale values (0 to 255).
Move the pointer anywhere over the histogram to view specific information. The information updates as the position of the
pointer changes.

Inspection Pass/Fail
Select the Contribute to Inspection Pass/Fail check box (default) if the tool will influence the Pass/Fail status of the
inspection.
Figure 151. Inspection Pass/Fail

The Pass/Fail contribution influences the following:

• Discrete output Pass
• Discrete output Fail
• Pass/Fail results counter
• Pass (Green) and Fail (red) LEDs on the Sensor
Select this checkbox if the overall Pass/Fail status of the inspection is dependent on the current tool.

96 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

8.5.2 Circle Detect Tool: Test Parameters

Use the Test parameters to configure the pass/fail conditions for the tool.
Select the parameter checkbox to enable it. Where applicable, the vertical green bar shows the current parameter
information and the light gray backgrounds show the range over which a value has varied over time.
Where applicable, use the sliders or enter the minimum and maximum for the selected test parameters.
The current data found and the range of historical data found are shown for applicable Test parameters. The historical data
begins from the last reset.
Figure 152. Circle Detect Tool—Test Parameters
Radius
The distance from the center of the detected circle to
its edges.
Use this value to determine if a circle is the correct
size.
Min Radius
The distance from the center of the circle to the
closest included edge point.
Use this value to look for flaws such as metal spurs
on the inside of a drilled or punched hole.
Max Radius
The distance from the center of the circle to the
farthest included edge point.
Use the value to find flaws such as chips or tearing on
the outside of a punched or drilled hole.
Circumference
The distance around the circle.
Available when Search For is set to Circle, Best
Points or Circle, All Points.
Arc Length
The distance along the arc.
Available when Search For is set to Circular Arc.
Arc Angle
The angle between the start and the end of the arc.
Available when Search For is set to Circular Arc.
Average Error
The average distance between included edge points
and the circle found.
Use this value to determine if a circle is squished
(elliptical), poorly formed, or irregular.

8.5.3 Circle Detect Tool: Results

Tools & Results and All Results list information from the current and previous inspections.
A red box around a tool indicates that the tool failed. Status provides information about the specific failure.
All Results displays the Result, Time, Pass Count, and Fail Count information at a glance. Expand the inspection tool to see
specific results for that tool.

Center
The x and y coordinates of the center of the found circle. This point can be used as inputs to other tools.
Radius
The distance from the center of the detected circle to its edges.
Min Radius
The distance from the center of the circle to the closest included edge point.
Min Radius Point
The x and y coordinates of the include edge point located closest to the center of the circle or arc.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 97

VE Series Smart Camera

Max Radius
The distance from the center of the circle to the farthest included edge point.
Max Radius Point
The x and y coordinates of the included edge point located farthest from the center of the circle or arc.
Circumference
The distance around the circle.
Available when Search For is set to Circle, Best Points or Circle, All Points.
Arc Length
The distance along the arc.
Available when Search For is set to Circular Arc.
Arc Angle
The angle between the start and the end of the arc.
Available when Search For is set to Circular Arc.
Arc Start
The angle between the x-axis and the beginning of the arc. This is between -180 and +180 degrees.
Available when Search For is set to Circular Arc.
Arc End
The angle between the x-axis and the end of the arc. This is between -180 and +180 degrees.
Available when Search For is set to Circular Arc.
Average Error
The average distance between included edge points and the circle found.
Execution Time
The execution time, in milliseconds, for the currently selected tool in the current inspection.
Expand Execution Time to see the historical minimum and maximum execution times up to this point for the
selected tool.
Use the reset button in the Inspection Summary to reset these historical values.
Status
Status and error messages display as appropriate.

8.5.4 Using the Circle Detect Tool

Follow these steps for a typical Circle Detect inspection to check for flashing, spurs, or cracks in a disk.

Note: This procedure is an example only.

1. Add a Circle Detect tool to the inspection to check the outer edge of the disk.
2. Adjust the ROI to frame the outside edge of the disk.
a) Move the ROI so that it is concentric with the disk.
b) Expand the outer ring of the ROI to frame the disk. Leave some space around the disk to ensure that flashing or
spurs are found.
c) Adjust the inner ring of the ROI so that the hole in the disk is exclude from the inspection.

98 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 153. Circle Detect ROI—Outer Edge Detection

3. Set the Input parameters.

a) Expand the Search For parameter.
b) Select Circle, All Points from the list.
4. Set the Test parameters to set the pass/fail criteria.
a) Select the Average Error checkbox.
This option looks at the average distance between included edge points and the circle found.
b) Set the range from 0 px to 3 px.
5. Add a Circle Detect tool to the inspection to check the hole in the disk.
6. Adjust the ROI to frame the hole in the disk.
a) Move the ROI so that it is concentric with the disk.
b) Reduce the outer ring of the ROI to frame the hole.
c) Adjust the inner ring of the ROI so that the entire hole is included in the inspection.
Figure 154. Circle Detect ROI—Hole Edge Detection

7. Set the Input parameters.

a) Expand the Search For parameter.
b) Select Circle, All Points from the list.
8. Set the Test parameters to set the pass/fail criteria.
a) Select the Average Error checkbox.
b) Set the range from 0 px to 3 px.
9. Test a complete range of good and bad samples to make sure that the sensor accepts good parts and rejects bad
parts.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 99

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 155. Bad Part—Flashing Figure 156. Bad Part—Crack

Note: The flashing on the outer edge Note: This crack fails both of the
fails only the first Circle Detect tool in Circle Detect tools in this example.
this example.

8.6 Edge Tool

Use the Edge tool to detect and count transitions between bright and dark pixels (edges).
The Edge tool counts the total number of edges, and determines the position of each edge. Edge position information can be
used for distance or angle measurements when used with a Measure tool.
Example applications:
• Measure the height and width of a part
• Count the pins on an integrated circuit
• Measure the height of a needle
• Measure the deflection of an automotive gauge
• Detect the edge of a web
• Verify that a bottle cap is on completely

8.6.1 Edge Tool: Input Parameters

Use the Input parameters to configure how the tool analyzes an image.
Figure 157. Edge Tool—Input Parameters

100 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

ROI
The Region of Interest (ROI) is the user-defined group of pixels in the image that the sensor analyzes.
Figure 158. ROI Parameters

The ROI is a line of pixels that can be shortened, lengthened, or widened as needed for the inspection. Tool analysis follows
the direction of the arrow. Set the width and the sample rate for the region of interest. The ROI automatically displays on the
Image pane when a tool is added.
Adjust the placement of the ROI more precisely by using the arrow keys on the computer keyboard.

ROI Width
An ROI can be as large as the entire Field of View (FOV).
Note that:
• Narrow ROIs execute faster but could miss the edge
• Wide ROIs are more consistent but don't execute as fast
• A wide ROI provides an average value/location, which results in improved repeatability
• The ROI must be 13 pixels or wider to calculate the rotation of a part (Locate tool only)
Sample Rate
The sample rate sets the number of samples per pixels (one sample per pixel, two samples per pixel, etc.). The
sample rate determines the sub-pixel resolution, which increases the resolution of the tool, and increases the
inspection time.

Figure 159. 1 px Wide ROI Figure 160. 13 px Wide ROI

Threshold
The Threshold parameter marks the grayscale transition point.
The tool marks the edge where the pixel intensity crosses the threshold level. From the Threshold Type list, select one of
the following:
• Absolute
• Relative (default)
• Edge Strength

Threshold Type: Absolute

Finds an edge at a specific grayscale level.
Figure 161. Absolute Threshold Parameters

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 101

VE Series Smart Camera

While Absolute threshold is less likely to find a false edge than Relative threshold, it may miss edges if the light level changes
between inspections.

Absolute Threshold: Value

Enter a specific grayscale value from 0 to 255.

Edge Polarity
Edge Polarity defines the type of edges that the tool finds.
• Dark to Bright—Finds edges where pixel intensities start below the threshold value and cross above the threshold
value
• Bright to Dark—Finds edges where pixel intensities start above the threshold value and cross below the threshold
value
• Bright or Dark—Finds any edge

Absolute Threshold: Edge Profile Graph

Figure 162. Absolute Threshold—Edge Profile Graph

For absolute threshold, the x axis is the length of the ROI. The y axis is the actual grayscale value from 0 to 255. The light
blue line shows the absolute pixel intensity. The horizontal gray threshold line moves up or down with the threshold value.
Point to a location on the graph—the corresponding location is the blue line on the tool ROI displayed on the image.

Threshold Type: Relative

Finds an edge at a relative pixel intensity. This is the default threshold setting.
Figure 163. Relative Threshold Parameters

The brightest grayscale level found along the ROI is 100% and the darkest is 0%. While Relative threshold is more tolerant of
light fluctuations between inspections than other transition types, it may find false edges.

102 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Relative Threshold: Percent

Choose the percentage value at which the edge should be marked.

Edge Polarity
Edge Polarity defines the type of edges that the tool finds.
• Dark to Bright—Finds edges where pixel intensities start below the threshold value and cross above the threshold
value
• Bright to Dark—Finds edges where pixel intensities start above the threshold value and cross below the threshold
value
• Bright or Dark—Finds any edge

Relative Threshold: Edge Profile Graph

Figure 164. Relative Threshold—Edge Profile Graph

For relative threshold, the x axis is the length of the ROI. The y axis is the pixel intensity along the ROI, with 0% as the
darkest pixel in the ROI and 100% as the lightest pixel in the ROI. The light blue line shows the percentage pixel intensity
relative to the horizontal gray threshold line. The threshold line moves up or down with the percent value.

Note: Because the pixel intensity is relative to what is seen in the ROI, this does not necessarily mean that
0% = pure black or that 100% = pure white.

Point to a location on the graph—the corresponding location is the blue line on the tool ROI displayed on the image.

Threshold Type: Edge Strength

Measures the rate of change of grayscale values and needs sharply-defined transitions to find edges.
Figure 165. Edge Strength Threshold Parameters

Edge strength ignores gradual changes in light levels across the tool better than other threshold types and it filters out weak
or gradual edges.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 103

VE Series Smart Camera

Edge Strength Threshold: Edge Strength

Enter an edge strength value from 1 to 255.
Edges are selected by the edge strength method, which measures the rate of change from bright to dark or dark to bright.
Enter an edge strength threshold in the range from 1 to 255. The default value is 20. As this value is reduced, the tool finds
weak, blurry, or more gradual edges.

Edge Polarity
Edge Polarity defines the type of edges that the tool finds.
• Dark to Bright—Finds edges where pixel intensities start below the threshold value and cross above the threshold
value
• Bright to Dark—Finds edges where pixel intensities start above the threshold value and cross below the threshold
value
• Bright or Dark—Finds any edge

Edge Strength Threshold: Edge Profile Graph

Figure 166. Edge Strength Threshold—Edge Profile Graph

For edge strength threshold, the x axis is the length of the ROI. The y axis has two measurements. The first is the light blue
axis. It represents Edge Strength, a measure of the rate of change of pixel grayscale values. The second is the dark gray
axis. It represents Edge Profile, which gives the absolute grayscale level across the tool ROI. The blue line is the rate of
change of the grayscale value along the ROI. The two horizontal gray lines are the edge strength threshold plus and minus.
Point to a location on the graph—the corresponding location is the blue line on the tool ROI displayed on the image.

Filters
Set filters for tool analysis.
Figure 167. Edge Tool Filters

Smoothing
Runs a rolling average along the ROI length. Smoothing filters out sharp changes in the edge profile.

Note: A high filter number may miss the edge of a narrow line.

104 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Minimum Edge Width

Filters out small spike-of-intensity changes, and narrow dark or bright bands. It determines the distance before and
after an edge that must be free from additional transitions or the end of the ROI before the edge is recognized as
valid.

Note: A high filter number may miss the edge of a narrow line.

Edge Profile
The Edge Profile graph changes depending on which threshold type is selected. Refer to the Threshold section and the
specific threshold types for details on the Edge Profile graph.

Image Overlays
Choose whether to display or hide the annotations or the ROI when this tool is not selected.
Figure 168. Image Overlays—Default

These options override the ROI view buttons on the Image Pane Parameters when no tool is selected. When a
specific tool is selected, the ROI information is shown.

Hide Annotations
Hides the annotations on the live image for the tool, even when the tool is selected.

Figure 169. Show Edge Tool Annotations Figure 170. Hide Edge Tool Annotations

Hide ROI
Hides the ROI when the tool is not selected.

Tool Histogram
The Tool Histogram graphically displays pixel intensity information within the current ROI.
Figure 171. Example Histogram

Select the Tool Histogram checkbox to enable the histogram. The default is enabled. Expand the Tool Histogram
parameter to view the histogram.
The histogram is a display of the grayscale values on the x axis and the number of pixels on the y axis. The histogram
displays the amount of pixels for each grayscale value. The graph displays information for all grayscale values (0 to 255).
Move the pointer anywhere over the histogram to view specific information. The information updates as the position of the
pointer changes.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 105

VE Series Smart Camera

Inspection Pass/Fail
Select the Contribute to Inspection Pass/Fail check box (default) if the tool will influence the Pass/Fail status of the
inspection.
Figure 172. Inspection Pass/Fail

The Pass/Fail contribution influences the following:

• Discrete output Pass
• Discrete output Fail
• Pass/Fail results counter
• Pass (Green) and Fail (red) LEDs on the Sensor
Select this checkbox if the overall Pass/Fail status of the inspection is dependent on the current tool.

8.6.2 Edge Tool: Test Parameters

Use the Test parameters to configure the pass/fail conditions for the tool.
Select the parameter checkbox to enable it. Where applicable, the vertical green bar shows the current parameter
information and the light gray backgrounds show the range over which a value has varied over time.
Where applicable, use the sliders or enter the minimum and maximum for the selected test parameters.
The current data found and the range of historical data found are shown for applicable Test parameters. The historical data
begins from the last reset.
Figure 173. Edge Tool—Test Parameters
Total Count
The total number of edges.
Dark to Bright Count
The total number of edges that start below the
threshold value and cross above the threshold value.
Bright to Dark Count
The total number of edges that start above the
threshold value and cross below the threshold value.
Maximum Edge Strength
The greatest rate of change value observed by the
tool.
Available when the Threshold Type is set to Edge
Strength.

8.6.3 Edge Tool: Results

Tools & Results and All Results list information from the current and previous inspections.
A red box around a tool indicates that the tool failed. Status provides information about the specific failure.
All Results displays the Result, Time, Pass Count, and Fail Count information at a glance. Expand the inspection tool to see
specific results for that tool.

Total Count
The total number of edges.
Expand Total Count to see the location of each edge.
Click an edge number/location to highlight that edge in the Image pane.
Dark to Bright Count
The total number of edges that start below the threshold value and cross above the threshold value.
Expand Dark to Bright Count to see the location of each edge.
Bright to Dark Count
The total number of edges that start above the threshold value and cross below the threshold value.
Expand Bright to Dark Count to see the location of each edge.

106 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Maximum Edge Strength

The greatest rate of change value observed by the tool.
Available when the Threshold Type is set to Edge Strength.
Execution Time
The execution time, in milliseconds, for the currently selected tool in the current inspection.
Expand Execution Time to see the historical minimum and maximum execution times up to this point for the
selected tool.
Use the reset button in the Inspection Summary to reset these historical values.
Status
Status and error messages display as appropriate.

8.6.4 Using the Edge and Measure Tools

Follow these steps for an example Edge inspection to check the position of a plunger in a syringe.
This procedure uses two Edge tools and a Measure tool to determine the position of the plunger in the barrel.

Note: This procedure is an example only.

1. Add an Edge tool to the inspection.

2. Adjust the ROI position, length, and width.
a) Position the ROI vertically over the top of the plunger.
b) Expand ROI, then expand ROI Width.
c) Set the ROI width to 161 px.
Figure 174. ROI Over the Top of the Plunger

3. Set the threshold.

a) Expand the Threshold parameters.
b) Set the Threshold Type to Edge Strength.
c) Leave Edge Strength at the default (20).
d) Select Bright to Dark from the Edge Polarity list.
The tool finds the top of the plunger.
4. Add a second Edge tool.
5. Adjust the ROI position, length, and width.
a) Position the ROI vertically over the top of the barrel.
b) Expand ROI, then expand ROI Width.
c) Set the ROI width to 97 px.
Figure 175. ROI Over the Top of the Barrel

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 107

VE Series Smart Camera

6. Set the threshold.

a) Expand the Threshold parameters.
b) Set the Threshold Type to Edge Strength.
c) Expand Edge Strength and set it to 21.
d) Select Dark to Bright from the Edge Polarity list.
The tool finds the lower edge of the barrel.
7. Add a Measure tool.
a) Expand Measure From... and select Edge02 from the Tool list.
b) Expand Measure To... and select Edge01 from the Tool list.
Figure 176. Measure Tool

8. Set the Test parameters to set the pass/fail criteria.

a) On the Test tab, select the Distance Y checkbox to enable the test parameter.
b) Move the sliders slightly above and below the green line to allow for very slight variations in the distance.

Note: The green bar indicates the current distance and the light gray background indicates the
distance over time.
9. Click to show all ROIs at the same time.
Figure 177. All Tools Shown

10. Test a complete range of good and bad samples to make sure that the sensor accepts good parts and rejects bad
parts.

Figure 178. Good Part Figure 179. Bad Part—Plunger Too High

108 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

8.7 Line Detect Tool

Use the Line Detect tool to find single, straight line segments.
The Line Detect tool finds many edge points along the transitions between bright and dark pixels and then fits a line to some
or all of those points. It can measure the length of a straight edge and find damage or flaws along an edge. In conjunction
with a Measure tool, it can help measure between a straight line and other points or lines in the image.
Example applications:
• Measure the height and width of a part
• Measure the height of a needle
• Measure the deflection of an automotive gauge
• Detect the edge of a web
• Verify that a bottle cap is on completely
• Find chips, spurs, or other flaws along a straight edge
• Measure the angle between two lines

8.7.1 Line Detect Tool: Input Parameters

Use the Input parameters to configure how the tool analyzes an image.
Figure 180. Line Detect Tool—Input Parameters

ROI
The Region of Interest (ROI) is the user-defined group of pixels in the image that the sensor analyzes.
Figure 181. Line Detect Tool ROI

The ROI is a line of pixels that can be shortened, lengthened, or widened as needed for the inspection. Tool analysis follows
the direction of the arrow. Set the width and the sample rate for the region of interest. The analysis functions best when the
ROI is positioned perpendicular to the feature to be analyzed. The ROI automatically displays on the Image pane when a tool
is added.
Adjust the placement of the ROI more precisely by using the arrow keys on the computer keyboard.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 109

VE Series Smart Camera

ROI Width
An ROI can be as large as the entire Field of View (FOV).
An ROI that captures as much of the line feature to be analyzed while minimizing other image content may improve
consistancy. Note that:
• Narrow ROIs execute faster but could miss the edge
• Wide ROIs are more consistent but don't execute as fast
• A wide ROI provides an average value/location, which results in improved repeatability
Sample Rate
The sample rate sets the spacing between scan lines along the width of the ROI (one sample for every pixel, one
sample every second pixel, etc.). When the sample rate includes more pixels, more edges, more precise results, and
small flaws are found. The highest sample rate is Every Pixel. When the sample rate includes fewer pixels, fewer,
more widely spaced edges are found. The lowest sample rate is Every 64th Pixel. This creates a trade-off between
speed and precision. Lower sample rates execute faster, and higher sample rates find more precise results and are
capable of detecting smaller flaws.

Figure 182. Sample Rate Every 4th Pixel Figure 183. Sample Rate Every 8th Pixel

Threshold
Indicates the rate of change of grayscale values that is needed to detect an edge.
Figure 184. Threshold Parameters

Edges are detected by measuring transitions from bright to dark or dark to bright. Enter a threshold in the range from 1 to
255. The default value is 20. As this value is reduced, the tool finds weak, blurry, or more gradual lines or edges. At lower
thresholds, unwanted transitions such as background noise may become edges. Detected edges are combined to find
potential line segments.

Edge Polarity
Edge Polarity defines the type of edges that the tool finds.
• Dark to Bright—Finds edges where pixel intensities start below the threshold value and cross above the threshold
value
• Bright to Dark—Finds edges where pixel intensities start above the threshold value and cross below the threshold
value
• Bright or Dark—Finds any edge

Search For
Set the type of points the Line Detect tool searches for.

Best Points
Automatically figures which edge points make the best line and ignores the rest. Points that are included are shown
on the image in orange, while the points that are ignored are yellow. Best Points is tolerant of noise or extra edges in
the ROI, but under some circumstances, it may ignore edges that should be included. If the line in the image has
gaps in it, Best Points may produce lines that are shorter than desired.

110 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

All Points
Finds a line that explains all of the edges as well as possible; all found points are included in the analysis. Found
points are shown on the image in orange. All Points is faster than Best Points, but works poorly if there are extra
edges or noise within the ROI. All Points is useful if the line being examined is jagged, irregular, or curved.

Image Overlays
Choose whether to display or hide the ROI.
Figure 185. Image Overlays—Default

These options override the ROI view buttons on the Image Pane Parameters when no tool is selected. When a
specific tool is selected, the ROI information is shown.

Hide Annotations
Hides the annotations on the live image for the tool, even when the tool is selected.
Hide ROI
Hides the ROI when the tool is not selected.

Tool Histogram
The Tool Histogram graphically displays pixel intensity information within the current ROI.
Figure 186. Example Histogram

Select the Tool Histogram checkbox to enable the histogram. The default is enabled. Expand the Tool Histogram
parameter to view the histogram.
The histogram is a display of the grayscale values on the x axis and the number of pixels on the y axis. The histogram
displays the amount of pixels for each grayscale value. The graph displays information for all grayscale values (0 to 255).
Move the pointer anywhere over the histogram to view specific information. The information updates as the position of the
pointer changes.

Inspection Pass/Fail
Select the Contribute to Inspection Pass/Fail check box (default) if the tool will influence the Pass/Fail status of the
inspection.
Figure 187. Inspection Pass/Fail

The Pass/Fail contribution influences the following:

• Discrete output Pass
• Discrete output Fail
• Pass/Fail results counter
• Pass (Green) and Fail (red) LEDs on the Sensor
Select this checkbox if the overall Pass/Fail status of the inspection is dependent on the current tool.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 111

VE Series Smart Camera

8.7.2 Line Detect Tool: Test Parameters

Use the Test parameters to configure the pass/fail conditions for the tool.
Select the parameter checkbox to enable it. Where applicable, the vertical green bar shows the current parameter
information and the light gray backgrounds show the range over which a value has varied over time.
Where applicable, use the sliders or enter the minimum and maximum for the selected test parameters.
The current data found and the range of historical data found are shown for applicable Test parameters. The historical data
begins from the last reset.

Figure 188. Line Detect Tool—Test Parameters

Length
The distance from the start point of the line segement
to the end point.
Angle
The angle between the x-axis and the found line. The
range is −180° to +180°.
Worst Distance
The distance from the line to the farthest included
edge point.
Average Error
The average distance between the included edge
points and the found line. Use this value to determine
whether a line is curved or irregular. This may be
most useful when using the Search For All Points
option.

8.7.3 Line Detect Tool: Results

Tools & Results and All Results list information from the current and previous inspections.
A red box around a tool indicates that the tool failed. Status provides information about the specific failure.
All Results displays the Result, Time, Pass Count, and Fail Count information at a glance. Expand the inspection tool to see
specific results for that tool.

Midpoint
The x and y coordinates of the middle point of the found line segment.
Start Point
The x and y coordinates of the start point of the found line segment. The start point is on the end of the line segment
that is closer to the top of the ROI, when viewed in the direction of the arrows.
End Point
The x and y coordinates of the end point of the found line segement.
Worst Distance Point
The x and y coordinates of the farthest included point for the found line.
Worst Distance
The distance from the line to the farthest included edge point.
Length
The distance from the start point of the line segement to the end point.
Angle
The angle between the x-axis and the found line. The range is −180° to +180°.
Average Error
The average distance between the included edge points and the found line.

112 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Execution Time
The execution time, in milliseconds, for the currently selected tool in the current inspection.
Expand Execution Time to see the historical minimum and maximum execution times up to this point for the
selected tool.
Use the reset button in the Inspection Summary to reset these historical values.
Status
Status and error messages display as appropriate.
Line detect may also show another status: "Edge data may not have given a conclusive line fit." It is not an error and
will not directly cause the tool to fail. If this status displays and the desired line is not consistently found, adjust the
tool so that fewer edges that are not part of the desired line are found. For example, adjust the ROI to remove any
uneeded area, raise the threshold value to find fewer edges, or use a specific edge polarity rather than the generic
Bright Or Dark.

8.7.4 Using the Line Detect Tool

Follow these steps for a typical Line Detect inspection.
This example inspection checks whether a syringe needle is straight, bent, deformed, too short, or too long.

Note: This procedure is an example only.

1. Add a Line Detect tool to the inspection.

2. Adjust and rotate the ROI to frame the needle. The analysis functions best when the ROI is positioned perpendicular
to the feature to be analyzed.
3. Set the threshold.
a) Expand the Threshold parameters.
b) Move the sliders until the edge of the needle is found with few extra points included.
Figure 189. Good Part

4. Set the edge polarity.

a) Expand the Edge Polarity parameters.
b) Select Bright to Dark because the needle is dark against a light background.
5. Set the Test parameters to set the pass/fail criteria.
a) On the Test tab, select the Length checkbox to enable the test parameter.
This option sets the minimum and maximum length so that a part passes.
b) Expand Length and move the sliders to set the acceptable length range.
c) Select the Angle checkbox to enable the test parameter.
This option sets the minimum and maximum angle of the part.
d) Move the slider or enter the angle range to ensure that only straight parts pass.
6. Test a complete range of good and bad samples to make sure that the sensor accepts good parts and rejects bad
parts.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 113

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 190. Bad Part—Bent Needle Figure 191. Bad Part—Deformed Needle

8.8 Locate Tool

Use the Locate tool to find the edge of a part and to compensate for translation and rotation (if selected).
This tool finds and marks the position of the first edge along the ROI line and aligns and positions related tools consistently
over a feature of interest. When Rotation is enabled, the Locate tool calculates the angle at which the tool intersects the
feature's edge and rotates the Regions of Interest (ROIs) of downstream tools accordingly.
When a Locate tool is added to an inspection, the inspection fails and there is a red box around Use as Reference. This is
because a reference point has not yet been set. Configure the Locate tool as desired, and then set the reference point.
Example application: Adjust inspection tools for a part that moves and/or rotates in the FOV.

8.8.1 Locate Tool: Input Parameters

Use the Input parameters to configure how the tool analyzes an image.
Figure 192. Locate Tool—Input Parameters

Note that the Use as Reference parameter appears as an error until the reference point is set.

114 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

ROI
The Region of Interest (ROI) is the user-defined group of pixels in the image that the sensor analyzes.
Figure 193. ROI Parameters

The ROI is a line of pixels that can be shortened, lengthened, or widened as needed for the inspection. Tool analysis follows
the direction of the arrow. Set the width and the sample rate for the region of interest. The ROI automatically displays on the
Image pane when a tool is added.
Adjust the placement of the ROI more precisely by using the arrow keys on the computer keyboard.

ROI Width
An ROI can be as large as the entire Field of View (FOV).
Note that:
• Narrow ROIs execute faster but could miss the edge
• Wide ROIs are more consistent but don't execute as fast
• A wide ROI provides an average value/location, which results in improved repeatability
• The ROI must be 13 pixels or wider to calculate the rotation of a part (Locate tool only)
Sample Rate
The sample rate sets the number of samples per pixels (one sample per pixel, two samples per pixel, etc.). The
sample rate determines the sub-pixel resolution, which increases the resolution of the tool, and increases the
inspection time.

Figure 194. 1 px Wide ROI Figure 195. 13 px Wide ROI

Threshold
The Threshold parameter marks the grayscale transition point.
The tool marks the edge where the pixel intensity crosses the threshold level. From the Threshold Type list, select one of
the following:
• Absolute
• Relative (default)
• Edge Strength

Threshold Type: Relative

Finds an edge at a relative pixel intensity. This is the default threshold setting.
Figure 196. Relative Threshold Parameters

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 115

VE Series Smart Camera

The brightest grayscale level found along the ROI is 100% and the darkest is 0%. While Relative threshold is more tolerant of
light fluctuations between inspections than other transition types, it may find false edges.

Relative Threshold: Percent

Choose the percentage value at which the edge should be marked.

Edge Polarity
Edge Polarity defines the type of edges that the tool finds.
• Dark to Bright—Finds edges where pixel intensities start below the threshold value and cross above the threshold
value
• Bright to Dark—Finds edges where pixel intensities start above the threshold value and cross below the threshold
value
• Bright or Dark—Finds any edge

Relative Threshold: Edge Profile Graph

Figure 197. Relative Threshold—Edge Profile Graph

For relative threshold, the x axis is the length of the ROI. The y axis is the pixel intensity along the ROI, with 0% as the
darkest pixel in the ROI and 100% as the lightest pixel in the ROI. The light blue line shows the percentage pixel intensity
relative to the horizontal gray threshold line. The threshold line moves up or down with the percent value.

Note: Because the pixel intensity is relative to what is seen in the ROI, this does not necessarily mean that
0% = pure black or that 100% = pure white.

Point to a location on the graph—the corresponding location is the blue line on the tool ROI displayed on the image.

Threshold Type: Absolute

Finds an edge at a specific grayscale level.
Figure 198. Absolute Threshold Parameters

While Absolute threshold is less likely to find a false edge than Relative threshold, it may miss edges if the light level changes
between inspections.

116 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Absolute Threshold: Value

Enter a specific grayscale value from 0 to 255.

Edge Polarity
Edge Polarity defines the type of edges that the tool finds.
• Dark to Bright—Finds edges where pixel intensities start below the threshold value and cross above the threshold
value
• Bright to Dark—Finds edges where pixel intensities start above the threshold value and cross below the threshold
value
• Bright or Dark—Finds any edge

Absolute Threshold: Edge Profile Graph

Figure 199. Absolute Threshold—Edge Profile Graph

For absolute threshold, the x axis is the length of the ROI. The y axis is the actual grayscale value from 0 to 255. The light
blue line shows the absolute pixel intensity. The horizontal gray threshold line moves up or down with the threshold value.
Point to a location on the graph—the corresponding location is the blue line on the tool ROI displayed on the image.

Threshold Type: Edge Strength

Measures the rate of change of grayscale values and needs sharply-defined transitions to find edges.
Figure 200. Edge Strength Threshold Parameters

Edge strength ignores gradual changes in light levels across the tool better than other threshold types and it filters out weak
or gradual edges.

Edge Strength Threshold: Edge Strength

Enter an edge strength value from 1 to 255.
Edges are selected by the edge strength method, which measures the rate of change from bright to dark or dark to bright.
Enter an edge strength threshold in the range from 1 to 255. The default value is 20. As this value is reduced, the tool finds
weak, blurry, or more gradual edges.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 117

VE Series Smart Camera

Edge Polarity
Edge Polarity defines the type of edges that the tool finds.
• Dark to Bright—Finds edges where pixel intensities start below the threshold value and cross above the threshold
value
• Bright to Dark—Finds edges where pixel intensities start above the threshold value and cross below the threshold
value
• Bright or Dark—Finds any edge

Edge Strength Threshold: Edge Profile Graph

Figure 201. Edge Strength Threshold—Edge Profile Graph

For edge strength threshold, the x axis is the length of the ROI. The y axis has two measurements. The first is the light blue
axis. It represents Edge Strength, a measure of the rate of change of pixel grayscale values. The second is the dark gray
axis. It represents Edge Profile, which gives the absolute grayscale level across the tool ROI. The blue line is the rate of
change of the grayscale value along the ROI. The two horizontal gray lines are the edge strength threshold plus and minus.
Point to a location on the graph—the corresponding location is the blue line on the tool ROI displayed on the image.

Filters
Set filters for tool analysis.
Figure 202. Locate Tool Filters

Smoothing
Runs a rolling average along the ROI length. Smoothing filters out sharp changes in the edge profile.

Note: A high filter number may miss the edge of a narrow line.

118 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Minimum Edge Width

Filters out small spike-of-intensity changes, and narrow dark or bright bands. It determines the distance before and
after an edge that must be free from additional transitions or the end of the ROI before the edge is recognized as
valid.

Note: A high filter number may miss the edge of a narrow line.

Enable Rotation
Runs a rotation compensation calculation when enabled. ROIs that follow rotate according to the difference between
the reference image and the current inspection image.

Edge Profile
The Edge Profile graph changes depending on which threshold type is selected. Refer to the Threshold section and the
specific threshold types for details on the Edge Profile graph.

Use as Reference
Choose whether to use this tool as a reference for other tools.

Figure 203. Use As Reference—No Reference Point Set Figure 204. Use As Reference—Reference Point Set

Adjust Downstream Tool ROIs

Select Adjust Downstream Tool ROIs to have tools added after this tool use the this tool to set the location of the
additional ROIs.
Click Set Reference Point button so that the tool affects the related tools, otherwise the tool and all related tools will
fail. If changes are made to the tool parameters that affect the reference point, the reference point must be set again.
Force to Absolute
Select Force to Absolute to change this tool from relative positioning to absolute positioning.
When enabled, the tool ROI positions itself independent to any other locational tool preceding it in the inspection.

Image Overlays
Choose whether to display or hide the annotations or the ROI when this tool is not selected.
Figure 205. Image Overlays—Default

These options override the ROI view buttons on the Image Pane Parameters when no tool is selected. When a
specific tool is selected, the ROI information is shown.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 119

VE Series Smart Camera

Hide Annotations
Hides the annotations on the live image for the tool, even when the tool is selected.

Figure 206. Show Locate Tool Annotations Figure 207. Hide Locate Tool Annotations

Hide ROI
Hides the ROI when the tool is not selected.

Tool Histogram
The Tool Histogram graphically displays pixel intensity information within the current ROI.
Figure 208. Example Histogram

Select the Tool Histogram checkbox to enable the histogram. The default is enabled. Expand the Tool Histogram
parameter to view the histogram.
The histogram is a display of the grayscale values on the x axis and the number of pixels on the y axis. The histogram
displays the amount of pixels for each grayscale value. The graph displays information for all grayscale values (0 to 255).
Move the pointer anywhere over the histogram to view specific information. The information updates as the position of the
pointer changes.

Inspection Pass/Fail
Select the Contribute to Inspection Pass/Fail check box (default) if the tool will influence the Pass/Fail status of the
inspection.
Figure 209. Inspection Pass/Fail

The Pass/Fail contribution influences the following:

• Discrete output Pass
• Discrete output Fail
• Pass/Fail results counter
• Pass (Green) and Fail (red) LEDs on the Sensor
Select this checkbox if the overall Pass/Fail status of the inspection is dependent on the current tool.

8.8.2 Locate Tool: Test Parameters

Use the Test parameters to configure the pass/fail conditions for the tool.
Select the parameter checkbox to enable it. Where applicable, the vertical green bar shows the current parameter
information and the light gray backgrounds show the range over which a value has varied over time.
Where applicable, use the sliders or enter the minimum and maximum for the selected test parameters.
The current data found and the range of historical data found are shown for applicable Test parameters. The historical data
begins from the last reset.

120 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 210. Locate Tool—Test Parameters

Edge Point X
The x coordinate of the Edge Point; the first suitable
edge that the Locate tool found.
Edge Point Y
The y coordinate of the Edge Point; the first suitable
edge that the Locate tool found.
Edge Angle
The angle with respect to horizontal at which the
Locate tool intersects the part.
Offset Point X
The x-dimension offset between the current Edge
Point and the reference point.
Available when Adjust Downstream Tool ROIs is
enabled.
Offset Point Y
The y-dimension offset between the current Edge
Point and the reference point.
Available when Adjust Downstream Tool ROIs is
enabled.
Offset Angle
The angular difference between the current Edge
Angle and the angle from the reference point.
Available when Adjust Downstream Tool ROIs is
enabled.
Maximum Edge Strength
A measure of how much bright/dark contrast is found
in the current Edge Point. A high number indicates an
edge for which the grayscale value changed rapidly.
Available when the Threshold is set to Edge Strength.

8.8.3 Locate Tool: Results

Tools & Results and All Results list information from the current and previous inspections.
A red box around a tool indicates that the tool failed. Status provides information about the specific failure.
All Results displays the Result, Time, Pass Count, and Fail Count information at a glance. Expand the inspection tool to see
specific results for that tool.

Edge Point
The x and y coordinates of the Edge Point; the first suitable edge the Locate tool found.
Edge Angle
The angle with respect to horizontal at which the Locate tool intersects the part.
Offset
The offset between the Edge Point and the reference point.
Expand Offset to see the coordinates of the Reference Point, the Reference Angle, the Offset Point, and the Offset
Angle.
Maximum Edge Strength
The greatest rate of change value observed by the tool.
Available when the Threshold Type is set to Edge Strength.
Execution Time
The execution time, in milliseconds, for the currently selected tool in the current inspection.
Expand Execution Time to see the historical minimum and maximum execution times up to this point for the
selected tool.
Use the reset button in the Inspection Summary to reset these historical values.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 121

VE Series Smart Camera

Status
Status and error messages display as appropriate.

8.8.4 Using the Locate Tool

Follow these steps for an example Locate inspection to adjust for a target that moves in the field of view, allowing for the
precise placement of the vision tools that follow the Locate tool.
This procedure uses a Locate tool to determine the position of the vial. Using the vial position information, three Edge tools
and two Measure tools determine the position of the stopper. The Locate tool is used to ensure that the Edge02 and Edge03
tools are placed correctly alongside (but not on top of) the vial, even if the vial targets move from side to side in the field of
view from inspection to inspection. See Using the Edge and Measure Tools on p. 107 for details on how to set up an Edge
tool and a Measure tool.

Note: This procedure is an example only.

1. Add a Locate tool to the inspection.

2. Adjust the ROI position, length, and width.
a) Position the ROI horizontally across the side of the vial.
b) Leave the ROI Width at the default (13 px).
Figure 211. Locate ROI

3. Find the edge that you want the tool to locate.

a) Expand the Edge Profile parameters. Use the graph as a guide for the remaining steps.
To make sure that you find the edge you want, observe how the Edge Profile graph changes as the Inputs
change. Point to a location on the graph—the corresponding location is the blue line on the tool ROI displayed on
the image. The horizontal gray line is the Threshold percent.
b) Expand the Threshold parameters.
c) Select Edge Strength from the Threshold Type list.
d) Select Bright to Dark from the Edge Polarity list.
e) Adjust the Edge Strength until only the desired edge is found. In this example it is 20.
4. Expand Filters and set Smoothing to Smooth3 to filter out sharp changes in the edge profile.
5. Set the reference point.
a) Expand the Use as Reference parameters.
b) Leave Adjust Downstream Tool ROIs checked so that it is enabled (default).
c) Click Set Reference Point.

122 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

A blue circle displays on the Image pane at the location of the reference point and all following tools use this point as
a reference.
Figure 212. Reference Point

6. If the blue circle does not represent the desired reference point, repeat steps 3 to 5 and adjust the parameters until
the desired reference point is found.
7. Add an Edge tool to detect the top of the stopper.
Figure 213. Edge Tool at the Top of the Stopper

8. Add an Edge tool to detect the bottom of the lip on the left side of the vial.
Figure 214. Edge Tool at the Left Side of the vial

9. Add an Edge tool to detect the bottom of the lip on the right side of the vial.
Figure 215. Edge Tool at the Right Side of the vial

10. Add a Measure tool to measure from Edge02 (the left side of the vial) to Edge03 (the right side of the vial).
Figure 216. Measure Tool from Edge02 to Edge03

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 123

VE Series Smart Camera

11. Add a Measure tool to measure from Edge01 to Measure01 to determine the position of the stopper in the vial.
Figure 217. Measure Tool from Edge01 to Measure1

12. Adjust the Measure02 Test parameters to set the pass/fail criteria.
a) On the Test tab, select the Distance Y checkbox to enable the test parameter.
b) Move the sliders slightly above and below the green line to allow for very slight variations in the distance.

Note: The green bar indicates the current distance and the light gray background indicates the
distance over time.
13. Click to show all ROIs at the same time.
Figure 218. All Tools Shown

14. Test a complete range of good and bad samples to make sure that the sensor accepts good parts and rejects bad
parts.

Figure 219. Bad Part—Stopper Too High Figure 220. Bad Part—Missing Stopper

8.9 Match Tool

Use the Match tool to verify that a pattern, shape, or part in any orientation matches a reference pattern. The Match tool can
also compensate for translation and rotation of downstream tools (if selected).
The reference pattern is taught during setup. A reference pattern might include alphanumeric characters, logos, or any other
shapes. During an inspection, the sensor checks that each part or package being inspected matches the reference pattern.
The number of expected patterns can also be determined.
When a Match tool is added to an inspection, the inspection fails and there is a red box around Pattern. This is because a
reference pattern has not yet been taught. Configure the Teach ROI as desired, and then teach the reference pattern.
Example applications:
• Date/Lot code inspections

124 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

• Label inspections
• Part etching inspections
• Part orientation inspections
• Part shape inspections

8.9.1 Match Tool: Input Parameters

Use the Input parameters to configure how the tool analyzes an image.
Figure 221. Match Tool—Input Parameters

Search ROI
The Search Region of Interest (ROI) is the user-defined group of pixels in the image that the sensor analyzes.
Figure 222. Search ROI

The Search ROI is indicated by a red or green box that is always rectangular. By default the Search ROI is 20% to 30%
larger than the Teach ROI, which is blue. The sensor searches for the match only within the Search ROI.
Resize the Search ROI as needed for the inspection.
Adjust the placement of the ROI more precisely by using the arrow keys on the computer keyboard.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 125

VE Series Smart Camera

Teach ROI
The Teach Region of Interest (ROI) is the user-defined group of pixels in the image that the sensor uses to teach a reference
pattern.
Figure 223. Teach ROI

Resize and rotate the ROI around the feature to be used as the reference pattern. Change the shape of the ROI to a
square, ellipse, or circle as needed by expanding Teach ROI on the Parameters pane and selecting the desired shape. The
Teach ROI automatically displays on the Image pane when a Match tool is added.
Adjust the placement of the ROI more precisely by using the arrow keys on the computer keyboard.

Pattern
Displays the reference pattern that the sensor is looking for. A teach is required for the Match tool. Click Teach to set the
match tool criteria and display the reference pattern.
Figure 225. Pattern Taught
Figure 224. Teach Required

A red error displays until the teach is performed and the reference pattern is taught. When new patterns are added, you will
need to teach the reference pattern again.

Percent Match
Set the percent match to indicate the quality of the match (10% is a slight match; 100% is a perfect match). The default is
60%.
Figure 226. Percent Match

Rotation Range
Select the range within which the pattern may be rotated and still count as a match to the reference image. The default is 45
degrees.
Figure 227. Rotation Range

126 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

The larger the Rotation Range, the longer the execution time of the tool. In general, this means that the execution time of the
inspection increases.

Precision
Select either Fine Search or Coarse Search. Course Search is the default. Fine Search is slower but provides more
accurate results.
Figure 228. Precision

Timeout
Set the amount of time the tool executes before it stops.
Figure 229. Timeout

Use as Reference
Choose whether to use this tool as a reference for other tools.
Figure 230. Use As Reference—No Reference Point Set Figure 231. Use As Reference—Reference Point Set

Adjust Downstream Tool ROIs

Select Adjust Downstream Tool ROIs to have tools added after this tool use the this tool to set the location of the
additional ROIs.
Click Set Reference Point button so that the tool affects the related tools, otherwise the tool and all related tools will
fail. If changes are made to the tool parameters that affect the reference point, the reference point must be set again.
Force to Absolute
Select Force to Absolute to change this tool from relative positioning to absolute positioning.
When enabled, the tool ROI positions itself independent to any other locational tool preceding it in the inspection.

Image Overlays
Choose whether to display or hide the annotations or the ROI when this tool is not selected.
Figure 232. Image Overlays—Default

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 127

VE Series Smart Camera

These options override the ROI view buttons on the Image Pane Parameters when no tool is selected. When a
specific tool is selected, the ROI information is shown.

Hide Annotations
Hides the annotations on the live image for the tool, even when the tool is selected.

Figure 233. Show Match Tool Annotations Figure 234. Hide Match Tool Annotations

Hide ROI
Hides the ROI when the tool is not selected.

Tool Histogram
The Tool Histogram graphically displays pixel intensity information within the current ROI.
Figure 235. Example Histogram

Select the Tool Histogram checkbox to enable the histogram. The default is enabled. Expand the Tool Histogram
parameter to view the histogram.
The histogram is a display of the grayscale values on the x axis and the number of pixels on the y axis. The histogram
displays the amount of pixels for each grayscale value. The graph displays information for all grayscale values (0 to 255).
Move the pointer anywhere over the histogram to view specific information. The information updates as the position of the
pointer changes.

Inspection Pass/Fail
Select the Contribute to Inspection Pass/Fail check box (default) if the tool will influence the Pass/Fail status of the
inspection.
Figure 236. Inspection Pass/Fail

The Pass/Fail contribution influences the following:

• Discrete output Pass
• Discrete output Fail
• Pass/Fail results counter
• Pass (Green) and Fail (red) LEDs on the Sensor
Select this checkbox if the overall Pass/Fail status of the inspection is dependent on the current tool.

8.9.2 Match Tool: Test Parameters

Use the Test parameters to configure the pass/fail conditions for the tool.
Select the parameter checkbox to enable it. Where applicable, the vertical green bar shows the current parameter
information and the light gray backgrounds show the range over which a value has varied over time.

128 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Where applicable, use the sliders or enter the minimum and maximum for the selected test parameters.
The current data found and the range of historical data found are shown for applicable Test parameters. The historical data
begins from the last reset.

Figure 237. Match Tool—Test Parameters

Count
The number of matching patterns.
Individual Matches
Specific Match—Select First Match or Specific
Match.
Centroid X—The location of the point of the center of
mass of the selected match on the x axis.
Centroid Y—The location of the point of the center of
mass of the selected match on the y axis.
Angle—The rotated angle of the matching object.
Offset Point X
The x-dimension offset between the current match
and the reference point.
Available when Adjust Downstream Tool ROIs is
enabled.

Offset Point Y
The y-dimension offset between the current match
and the reference point.
Available when Adjust Downstream Tool ROIs is
enabled.

Offset Angle
The angular difference between the current angle and
the angle from the reference point.
Available when Adjust Downstream Tool ROIs is
enabled.

8.9.3 Match Tool: Results

Tools & Results and All Results list information from the current and previous inspections.
A red box around a tool indicates that the tool failed. Status provides information about the specific failure.
All Results displays the Result, Time, Pass Count, and Fail Count information at a glance. Expand the inspection tool to see
specific results for that tool.

Count
The number of matching patterns.
Percentage Range
The percentage by which the found objects match the reference object. Expand Percentage Range to view the
centroid (center point), angle, and percent match for the objects found within the ROI.
Offset
The offset between the match and the reference point.
Available when Adjust Downstream Tool ROIs is enabled.
Expand Offset to see the coordinates of the Reference Point, the Reference Angle, the Offset Point, and the Offset
Angle.
Execution Time
The execution time, in milliseconds, for the currently selected tool in the current inspection.
Expand Execution Time to see the historical minimum and maximum execution times up to this point for the
selected tool.
Use the reset button in the Inspection Summary to reset these historical values.
Status
Status and error messages display as appropriate.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 129

VE Series Smart Camera

8.9.4 Using the Match Tool

Follow these steps for an example Match inspection. The Match tool requires a reference pattern that is taught during set up.
The Match tool uses two ROIs. The larger, green/red ROI is the Search ROI and defines the area that the sensor searches
for the desired feature. This ROI cannot be rotated and it is always a square. The smaller, blue ROI is the Teach ROI. This
ROI is used to define the feature that the sensor is looking for.
Before using the Match tool, teach the desired feature (reference pattern). While setting up a Match tool, it can be helpful to
slow the trigger rate or to set the trigger to external.

Note: If the trigger is set to internal, there is a lag between when the TEACH occurs and when Vision
Manager uses the taught feature to inspect the part(s). The time to teach the sensor is not included in the
inspection time on Tools & Results or All Results.

Note: This procedure is an example only.

1. Add a Match tool to the inspection.

The inspection fails and a warning displays until the reference pattern is taught.
Figure 238. Match Tool Defaults

2. Adjust the Teach ROI to frame the feature to be used as the reference pattern. In this example, the feature of interest
is the Banner logo.
a) Expand Teach ROI and select the ellipse.
b) Resize and rotate the ROI around the feature.
3. On the Parameters pane, expand Pattern and click Teach.

130 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 240. Pattern Taught

Figure 239. Teach Required

Note: If the inspection uses more than one Match tool, teach only one Match tool at a time.

"Applying Changes" displays, then the reference pattern displays in the Pattern pane, and Tools & Results and All
Results display one match.
4. If necessary, repeat steps 2 and 3 to teach the feature again.
5. Adjust the Search ROI to fill the FOV.
Figure 241. Teach and Search ROIs Configured

6. Expand Percent Match and set it to 99.

The found pattern must closely match the taught reference pattern.
7. Expand Rotation Range and set it to 90.
The found pattern can rotate by 90 degrees and still pass.

Note: Rotation Range and Percent Match work together. The higher the Percent Match, the lower
the Rotation Range to pass. In this example a 99% match fails a missing letter but passes a match
that is rotated 45 degrees.
8. On the Test tab, select the Count checkbox to enable the Count test parameter.
9. Expand Count and set it to a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 1.
One and only one matching pattern must be found for the inspection to pass.
10. Test a complete range of good and bad samples to make sure that the sensor accepts good parts and rejects bad
parts.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 131

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 242. Rotated Good Part Figure 243. Bad Part—Missing Letter

8.9.5 Using Remote TEACH with the Match Tool

If multiple Match tools are used in the same inspection, remote TEACH teaches all Match tools at the same time using the
same trigger.
The time to teach is included in the inspection time on Tools & Results and All Results.
1. Set up the inspection and Match tool(s) as desired.
2. In Vision Manager, make sure that one of the five user-defined I/O is set to Remote Teach.
3. Toggle the Remote Teach input. The next valid trigger input causes the Remote Teach to occur. This is when the
new Match patterns are learned.

8.10 Object Tool

Use the Object tool to detect and measure the length of dark and bright segments in an ROI.
The Object tool measures the widths of every dark and light segment along the ROI, calculates the midpoint for every
segment, and counts the total number of segments. The midpoint location can be used as an input to the Measure tool. Each
segment can have a unique size limit, or all segments may have the same size limit.
Example applications:
• Measure the width of a label
• Locate the center of a box on a conveyor
• Measure the gaps between stamped metal parts

8.10.1 Object Tool: Input Parameters

Use the Input parameters to configure how the tool analyzes an image.
Figure 244. Object Tool—Input Parameters

132 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

ROI
The Region of Interest (ROI) is the user-defined group of pixels in the image that the sensor analyzes.
Figure 245. ROI Parameters

The ROI is a line of pixels that can be shortened, lengthened, or widened as needed for the inspection. Tool analysis follows
the direction of the arrow. Set the width and the sample rate for the region of interest. The ROI automatically displays on the
Image pane when a tool is added.
Adjust the placement of the ROI more precisely by using the arrow keys on the computer keyboard.

ROI Width
An ROI can be as large as the entire Field of View (FOV).
Note that:
• Narrow ROIs execute faster but could miss the edge
• Wide ROIs are more consistent but don't execute as fast
• A wide ROI provides an average value/location, which results in improved repeatability
• The ROI must be 13 pixels or wider to calculate the rotation of a part (Locate tool only)
Sample Rate
The sample rate sets the number of samples per pixels (one sample per pixel, two samples per pixel, etc.). The
sample rate determines the sub-pixel resolution, which increases the resolution of the tool, and increases the
inspection time.

Figure 246. 1 px Wide ROI Figure 247. 13 px Wide ROI

Threshold
The Threshold parameter marks the grayscale transition point.
The tool marks the edge where the pixel intensity crosses the threshold level. From the Threshold Type list, select one of
the following:
• Absolute
• Relative (default)
• Edge Strength

Threshold Type: Relative

Finds an edge at a relative pixel intensity. This is the default threshold setting.
Figure 248. Relative Threshold Parameters

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 133

VE Series Smart Camera

The brightest grayscale level found along the ROI is 100% and the darkest is 0%. While Relative threshold is more tolerant of
light fluctuations between inspections than other transition types, it may find false edges.

Relative Threshold: Percent

Choose the percentage value at which the edge should be marked.

Object Type
Select the type of object the inspection is looking for.
• Bright—Finds objects brighter than the threshold value
• Dark—Finds objects darker than the threshold value
• Bright or Dark—Finds any object

Relative Threshold: Edge Profile Graph

Figure 249. Relative Threshold—Edge Profile Graph

For relative threshold, the x axis is the length of the ROI. The y axis is the pixel intensity along the ROI, with 0% as the
darkest pixel in the ROI and 100% as the lightest pixel in the ROI. The light blue line shows the percentage pixel intensity
relative to the horizontal gray threshold line. The threshold line moves up or down with the percent value.

Note: Because the pixel intensity is relative to what is seen in the ROI, this does not necessarily mean that
0% = pure black or that 100% = pure white.

Point to a location on the graph—the corresponding location is the blue line on the tool ROI displayed on the image.

Threshold Type: Absolute

Finds an edge at a specific grayscale level.
Figure 250. Absolute Threshold Parameters

While Absolute threshold is less likely to find a false edge than Relative threshold, it may miss edges if the light level changes
between inspections.

134 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Absolute Threshold: Value

Enter a specific grayscale value from 0 to 255.

Object Type
Select the type of object the inspection is looking for.
• Bright—Finds objects brighter than the threshold value
• Dark—Finds objects darker than the threshold value
• Bright or Dark—Finds any object

Absolute Threshold: Edge Profile Graph

Figure 251. Absolute Threshold—Edge Profile Graph

For absolute threshold, the x axis is the length of the ROI. The y axis is the actual grayscale value from 0 to 255. The light
blue line shows the absolute pixel intensity. The horizontal gray threshold line moves up or down with the threshold value.
Point to a location on the graph—the corresponding location is the blue line on the tool ROI displayed on the image.

Threshold Type: Edge Strength

Measures the rate of change of grayscale values and needs sharply-defined transitions to find edges.
Figure 252. Edge Strength Threshold Parameters

Edge strength ignores gradual changes in light levels across the tool better than other threshold types and it filters out weak
or gradual edges.

Edge Strength Threshold: Edge Strength

Enter an edge strength value from 1 to 255.
Edges are selected by the edge strength method, which measures the rate of change from bright to dark or dark to bright.
Enter an edge strength threshold in the range from 1 to 255. The default value is 20. As this value is reduced, the tool finds
weak, blurry, or more gradual edges.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 135

VE Series Smart Camera

Object Type
Select the type of object the inspection is looking for.
• Bright—Finds objects brighter than the threshold value
• Dark—Finds objects darker than the threshold value
• Bright or Dark—Finds any object

Edge Strength Threshold: Edge Profile Graph

Figure 253. Edge Strength Threshold—Edge Profile Graph

For edge strength threshold, the x axis is the length of the ROI. The y axis has two measurements. The first is the light blue
axis. It represents Edge Strength, a measure of the rate of change of pixel grayscale values. The second is the dark gray
axis. It represents Edge Profile, which gives the absolute grayscale level across the tool ROI. The blue line is the rate of
change of the grayscale value along the ROI. The two horizontal gray lines are the edge strength threshold plus and minus.
Point to a location on the graph—the corresponding location is the blue line on the tool ROI displayed on the image.

Filters
Set filters for tool analysis.
Figure 254. Object Tool Filters

Smoothing
Runs a rolling average along the ROI length. Smoothing filters out sharp changes in the edge profile.
Object Width
Filters out objects and spaces that are smaller than the minimum and larger than the maximum values specified.
Enable End Objects
When enabled, pixels that touch the ends of the ROI are ignored. This may ignore one or more objects.

136 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Edge Profile
The Edge Profile graph changes depending on which threshold type is selected. Refer to the Threshold section and the
specific threshold types for details on the Edge Profile graph.

Image Overlays
Choose whether to display or hide the annotations or the ROI when this tool is not selected.
Figure 255. Image Overlays—Default

These options override the ROI view buttons on the Image Pane Parameters when no tool is selected. When a
specific tool is selected, the ROI information is shown.

Hide Annotations
Hides the annotations on the live image for the tool, even when the tool is selected.
Figure 257. Hide Object Tool Annotations
Figure 256. Show Object Tool Annotations

Hide ROI
Hides the ROI when the tool is not selected.

Tool Histogram
The Tool Histogram graphically displays pixel intensity information within the current ROI.
Figure 258. Example Histogram

Select the Tool Histogram checkbox to enable the histogram. The default is enabled. Expand the Tool Histogram
parameter to view the histogram.
The histogram is a display of the grayscale values on the x axis and the number of pixels on the y axis. The histogram
displays the amount of pixels for each grayscale value. The graph displays information for all grayscale values (0 to 255).
Move the pointer anywhere over the histogram to view specific information. The information updates as the position of the
pointer changes.

Inspection Pass/Fail
Select the Contribute to Inspection Pass/Fail check box (default) if the tool will influence the Pass/Fail status of the
inspection.
Figure 259. Inspection Pass/Fail

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 137

VE Series Smart Camera

The Pass/Fail contribution influences the following:

• Discrete output Pass
• Discrete output Fail
• Pass/Fail results counter
• Pass (Green) and Fail (red) LEDs on the Sensor
Select this checkbox if the overall Pass/Fail status of the inspection is dependent on the current tool.

8.10.2 Object Tool: Test Parameters

Use the Test parameters to configure the pass/fail conditions for the tool.
Select the parameter checkbox to enable it. Where applicable, the vertical green bar shows the current parameter
information and the light gray backgrounds show the range over which a value has varied over time.
Where applicable, use the sliders or enter the minimum and maximum for the selected test parameters.
The current data found and the range of historical data found are shown for applicable Test parameters. The historical data
begins from the last reset.

Figure 260. Object Tool—Test Parameters

Total Count
The total number of bright, dark, or all objects,
depending on the bright/dark option in effect.
Dark Count
The number of dark objects.
Bright Count
The number of bright objects.
Maximum Edge Strength
The greatest rate of change value observed by the
tool.
Available when the Threshold Type is set to Edge
Strength.
Individual Objects
Object(s) to test—Select All Objects, First Object, or
Specific Object.
Dark Widths—Select the range of dark widths to
count.
Bright Widths—Select the range of bright widths to
count.

8.10.3 Object Tool: Results

Tools & Results and All Results list information from the current and previous inspections.
A red box around a tool indicates that the tool failed. Status provides information about the specific failure.
All Results displays the Result, Time, Pass Count, and Fail Count information at a glance. Expand the inspection tool to see
specific results for that tool.

Total Count
The total number of bright, dark, or all objects, depending on the bright/dark option in effect.
Dark Count
The number of dark objects.
Bright Count
The number of bright objects.
Widths
Expand Widths to view the widths and location of the objects found, sorted by order of occurrence along the Object
tool path
Click a number/width/location to highlight that width on the Image pane.

138 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Maximum Edge Strength

The greatest rate of change value observed by the tool.
Available when the Threshold Type is set to Edge Strength.
Execution Time
The execution time, in milliseconds, for the currently selected tool in the current inspection.
Expand Execution Time to see the historical minimum and maximum execution times up to this point for the
selected tool.
Use the reset button in the Inspection Summary to reset these historical values.
Status
Status and error messages display as appropriate.

8.10.4 Using the Object Tool

Follow these steps for an example Object inspection.
This example verifies the number and position of pins on a connector by analyzing the size of the two gaps between the pins.

Note: This procedure is an example only.

1. Add an Object tool to the inspection.

2. Adjust the position, length, and width of the ROI.
a) Move the ROI so that it crosses all of the pins.
b) Leave the default ROI width (13 px).
Figure 261. Object Tool

3. Set the threshold.

a) Expand the Threshold parameters.
b) Leave the Threshold Type as the default (Relative).
c) Leave the Percent as the default (50).
d) Select Dark from the Object Type list.
4. Set the Test parameters to set the pass/fail criteria.
a) Expand Individual Objects.
b) Select the All Dark Width Range checkbox to enable the parameter.
c) Move the sliders or enter the minimum as 141.48 and the maximum as 252.96.
5. Test a complete range of good and bad samples to make sure that the sensor accepts good parts and rejects bad
parts.

Figure 262. Good Part Figure 263. Bad Part—Bent Pin

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 139

VE Series Smart Camera

9 Using the Inspection Tools: ID Tools

ID Tools identify encoded data in an image, such as a barcode. ID Tools are only available on VE ID or VE Vision + ID
models.
Click a tool on Tools & Results or on Tools Only to access the Parameters pane for that tool. The Parameters pane
contains both an Inputs tab and a Test tab. Define parameters for the tool itself on the Inputs tab. Define pass or fail criteria
for the tool on the Test tab. When a tool is selected, the tool is highlighted orange in Tools & Results and in Tools Only, the
tool ROI is selected in the Image pane, and the tool results are highlighted in All Results.
For many of the parameters, move the slider to set the desired number, or move both sliders to set minimum and maximum
limits, where applicable. Numbers and limits can also be entered manually.

9.1 Barcode Tool

Use the Barcode tool to find and read Data Matrix, QR, PDF-417, Linear, and Postal barcode types in user-selectable
decoder modes, color schemes, and viewer schemes.

9.1.1 ROI
The Region of Interest (ROI) is the user-defined group of pixels in the image that the sensor analyzes.
The ROI is added when a tool is added. The Barcode ROI is always rectangular, and can be reduced in size to reduce
execution time. The default Barcode ROI covers the entire field of view (FOV). Any barcode must be entirely contained within
the ROI in order to be read. Resize the ROI to include the entire area in which to search for barcodes. An ROI can be as
large as the entire Field of View (FOV). The ROI automatically displays on the Image pane when a tool is added.
Adjust the placement of the ROI more precisely by using the arrow keys on the computer keyboard.

9.1.2 Barcode Tool: Input Parameters

Use the Input parameters to configure how the tool analyzes an image.
Figure 264. Barcode Tool—Input Parameters

140 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Auto Learn
Use Auto Learn to find barcodes in the image.
Figure 265. Auto Learn

A search runs to find up to 10 barcodes in the image. Then the Max Barcode Count is set to the number of found barcodes.
Any barcodes found are listed in the Auto Learn results window. Any barcode symbologies that are not found are disabled.
All other Input parameter selections are reset, except for the size and placement of the ROI.
Figure 266. Barcodes Found

Note: Auto Learn does not read Data Matrix: Dot Peen Mode or Pharmacode barcodes.

Max Barcode Count

Set the maximum number of barcodes to be read by the Barcode tool.
Decrease this value to reduce the execution time by ending the search for barcodes when the maximum number has been
met.
Figure 267. Max Barcode Count

1D Barcodes
The first time the barcode tool is added, Data Matrix, QR Code, and many 1D barcode types are selected. Select the desired
barcode types to be read. As a best practice, select only the applicable barcode type(s) for your particular application to
optimize performance.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 141

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 268. 1D Barcodes

All
Select to enable the tool to search for all types of 1D barcodes.
Codabar
Select so that the tool reads the Codabar barcode type.

Code 128
Select so that the tool reads the Code 128 barcode type.
Code 39
Select so that the tool reads the Code 39 barcode type.
Code 93
Select so that the tool reads the Code 93 barcode type.
DataBar
Select so that the tool reads the DataBar barcode type.
DataBar Expanded
Select so that the tool reads the DataBar Expanded barcode type.
DataBar Limited
Select so that the tool reads the DataBar Limited barcode type.
EAN-8
Select so that the tool reads the EAN-8 barcode type.
EAN-13 (UPC-A)
Select so that the tool reads the EAN-13 (UPC-A) barcode type.
EAN-13 (UPC-A) Add-On
Select so that the tool reads the EAN-13 (UPC-A) Add-On barcode type.
Interleaved 2 of 5
Select so that the tool reads the Interleaved 2 of 5 barcode type.

142 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

PDF417
Decoder Mode determines which decode algorithm to use and how imperfections in barcode images are handled.
• Robust—The tool uses an algorithm that performs routines to correct for imperfections of the barcode
image.
• Fast—The tool uses an algorithm that is tailored for speed. The algorithm does NOT correct for barcode
image imperfections. The Fast setting has the best results on high-contrast images that contain high-quality
barcodes.
Scan Direction sets the direction for Line Scanning:
• Horizontal
• Vertical
• Omnidirectional
The Omnidirectional setting should read more barcodes, however it takes longer to do so.
Image Filter adjusts the bar widths with respect to spaces. These settings promote print gain correction.
• None—No bar width adjustments are made
• Under Print Correction—Enlarges the bar widths with respect to spaces
• Over Print Correction—Reduces the bar widths with respect to spaces
Pharmacode
Scan Direction sets the direction for Line Scanning:
• Left to Right
• Top to Bottom
• Right to Left
• Bottom to Top
• Omnidirectional
Use Omnidirectional scanning if barcodes can appear inverted on the part being inspected. If the Data Compare
test is enabled, the tool attempts to compare that string to read data in both scan directions. The inspection is
marked as Pass if at least one string matches. The data that successfully matched the string displays on the screen
and exports through communication channels as requested.
If Omnidirectional scan is selected, but the Data Compare test is disabled, the data read from left-to-right scan is
reported.

Note: Pharmacode is not available in Auto Learn.

UPC-E
Select so that the tool reads the UPC-E barcode type.
UPC-E Add-On
Select so that the tool reads the UPC-E Add-On barcode type.
Check Digit Verify
When Check Digit Verify is enabled, the tool verifies the integrity of the barcode being read.

Note: Most linear barcode types always contain check digit verification. This setting only
applies to Code 39 and Interleaved 2 of 5 because the check digit verification is optional in
these types.

2D Barcodes
The first time the barcode tool is added, Data Matrix, QR Code, and many 1D barcode types are selected. Select the desired
barcode types to be read. As a best practice, select only the applicable barcode type(s) for your particular application to
optimize performance.
Figure 269. 2D Barcodes

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 143

VE Series Smart Camera

Data Matrix (ECC200)

Decoder Mode
Determines which decode algorithm to use and how imperfections in barcode images are handled.
• Accurate—The tool methodically runs multiple image improvement strategies in an attempt to read poorer
quality barcodes. The Accurate setting is the slowest setting.
• Robust—The tool uses an algorithm that performs routines to correct for imperfections of the barcode
image.
• Equalized—The tool tries to improve the contrast within the symbol to improve readability.
• Fast—The tool uses an algorithm that is tailored for speed. The algorithm does not correct for barcode
image imperfections. The Fast setting has the best results on high-contrast images that contain high-quality
barcodes.
Symbol Color
Sets the appropriate symbol color for the application:
• Black on White—Select if the barcode symbol color is darker than the background
• White on Black—Select if the barcode symbol color is lighter than the background
• Any—Select to read both color schemes, however, this setting may result in longer reading time and
reduced accuracy
Dot Peen
When Dot Peen is enabled, the decoder runs in a method that is optimized for Dot Peen Data Matrix barcodes.

Note: Data Matrix: Dot Peen Mode is not available in Auto Learn.

Mirror Image
When Mirror Image is enabled (selected), both normal and mirrored images are read. When it is disabled, only
normal images are read.
Small Quiet Zone
When Small Quiet Zone is enabled, the decoder runs in a method that is optimized for barcodes with less than the
ideal amount of open space around the barcode borders. For 2D codes the ideal amount of space is at least one cell
width.
Filters
Improve read rates in conditions in which the barcodes are blurred or have nonuniform module sizes.
• None—Forces the tool to first try to read barcodes without applying any filters.
• Non Uniform—Improves the read rate of barcodes with non-uniformly sized data modules. The time
required to read the barcode data may increase with the number of selected filters. The tool runs the most
successful filter (since boot-up) first before trying other filters.
• Out of Focus/Blur—Improves the read rate of out-of-focus barcodes. Select one or more filters.
◦ Sharpen Level 1
◦ Sharpen Level 2
◦ Sharpen Level 3
◦ Sharpen Level 4

QR
QR Type
Determines whether the device should read a QR Code, Micro QR code, or both.
• Both
• Standard
• Micro
Symbol Color
Sets the appropriate symbol color for the application:
• Black on White—Select if the barcode symbol color is darker than the background
• White on Black—Select if the barcode symbol color is lighter than the background
• Any—Select to read both color schemes, however, this setting may result in longer reading time and
reduced accuracy
Small Quiet Zone
When Small Quiet Zone is enabled, the decoder runs in a method that is optimized for barcodes with less than the
ideal amount of open space around the barcode borders. For 2D codes the ideal amount of space is at least one cell
width.

144 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Mirror Image
When Mirror Image is enabled (selected), both normal and mirrored images are read. When it is disabled, only
normal images are read.

Postal Barcodes
The first time the barcode tool is added, Data Matrix, QR Code, and many 1D barcode types are selected. Select the desired
barcode types to be read. As a best practice, select only the applicable barcode type(s) for your particular application to
optimize performance.
Figure 270. Postal Barcodes

Intelligent Mail (IMb)

Select so that the tool reads the Intelligent Mail (IMb) barcode type.
POSTNET
Select so that the tool reads the POSTNET barcode type.
Check Digit Verify
When Check Digit Verify is enabled, the tool verifies the integrity of the barcode being read.

Quality Grading
Use Quality Grading to evaluate the quality of a barcode within a specific application based only on the Scan Grade
parameters defined in certain International Standards.
Quality Grading does not take into consideration the external environmental lighting parameters such as aperture,
wavelength, and illumination angle. All of these can affect the scan grade. These grades are meant to test whether the
physical barcode symbol was printed correctly.
Figure 271. Quality Grading

1D and 2D barcodes are graded according to different ISO standards. For 1D barcodes, see ISO 15416. For 2D barcodes,
see ISO 15415.

Overall Symbol Grade

Enable to generate one overall grade value for each barcode read.
Format
Select whether the grade is reported in Alphabetic (F–A) format or Numeric (0.0–4.0) format. In Alphabetic format
grades range from A to F, with A being the best. In Numeric format grades range from 0.0 to 4.0, with 4.0 being the
best.

Timeout
Set the amount of time the tool executes before it stops.
Figure 272. Timeout

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 145

VE Series Smart Camera

Image Overlays
Choose whether to display or hide the ROI.
Figure 273. Image Overlays—Default

These options override the ROI view buttons on the Image Pane Parameters when no tool is selected. When a
specific tool is selected, the ROI information is shown.

Hide Annotations
Hides the annotations on the live image for the tool, even when the tool is selected.
Hide ROI
Hides the ROI when the tool is not selected.

Tool Histogram
The Tool Histogram graphically displays pixel intensity information within the current ROI.
Figure 274. Example Histogram

Select the Tool Histogram checkbox to enable the histogram. The default is enabled. Expand the Tool Histogram
parameter to view the histogram.
The histogram is a display of the grayscale values on the x axis and the number of pixels on the y axis. The histogram
displays the amount of pixels for each grayscale value. The graph displays information for all grayscale values (0 to 255).
Move the pointer anywhere over the histogram to view specific information. The information updates as the position of the
pointer changes.

Inspection Pass/Fail
Select the Contribute to Inspection Pass/Fail check box (default) if the tool will influence the Pass/Fail status of the
inspection.
Figure 275. Inspection Pass/Fail

The Pass/Fail contribution influences the following:

• Discrete output Pass
• Discrete output Fail
• Pass/Fail results counter
• Pass (Green) and Fail (red) LEDs on the Sensor
Select this checkbox if the overall Pass/Fail status of the inspection is dependent on the current tool.

146 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

9.1.3 Barcode Tool: Test Parameters

Use the Test parameters to configure the pass/fail conditions for the tool.
Select the parameter checkbox to enable it. Where applicable, the vertical green bar shows the current parameter
information and the light gray backgrounds show the range over which a value has varied over time.
Where applicable, use the sliders or enter the minimum and maximum for the selected test parameters.
The current data found and the range of historical data found are shown for applicable Test parameters. The historical data
begins from the last reset.

Figure 276. Test Parameters

Count
The number of read barcodes.
Individual Barcodes
Barcodes to Test—Select which barcode result will
be subject to the test condition.
• First Barcode—The first barcode in the
results list must pass
• Any Barcode—Any one barcode in the
results list must pass
• All Barcodes—All barcodes in the results list
must pass
• Specific Barcode—Select a specific Barcode
Index number, that barcode number in the
results list that must pass
Data Compare—Check to see if read barcodes
match the data string entered or taught. This data can
be changed from a remote teach input, or over
Industrial Ethernet.
Overall Grade—Set the required overall grade value
for the read barcodes. This test is available when
Quality Grading is enabled on the Inputs tab.

Note: The following occurs when Data Compare and Overall Symbol Grade are used simultaneously in
the same Barcode tool and the criteria is set to Any Barcode: As soon as a barcode is found that matches
the Data Compare string, that single barcode is evaluated to pass the Overall Symbol Grade test. All other
barcodes are ignored by the Overall Symbol Grade test. If no barcodes pass the Data Compare test, then
the Overall Symbol Grade test will fail.

Using Remote TEACH with the Barcode Tool Data Compare Test
If multiple Data Compare tests are used in the same inspection, remote TEACH teaches all Data Compare tests at the same
time using the same trigger.
The time to teach is included in the inspection time on Tools & Results and All Results.
1. Set up the inspection and Barcode tool(s) as desired.
2. In Vision Manager, make sure that one of the five user-defined I/O is set to Remote Teach.
3. Toggle the Remote Teach input. The next valid trigger input causes the Remote Teach to occur. This is when the
new Data Compare string is learned, by taking the first barcode in the results list.

Setting the Data Compare String with Industrial Protocol Input Strings
The Industrial Protocol Input String data can be inserted as the Data Compare string to compare future barcodes against.
The maximum number of characters is 52. See the section on your protocol for information on how to set the Barcode Data
Compare Input String.
To assign the Data Compare string:
1. Make sure that the Barcode Data Compare Input String bit on the Input Bits Register is set to 0.
2. If there is more than one Barcode tool in the inspection, set the Industrial Protocol Tool Index to be the tool position
of the Barcode tool being edited.
Find the index value by counting the Camera tool as tool number one, and counting up one for each tool in the
inspection until you reach the Barcode tool.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 147

VE Series Smart Camera

3. Write the desired string length into the Industrial Protocol Input String Length area.
4. Write the desired string content into the Industrial Protocol Input String area.
5. Set the Barcode Data Compare Input String bit to 1 to apply the custom string.
After the input string is saved in the system, the Barcode Data Compare Input String Ack bit will be set to 1.

Note: The specific industrial protocol must be enabled on the Industrial Protocols tab.

For register information and input bits, see the following sections:
• EtherNet/IP on p. 182
• Modbus/TCP on p. 202
• PLC5, SLC500, and MicroLogix (PCCC) on p. 211
• PROFINET on p. 221

9.1.4 Barcode Tool: Results

Tools & Results and All Results list information from the current and previous inspections.
A red box around a tool indicates that the tool failed. Status provides information about the specific failure.
All Results displays the Result, Time, Pass Count, and Fail Count information at a glance. Expand the inspection tool to see
specific results for that tool.

Barcode Count
The total number of barcodes read within the ROI.
Expand Barcode Count to see a list of all barcodes read by this tool, sorted in order of position, from top to bottom.
This results table lists each barcode symbology, length, data, and Code Quality Grade, when grading is enabled.
Execution Time
The execution time, in milliseconds, for the currently selected tool in the current inspection.
Expand Execution Time to see the historical minimum and maximum execution times up to this point for the
selected tool.
Use the reset button in the Inspection Summary to reset these historical values.
Status
Status and error messages display as appropriate.

9.1.5 Using the Barcode Tool

Follow these steps to configure a Barcode tool sample application. The Barcode tool reads most types of barcodes right
away, but reads faster with optimization.
The Barcode tool uses one ROI which defines the area that the tool searches for barcodes. This ROI cannot be rotated and it
is always a rectangle. The default ROI covers the entire image for maximum readability.

Note: This procedure is an example only.

1. Add a Barcode tool to the inspection.

A barcode visible in the ROI should be read right away unless an advanced feature such as Mirror Image or Image
Filter is needed. When a barcode is read, the barcode is shown with a box around it in the image.

148 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 277. Read Barcode

2. If at least one desired barcode is read right away, go to step 3. If no barcode is read right away, consider the
following ways to improve image readability to increase chances of success in the next step:
• Adjust the focus and brightness until you have a clear, high-contrast image
• If the smallest modules of the barcode appear to be less then 3 pixels wide, try moving closer to increase
resolution
3. On the Parameters pane, expand Auto Learn and click Start.
Figure 278. Auto Learn

A search runs to find up to 10 barcodes in the image. Then the Max Barcode Count is set to the number of found
barcodes. Any barcodes found are listed in the Auto Learn results window. Any barcode symbologies that are not
found are disabled. All other Input parameter selections are reset, except for the size and placement of the ROI.
Figure 279. Barcodes Found

Note:
Auto Learn does not read Pharmacode barcodes. To read a Pharmacode, skip step 3 and
manually enable Pharmacode in the 1D code settings. Disable all other 1D, 2D and Postal
symbologies for best performance.
Auto Learn does not enable Data Matrix: Dot Peen mode. If you have a Dot Peen Data Matrix,
manually enable the Dot Peen setting. Disable all other 1D, 2D and Postal symbologies for best
performance.
4. Click OK.
5. On the Test tab, select Count to enable the Count test parameter.
6. Expand Count and set the minimum and maximum to the number of barcodes desired in your application.
In this example, the minimum and maximum are set to two. The test will only pass when all of the desired barcodes
are read.
7. Test a complete range of good and bad samples to make sure that the sensor accepts good parts and rejects bad
parts.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 149

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 280. Good Part—Two Barcodes Read

Figure 281. Bad Part—Only One Barcode is Readable

150 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

10 Using the Inspection Tools: Analysis Tools

Analysis tools include Math, Measure, and Logic.
Click a tool on Tools & Results or Tools Only to access the Parameters pane for that tool.

10.1 Math Tool

Use the Math tool to perform basic arithmetic and inequality expressions, and to calculate statistical information for
inspections.
The Math tool takes one or more pieces of information from the tool data or from user-supplied constants and makes
mathematical expressions out of them. The results of the Math tool's analysis are displayed in Tools & Results and All
Results.
The inputs to the Math tool are called operands. The operation is the mathematical expression used on the operands.
In general, a user-defined constant can be selected as one of the operands for the Math tool. This allows for a number of
things, including scaling the output of a vision tool in real units (by dividing that output by a known conversion factor).
Dynamic scaling of outputs is also possible by dividing one operand by another and then multiplying by a constant
conversion factor. In this case, two Math tools would be used: one set for division, the other for multiplication. The output of
the first Math tool would be an operand for the second Math tool.
Example application: Add advanced logic to an inspection using arithmetic or inequality expressions.

10.1.1 Math Tool: Input Parameters

Use the Input parameters to configure how the tool analyzes an image.
Figure 282. Math Tool—Input Parameters

Operator
Select the type of mathematical expression used for the inspection operator.
Figure 283. Operator

Table 2: Single Operand Operations

Single operand operations require one input.
Operator Summary Description
ABS {A} ABS(1) = 1 The absolute value of an operand is its unsigned magnitude.
For example, ABS(-1.5) and ABS(1.5) both return 1.5
SQRT {A} SQRT(1) = 1 The square root of the operand

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 151

VE Series Smart Camera

Table 3: Dual Operand Operations

Dual operand operations require two inputs (operand A and operand B). For each operand, specify the tool (or a constant)
and the specific attribute of interest for that tool.

Operator Summary Description

A+B 1+1=2 Add
A-B 1-1=0 Subtract
A*B 1×1=1 Multiply
A/B 1÷1=1 Divide
MOD {A, B} 1%1=0 Modulus; the modulus, or remainder, operator divides
operand A by operand B and returns the remainder
Div {A, B} 1÷1=1 Integer division; returns the integer part of division, and the
remainder is discarded
ABS (A - B) |1 - 1| = 0 Returns the absolute value of operand A – B
A>B 1 > 1 = false Greater than; returns True, else False
A≥B 1 ≥ 1 = true Greater than or equal to; returns True, else False
A=B 1 = 1 = true Equal to; returns True, else False
A<B 1 < 1 = false Less than; returns True, else False
A≤B 1 ≤ 1 = true Less than or equal to; returns True, else False

If the output of a relational operation is used as an input for another Math Tool, True is interpreted as 1 and False is
interpreted as 0.
Table 4: Array Operand Operations
Array Operations allow the user to make a long list of input data. All of these pieces of information are inputs to the selected
operator. For example, select MIN{A} as the operator, and select an input tool.

Operator Description
MIN{A} Minimum—Returns the operand with the lowest value
MAX{A} Maximum—Returns the operand with the highest value
MEAN{A} Returns the mean value of the operands
MEDIAN{A} The statistical median is the middle number of a group of numbers that have been arranged
in order by size. If there is an even number of terms, the median is the mean of the two
middle numbers.
COUNT{A} Returns the count of the operands
SUM{A} Returns the arithmetic sum of the operands
VAR{A} Variance—A measure of how spread out the operands values are
STDDEV{A} Standard Deviation—A measure of how spread out the operands values are

Operand A
Choose the first variable from the vision tools in the inspection, or select a user-defined constant value.
Figure 284. Operand A

152 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Operand B
Choose the second variable from the vision tools in the inspection, or select a user-defined constant value.
Figure 285. Operand B

Inspection Pass/Fail
Select the Contribute to Inspection Pass/Fail check box (default) if the tool will influence the Pass/Fail status of the
inspection.
Figure 286. Inspection Pass/Fail

The Pass/Fail contribution influences the following:

• Discrete output Pass
• Discrete output Fail
• Pass/Fail results counter
• Pass (Green) and Fail (red) LEDs on the Sensor
Select this checkbox if the overall Pass/Fail status of the inspection is dependent on the current tool.

10.1.2 Math Tool: Test Parameters

Use the Test parameters to configure the pass/fail conditions for the tool. Select the parameter checkbox to enable it.

Figure 287. Math Tool—Test Parameters

Integer
The integer value range of the Math tool operation.
Decimal
The decimal value range of the Math tool operation.
Boolean
The Boolean result for the Math tool operation.

10.1.3 Math Tool: Results

Tools & Results and All Results list information from the current and previous inspections.
A red box around a tool indicates that the tool failed. Status provides information about the specific failure.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 153

VE Series Smart Camera

All Results displays the Result, Time, Pass Count, and Fail Count information at a glance. Expand the inspection tool to see
specific results for that tool.

Integer Result
The integer value result of the Math tool operation.
Decimal Result
The decimal result of the Math tool operation.
Boolean
The Boolean result for the Math tool operation.
Execution Time
The execution time, in milliseconds, for the currently selected tool in the current inspection.
Expand Execution Time to see the historical minimum and maximum execution times up to this point for the
selected tool.
Use the reset button in the Inspection Summary to reset these historical values.
Status
Status and error messages display as appropriate.

10.1.4 Using the Math Tool

Follow these steps for an example Math inspection.
This example uses two Edge tools and a Math tool to determine whether the number of edges found by Edge01 is greater
than the number of edges found by Edge02. See Using the Edge and Measure Tools on p. 107 for more information on using
the Edge tool.

Note: This procedure is an example only.

1. Add an Edge tool to the inspection.

2. Move the Edge01 ROI over the shapes in the image.
Figure 288. Edge01 ROI

3. Add a second Edge tool to the inspection.

4. Move the Edge02 ROI over the black area of the image.
Figure 289. Edge02 ROI

5. Add a Math tool to the inspection.

6. Expand Operator and choose a mathematical function to perform. For this example, select A > B.
7. Expand Operand A and select Edge01. This is the first variable or constant for the mathematical expression.

154 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

8. Expand Operand B and select Edge02. This is the second variable or constant for the mathematical expression.
9. Set the Test parameters to set the pass/fail criteria.
a) On the Test tab, select the Boolean checkbox.
This option sets whether the mathematical expression is true or false so that the part passes.
b) Select True.
Edge01 must find more edges than Edge02 for a part to pass.
10. Test a complete range of good and bad samples to make sure that the sensor accepts good parts and rejects bad
parts.

Figure 290. Edge02 ROI Figure 291. Edge02 ROI

10.2 Measure Tool

Use the Measure tool to determine distances, calculate angles, and create points and lines for use as inputs to other
Measure tools.
The Measure tool operations are:
• Measure from a point to a point
• Determine the intersection between two lines
• Measure from a line to a point
The points used in these operations are generated by a variety of vision tools and the lines are created by other Measure
tools.
Example applications:
• Determine the distance between blobs
• Measure the width of a label
• Determine if two edges are parallel to each other

10.2.1 Measure Tool: Operations

Measure from a Point to a Point
In this operation, the distance between two points is calculated. In addition, the x and y components of that distance
calculation are returned.
Along with distance, the following results are generated in this operation:
• A line from point 1 to point 2
• The angle of that line (relative to the x-axis)
• The midpoint location halfway between point 1 and point 2

How the Tool Measures Two Points

The inputs to the Measure tool for measuring two points are any two points that vision tools generate.
The results include the total distance between the points and the x and y component distances. In addition to finding these
distance values, the Measure tool also calculates the line between the two endpoints. The angle between this line and the
camera’s horizontal plane, as well as the coordinates for the line’s midpoint, are also provided.
For example, a Measure01 measurement between the two points Edge01 and Edge02 appears as a dashed line. The actual
measured distance between the points is a solid green line labeled Measure01 and an arrowhead indicates the direction of
the measurement operation (from Edge01 to Edge02, in this case). A blue circle is the midpoint. Two shorter dashed lines
represent the x and y components. The angle between Measure01 and the horizontal plane is a curved arrow. The results
show the angle in degrees.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 155

VE Series Smart Camera

See Using the Edge and Measure Tools on p. 107 for a Measure tool example.

Intersect Two Lines

In this operation, the results of the intersection of two lines is generated. These results are:
• The angle of intersection between the two lines, measure from line 1 to line 2
• The intersection point, even if this point is not in the image

How the Tool Measures Two Lines

This mode finds the angle between two lines. Both inputs are the line outputs from existing Measure tools. The order in which
these tools are input matters.
The intersection point can be off of the screen. This angle provides the ability to measure two lines for parallelism.
For example, if you have two inputs that are both existing Measure tools, Measure01 and Measure02, the output, called
Measure03, is the angle between the lines of each of the inputs. Measure03 is a curved arrow from the first input,
Measure01, towards the arrowhead of the second input, Measure02. The results show this angle in degrees. The intersection
point of the two best fit lines is also provided in the results and is shown by the blue circle in the image pane.
See Using the Edge and Measure Tools on p. 107 for a Measure tool example.

Measure from a Line to a Point

In this operation, the software calculates the distance between a line and a point. This is the shortest distance from the line to
the point, and is generated by creating a line perpendicular to the original line that intersects the point. In addition, it returns
the distance calculations for the X and Y component.
Additionally, the following results are generated in this operation:
• The perpendicular line, which goes from the line to the point
• The angle of that line (relative to the x-axis)
• The intersection point between the original line and the perpendicular line

How the Tool Measures a Line and a Point

This mode finds the shortest distance between a point and a line.
The two inputs to the Measure tool are:
• Any point a vision tool generates
• Any line another measure tool generates
The shortest distance between a line and a point may lie along another line. This new line may be perpendicular to the
original line.
For example, the center point of a blob, Blob01, and the nearest point in the input line Measure01 define a dashed line. The
actual measured distance between Blob01 and Measure01 is labeled Measure02. A blue circle shows where Measure01 and
Measure02 intersect. The results show the distance between the intersection point and the blob midpoint in pixels. Two
shorter dashed lines represent the x and y components. The angle between Measure02 and the horizontal plane is a curved
arrow. The results show this angle in degrees.
See Using the Edge and Measure Tools on p. 107 for a Measure tool example.

10.2.2 Measure Tool: Input Parameters

Use the Input parameters to configure how the tool analyzes an image.
Figure 292. Measure Tool—Input Parameters

156 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Measure from...
Select either a constant or another tool where the Measure tool will start measuring from.
Figure 293. Measure From...—Specific Tool Selected

If selecting a constant, enter the x and y coordinates to begin the measurement from. The coordinates are entered in pixels,
however if Units is enabled, the value entered in pixels is converted to units for the calculation.
If selecting a specific tool, select the specific characteristic in the tool to measure from.

Measure to...
Select either a constant or another tool where the Measure tool will stop measuring.
Figure 294. Measure To...—Constant Selected

If selecting a constant, enter in the x and y coordinates to end the measurement at. The coordinates are entered in pixels,
however if Units is enabled, the value entered in pixels is converted to units for the calculation.
If selecting a specific tool, select the specific characteristic in the tool to measure to.

Characteristics
Set additional parameters for the inspection.
Figure 295. Characteristics

Preserve Sign
When Preserve Sign is selected, the x and y distances are computed as distance offsets. These distance offsets
are represented by signed numbers. Negative numbers indicate that the distance offset is toward the origin (0,0).
Positive numbers indicate that the distance offset is away from the origin.
Force to Absolute
Select Force to Absolute to change the tool from calculating the x and y components of the measurement from
relative positioning to absolute positioning. When disabled, the tool ROI positions itself independent to any other
reference tool preceding it in the inspection.

Image Overlays
Choose whether to display or hide the annotations when this tool is not selected.
Figure 296. Image Overlays

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 157

VE Series Smart Camera

This option overrides the ROI view buttons on the Image Pane Parameters when no tool is selected. When a
specific tool is selected, the ROI information is shown.

Figure 297. Show Measure Tool Annotations Figure 298. Hide Measure Tool Annotations

Inspection Pass/Fail
Select the Contribute to Inspection Pass/Fail check box (default) if the tool will influence the Pass/Fail status of the
inspection.
Figure 299. Inspection Pass/Fail

The Pass/Fail contribution influences the following:

• Discrete output Pass
• Discrete output Fail
• Pass/Fail results counter
• Pass (Green) and Fail (red) LEDs on the Sensor
Select this checkbox if the overall Pass/Fail status of the inspection is dependent on the current tool.

10.2.3 Measure Tool: Test Parameters

Use the Test parameters to configure the pass/fail conditions for the tool.
Select the parameter checkbox to enable it. Where applicable, the vertical green bar shows the current parameter
information and the light gray backgrounds show the range over which a value has varied over time.
Where applicable, use the sliders or enter the minimum and maximum for the selected test parameters.
The current data found and the range of historical data found are shown for applicable Test parameters. The historical data
begins from the last reset.

Figure 300. Measure Tool—Test Parameters

Distance
The straight-line distance between two constants or
tools.
Distance X
The x dimension vector component of the straight line
distance.
Distance Y
The y dimension vector component of the straight line
distance.
Angle
The angle with respect to the x axis, along which the
straight line measurement vector lies. If the tool is
measuring from one Line tool to another Line tool, the
Angle is the measurement of the angle formed by the
two lines. If the Force to Absolute parameter is
selected, the angle is calculated relative to the
reference tool that precedes the Measure tool.

158 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

10.2.4 Measure Tool: Results

Tools & Results and All Results list information from the current and previous inspections.
A red box around a tool indicates that the tool failed. Status provides information about the specific failure.
All Results displays the Result, Time, Pass Count, and Fail Count information at a glance. Expand the inspection tool to see
specific results for that tool.

Distance
The straight-line distance between two constants or tools.
Distance X
The x dimension vector component of the straight line distance.
Distance Y
The y dimension vector component of the straight line distance.
Angle
The angle with respect to the x axis, along which the straight line measurement vector lies. If the tool is measuring
from one Line tool to another Line tool, the Angle is the measurement of the angle formed by the two lines. If the
Force to Absolute parameter is selected, the angle is calculated relative to the reference tool that precedes the
Measure tool.
Mid Point
The x and y coordinates of the middle point between the two selected points.
Mid Point is calculated for point to point measurements only.
Projection Point
The x and y coordinates of the intersection point between the input line and a virtual line passing through the input
point. The virtual line is orthogonal (perpendicular) to the input line. The intersection point is on the input line
because the other line does not exist (virtual).
Projection Point is calculated for line to point measurements only.
Intersection Point
The x and y coordinates of the intersection point of two non-coincident input lines.
Intersection Point is calculated for line to line measurements only.
Execution Time
The execution time, in milliseconds, for the currently selected tool in the current inspection.
Expand Execution Time to see the historical minimum and maximum execution times up to this point for the
selected tool.
Use the reset button in the Inspection Summary to reset these historical values.
Status
Status and error messages display as appropriate.

10.2.5 Using the Edge and Measure Tools

Follow these steps for an example Edge inspection to check the position of a plunger in a syringe.
This procedure uses two Edge tools and a Measure tool to determine the position of the plunger in the barrel.

Note: This procedure is an example only.

1. Add an Edge tool to the inspection.

2. Adjust the ROI position, length, and width.
a) Position the ROI vertically over the top of the plunger.
b) Expand ROI, then expand ROI Width.
c) Set the ROI width to 161 px.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 159

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 301. ROI Over the Top of the Plunger

3. Set the threshold.

a) Expand the Threshold parameters.
b) Set the Threshold Type to Edge Strength.
c) Leave Edge Strength at the default (20).
d) Select Bright to Dark from the Edge Polarity list.
The tool finds the top of the plunger.
4. Add a second Edge tool.
5. Adjust the ROI position, length, and width.
a) Position the ROI vertically over the top of the barrel.
b) Expand ROI, then expand ROI Width.
c) Set the ROI width to 97 px.
Figure 302. ROI Over the Top of the Barrel

6. Set the threshold.

a) Expand the Threshold parameters.
b) Set the Threshold Type to Edge Strength.
c) Expand Edge Strength and set it to 21.
d) Select Dark to Bright from the Edge Polarity list.
The tool finds the lower edge of the barrel.
7. Add a Measure tool.
a) Expand Measure From... and select Edge02 from the Tool list.
b) Expand Measure To... and select Edge01 from the Tool list.
Figure 303. Measure Tool

8. Set the Test parameters to set the pass/fail criteria.

160 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

a) On the Test tab, select the Distance Y checkbox to enable the test parameter.
b) Move the sliders slightly above and below the green line to allow for very slight variations in the distance.

Note: The green bar indicates the current distance and the light gray background indicates the
distance over time.
9. Click to show all ROIs at the same time.
Figure 304. All Tools Shown

10. Test a complete range of good and bad samples to make sure that the sensor accepts good parts and rejects bad
parts.

Figure 305. Good Part Figure 306. Bad Part—Plunger Too High

10.3 Logic Tool

Use the Logic tool to combine or convert tool results, or to drive discrete outputs from tool results.
The Logic tool uses Boolean logic to combine or convert tool results. The logic output can be used to pass or fail the
inspection or to drive a discrete output. The results of the Logic tool's analysis are displayed in Tools & Results and All
Results.
The inputs to the Logic tool are called operands. The camera tool, vision tools, or analysis tools can be operands if they are
added to the current inspection. The operation is the logical expression used on the operands. AND, OR, and XOR logic are
available.

AND
A true output results if all inputs are true.
OR
A true output results if one or more of the inputs are true.
XOR
A true output results if one, and only one, of the inputs is true.

Example uses:
• Gather results from the camera tool, vision tools, or analysis tools
• Establish parameters for desired inspection results
• Tie multiple results together with logic options
• Include results in the overall Pass/Fail criteria
• Activate a discrete output based on the inspection results
• Part sorting applications

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 161

VE Series Smart Camera

10.3.1 Logic Tool: Input Parameters

Use the Input parameters to configure how the tool analyzes an image.
Figure 307. Logic Tool—Input Parameters

Operator
Select the type of logical expression used for the Logic tool operator.
Figure 308. Operator

Operator Summary/Examples Description

AND (All) AND(True, True, True)=True A true output results if all inputs are true.
AND(True, False, True)=False
OR (Any) OR(True, True, True)=True A true output results if one or more of the inputs are true.
OR(True, False, True)=True
XOR (Only one) XOR(True, True, True)=False A true output results if one, and only one, of the inputs is
XOR(True, False, True)=False true.

Operands
Choose the variables from the tools found in the inspection. The current tool result displays in the Result column.
Figure 309. Operands

The desired operands must be listed before the Logic tool in the Tools and Results pane so that they can be used by the
Logic tool. Each operand must have its test criteria enabled for the Logic tool to use it.

Discrete Output
Select whether the Logic tool activates one of the five programmable I/O and what the active condition is.
Figure 310. Discrete Output—Output Active

162 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

I/O #
Select the desired General Output I/O number.
To select and use I/O 1-5 in the Logic tool Discrete Output parameter, at least one I/O must be configured as
General Output in the system settings. Click System Settings > Discrete I/O and select General Output from the
Function list for the desired I/O.
Active Condition
Select when the output is active—either when the result is True or when the result is False.
Available when an I/O # is selected.

Inspection Pass/Fail
Select the Contribute to Inspection Pass/Fail check box (default) if the tool will influence the Pass/Fail status of the
inspection.
Figure 311. Inspection Pass/Fail

The Pass/Fail contribution influences the following:

• Discrete output Pass
• Discrete output Fail
• Pass/Fail results counter
• Pass (Green) and Fail (red) LEDs on the Sensor
Select this checkbox if the overall Pass/Fail status of the inspection is dependent on the current tool.

10.3.2 Logic Tool: Test Parameters

Use the Test parameters to configure the pass/fail conditions for the tool. Select the parameter checkbox to enable it.

Figure 312. Logic Tool—Test Parameters

Logic Output
The Boolean result for the Logic tool operation.

10.3.3 Logic Tool: Results

Tools & Results and All Results list information from the current and previous inspections.
A red box around a tool indicates that the tool failed. Status provides information about the specific failure.
All Results displays the Result, Time, Pass Count, and Fail Count information at a glance. Expand the inspection tool to see
specific results for that tool.

Logic Output
The Boolean result for the Logic tool operation.
Execution Time
The execution time, in milliseconds, for the currently selected tool in the current inspection.
Expand Execution Time to see the historical minimum and maximum execution times up to this point for the
selected tool.
Use the reset button in the Inspection Summary to reset these historical values.
Status
Status and error messages display as appropriate.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 163

VE Series Smart Camera

10.3.4 Using the Logic Tool

Follow these steps for an example inspection that uses the Logic tool.
This example uses two Match tools and two Logic tools. The Match tools are taught independently. Each Match tool
determines the presence or absence of a different logo on different size boxes. The first Logic tool passes the inspection if
either Match tool finds its respective logo. The second Logic tool turns on an output if a specific logo is found. This output
could be used to turn on a light or to send the box to a different line. See Using the Match Tool on p. 130 for more information
on using the Match tool.

Note: This procedure is an example only.

1. Add a Match tool to the inspection.

a) Configure Match01 to recognize the logo on the small box.
b) Expand Inspection Pass/Fail and remove the checkmark to disable the parameter.
c) On the Test tab, select the Count checkbox to enable the Count test parameter.
d) Expand Count and set it to a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 1.
Figure 313. Match01

2. Add a second Match tool.

a) Configure Match02 to recognize the logo on the large box.
b) Expand Inspection Pass/Fail and remove the checkmark to disable the parameter.
c) On the Test tab, select the Count checkbox to enable the Count test parameter.
d) Expand Count and set it to a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 1.
Figure 314. Match02

3. Add a Logic tool.

4. Expand Operator and choose the logical expression to perform. For this example, choose OR (Any).
5. Expand Operands and select the tools to include in the analysis.
a) Remove the checkmark from Camera01 to exclude it.
b) Select the Match01 and Match02 checkboxes to include them.
6. Leave Inspection Pass/Fail selected (default).
7. Set the Test parameters to set the pass/fail criteria.
a) On the Test tab, select the Logic Output checkbox.
This option sets whether the Boolean logic is true or false so that the part passes.
b) Select True.
If any box has a logo, the Logic tool and inspection pass.
8. Add a second Logic tool to the inspection.
9. Expand Operator and choose the logical expression to perform. For this example, choose AND (Any).
10. Expand Operands and select the tools to include in the analysis.
a) Remove the checkmark from Camera01 to exclude it.
b) Select the Match01 checkbox to include it.
11. Set the Discrete I/O.
a) Click System Settings > Discrete I/O.

164 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

b) Select General Output as the Function for one I/O. This example uses I/O 5.
12. Set the Discrete Output parameter for the Logic tool.
a) Expand Discrete Output.
b) Select the desired I/O from the I/O # list. In this example, select 5. General Output.
c) Leave the Active Condition as Active when True (default).
13. Expand Inspection Pass/Fail and remove the checkmark to disable the parameter.
14. Set the Test parameters to set the pass/fail criteria.
a) On the Test tab, select the Logic Output checkbox.
This option sets whether the Boolean logic is true or false so that the part passes.
b) Select True.
The small box must have the logo to create the general output.
15. Expand the I/O Summary so that you can see the results.
Figure 315. I/O Summary—Small Box Passes with Output

Figure 316. I/O Summary—Large Box Passes with no Output

16. Test a complete range of good and bad samples to make sure that the sensor accepts good parts and rejects bad
parts.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 165

VE Series Smart Camera

11 Emulators
Use Emulators on the Home screen to connect to the emulator.
Figure 317. Emulators

Click to connect to the desired emulator. This tab also displays the Image location on the computer, as well as the
emulator version information.
To access the emulator for different types of the VE models, select the desired type from the Type list before clicking . The
Vision option enables the vision and analysis tools. The ID option enables the identification and analysis tools. The Vision +
ID option enables all tools.
Click under Folder Location to change the directory for the reference images. The default directory for images is C:
\Users\Public\Documents\Banner Vision Manager\VE Series\VE xMP\Images. Both 8-bit monochrome
bitmap (BMP) images and inspection logs are supported. Bitmap images should be the same resolution as the VE camera. If
inspection logs are placed in the Images directory, the emulator automatically extracts the image out of the inspection log
and uses it to run the currently loaded inspection. Click to open the directory.
The Emulators tab includes all available features and all tools function the same as they do when running on a sensor. On
the emulator, execution time is not calculated.

11.1 Backup or Restore the Emulator

Emulator settings and inspections can be backed up and restored.
Save the backup file to the location of your choice.
1. From the Home screen, click Emulators.
2. Make sure that no sensors or emulators are connected to the Vision Manager software.
3. Click , then click Backup.
4. Follow the prompts to save a backup file.
A message displays saying that the backup was successful.
5. To restore the sensor data, click , then click Restore.
6. Follow the prompts to restore the sensor data. A sensor backup file can be used to restore the emulator.

Note: This process can take several minutes.

A message displays saying that the restore was successful.

166 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

12 Sensor Display
The LCD display on the top of the sensor provides access to view or change several settings without using Vision Manager.
The display provides limited programming options:
• ETHER—Ethernet settings
• PCHANGE—Product change
• IO—Input/Output settings
• IMAGE—Image settings
• INFO—Sensor information
• SYSERROR—System errors, if present
• DISPLAY—Display settings
• REBOOT—Reboot
Access the sensor menu by pressing Enter from the Home Screen on the sensor display.
Note that when User Profiles are enabled, the sensor display is available as read-only. No editing can be done directly from
the sensor until User Profiles are disabled for that sensor.

12.1 Sensor Display Interface

Use the sensor buttons to configure several sensor settings and to access sensor information.

Down and Up Buttons

Press Down and Up to:
• Navigate the menu systems
• Change programming settings
When navigating the menu systems, the menu items loop.
Enter Button
Press Enter to:
• Access the Sensor Menu
• Access the submenus
• Save changes
In the Sensor Menu, a check mark in the lower right corner of the display indicates that pressing Enter
accesses a submenu.
Escape Button
Press Escape to:
• Leave the current menu and return to the parent menu
• Leave the current menu and return to the Home Screen from any menu

Important: Pressing Escape discards any unsaved changes.

In the Sensor Menu, a return arrow in the upper left corner of the display indicates that pressing Escape
returns to the parent menu.
Press and hold Escape for 2 seconds to return to the Home Screen from any menu.

12.2 Locking and Unlocking the Sensor

Use the lock and unlock feature to prevent unauthorized or accidental programming changes.
A lock symbol displays in the upper left corner of the display to indicate when the sensor is locked. When locked, the
menus are available to view settings, but the values cannot be changed.
To lock or unlock the sensor using the buttons, press and hold Down and Escape simultaneously until the lock
symbol displays.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 167

VE Series Smart Camera

12.3 Sensor Menu

Figure 318. Menu Map

Top Menu
Sub Menus
Ethernet Menu
Enter
Home ETHER STATUS LINK
Screen Top Menu SPEED

IP
VE Series User Interface
SUBNET
GATEWAY
MAC
Enter Shortcuts Menu MAX SPD 100 FD
100 HD
FOCUS#
1000 FD
TRIGGER Yes
Product Change by Slot No.

PCHANGE By NUM

Bit Representation of
Select Menu Item Input/Output States
or
Press to Save Setting
IO OUTPUT
INPUT
PSELECT
Go Back to Parent Menu View Current
or Focus No.
Press and Hold to Go Back
to Home Screen IMAGE FOCUS#
TRIGGER Yes

Sensor Info
(read-only)
INFO NAME
MODEL
FW VER
BOOT
HOUR
SERIAL
System Error
SYSERR VIEW
CLEAR Yes
No

Display Settings
DISPLAY VIEW
SLEEP

Reboot Device
REBOOT Yes
No

Return to Top

168 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

12.4 Ethernet Menu (ETHER)

Use this menu to view or change network connection information.

STATUS
LINK—View the connection status (UP or NONE). UP indicates that an Ethernet link has been established. NONE
indicates that a link has not been established.
SPEED—View the speed (100HD/100FD/1000FD).
IP
View or change the IP address of the sensor.
SUBNET
View or change the subnet address of the sensor.
GATEWAY
View or change the gateway address of the sensor.
MAC
View the MAC address of the sensor.
MAX SPEED
Set the speed to 100HD, 100FD, or 1000FD. The default speed is 100 full duplex.

Note: To use 1000 full duplex, all supporting network hardware must fully support 1000 Mb
Ethernet or poor communication throughput could occur.

12.5 Product Change Menu (PCHANGE)

Use this menu to view or change the inspection by slot number.

12.6 Input/Output Menu (IO)

Use this menu to view I/O information.

OUTPUT
A Bit representation of the output states.
INPUT
A Bit representation of the input states.
PSELECT
The slot number represented by selected bits and a Bit representation of the Product Select input pins.

12.7 Image Menu (IMAGE)

Use this menu to view focus and trigger information.

FOCUS#
View the current focus number.
TRIGGER
Select Yes to trigger the sensor.

12.8 Information Menu (INFO)

Use this menu to view sensor information.

NAME
View the device name.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 169

VE Series Smart Camera

MODEL
View the model number.
FW VER
View the firmware version.
BOOT
View the boot number.
HOUR
View the hour count.
SERIAL
View the sensor serial number.

12.9 System Error Menu (SYSERR)

Use this menu to view or clear system errors, when present.

VIEW
View the latest system error, when present.
CLEAR
Select Yes to clear a system error state. Select No to return to the previous menu without clearing the error.
Clearing the system error state does not remove the system error from the system log.

12.10 Display Menu (DISPLAY)

Use this menu to change the display orientation and sleep mode settings.

VIEW
View or change the display orientation of the sensor. Invert the display for applications where the device is mounted
upside down.
• Normal—The display is in the normal orientation
• Invert—The display is rotated 180°. The down and up buttons do not change when the display is inverted.
SLEEP
View or change when the display is put to sleep.
• Disabled
• 1min—1 minute
• 5min—5 minutes (default)
• 15min—15 minutes
• 60min—60 minutes

12.11 Reboot Menu (REBOOT)

Use this menu to reboot the sensor. The sensor retains the current settings after the reboot.
Select Yes to reboot the sensor. Select No to return to the Reboot option without rebooting the sensor.

170 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

13 Communications Guide
13.1 Communication Summary
The VE Series camera communicates with other devices via Ethernet.
To establish an Ethernet connection to the sensor, the external device must be configured with the correct IP address and
support a communication protocol supported by the sensor.

13.1.1 Communication Channels

The VE Series camera supports up to three communications channels.
To access the channels, go to System Settings > Communications.
• Industrial Ethernet—A bi-directional communication channel that allows the user to control the sensor and access
sensor results using Ethernet/IP, Modbus/TCP, PROFINET®, or PCCC protocol
• Data Export—Used to export inspection data to a remote device
• Image Export—Used to export inspection images to a remote device

13.1.2 Industrial Ethernet

The VE Series camera can be controlled or monitored over Industrial Ethernet using Ethernet/IP, Modbus/TCP, PROFINET®,
or PCCC protocols.
Use this document to set up the VE Series camera in the desired configuration and to provide information needed to connect
to the master device (PLC, HMI, etc.).
Navigate: System Settings > Communications > Industrial Protocols.

13.1.3 Data Export

Data export is a way to publish inspection data over Ethernet or Serial channels.
Navigate: System Settings > Communications > Data Export.
On the Data Export tab, set the data export parameters:

Export
Set which results to export:
• Disabled (default)
• All
• Pass only
• Fail only
Channel
Select which channel to use:
• Ethernet (default)
• Serial
Port Number
Set the port number to use for the export. The default is 32100.
Note that the port number cannot be the same as any other port in use.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 171

VE Series Smart Camera

Hold Ready
During the data export operation the sensor's output channels might become full. This can occur if the sensor is
exporting data faster than the data can be exported from the device (due to bandwidth limitations) or faster than the
client is reading the channel export data.
The Hold READY setting affects how the sensor behaves in this situation.
• Select the Hold READY checkbox to prevent new triggers from being accepted until the current results have
been exported. This ensures that all results are exported. In this case, the READY signal will remain inactive
(sensor is busy) until all the results have been added to the channel for export. Triggers might be missed
during this time.
• Clear the Hold READY checkbox to accept new triggers while the current results are exported. This causes
the sensor to discard the new results if the channel is full and activate the READY signal immediately after
the current inspection is complete. In this case, the discarded results will not be exported.

Important: When the checkbox is cleared, not all results will be exported. When the
checkbox is selected, the sensor will be busy (not ready) until the result has been
written to the network; inspection times will increase based on network throughput.

Use the data export map to select the results to publish. These include:
• Slot
• Tool Type
• Tool Name—The Tool Name must match the tool name included in the inspection for the results to export
• Result—Choose the desired result based on the tool selected

Note: A Slot of ANY means that if an inspection includes a tool with the exact name (for example,
AverageGray01), the results are output. If an inspection does not have a tool with the exact name (for
example AverageGrayAssemblyLine01), no results are output for that tool and that inspection.

The Data Type is dependent on the tool selected. Options include the following:
• Boolean (0 or 1)
• Float
• Integer
• String
• HEX
Click above the map to return the map to the default settings. All user-defined output data is deleted. Click in the
Actions column to delete an individual entry.
Use the data export map to select the results to publish. Use to add additional entries at the end of the list. Click or
to add additional entries above or below the currently selected entry. Use and to move an entry to either up or down in
the map.
Shown below the map is the data that is currently available to be exported.
The Frame Format settings are located to the right of the map:

Delimiter
• , <Comma> (default)
• : <Colon>
• ; <Semicolon>
• \r\n <\x0A\x0D>
• \n\r <\x0D\x0A>
• \r <\x0A>
• \n <\x0D>
• <None>
Start String
Enter the desired start string. The default is none. If desired, enter ASCII hex values for the start string in the format
of \xXX. For example, \x0D. Three special characters are available: \r, \n, and \t.
End String
Enter the desired end string. The default is \r\n.

172 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Note: If Data Export is enabled, the receiver application is running under Microsoft Windows, and the
sensor is observed experiencing occasional extended not ready states, examine the value of the
TCPAckFrequency parameter in the Windows Registry. An incorrect setting of this Windows Registry
parameter can cause the sensor to slow down when exporting data to Windows systems. Consult your
local IT support personnel with specific questions.

The Missing Data Format settings are also located to the right of the map:

Publish
• None
• Delimiter only (default)
• Fill String
Fill String
Enter the desired content (fill string) to replace the missing data . The default is 0.

Banner Data Export Sample Program

The VE Series camera has a Data Export sample application that provides a way to save exported results. In a production
environment, you will need to write your own application to process exported results, for example to display them on an HMI
or to save them to disk.
The Banner Data Export Sample Program installs automatically when the Vision Manager software is installed. The source
code to write your own application is located at C:\Users\Public\Documents\Banner Vision Manager\Sample Programs
\Source\Data Export.
Figure 319. Data Export Sample Application

13.1.4 Image Export: TCP/IP

Image export TCP/IP is a proprietary TCP/IP protocol that is supported only on Ethernet ports.
Navigate: System Settings > Communications > Image Export, select which images to export, and select TCP/IP from
the Ethernet Protocol list.

Image Type
Select the image type to export: BMP or JPEG.
Port Number
Set the port number to use for the export. The default is 32200.
Note that the port number cannot be the same as any other port in use.
Watermark
Select the Watermark check box to overlay a small line of white-on-black text on the upper left corner of all exported
images. This does not change the format or type of the image (images can still be imported into Vision Manager for
testing), however any features in the corner of the image are obscured by the text. The text height is approximately
2% of the total image height. The maximum watermark length is where the text reaches the right edge of the image.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 173

VE Series Smart Camera

Text Format
Set which elements to include in the watermark text of images that are exported using TCP/IP. If nothing is selected,
the frame number is used as the watermark.
• Inspection Pass/Fail—Adds P or F to the watermark.
• Device Name—Adds the name of the device to the watermark. For example, VE202G21.
• Inspection Slot Number—Adds S# to the watermark. For example, S1.
• Inspection Name—Adds the name of the inspection to the watermark. For example, Inspection 01.
• Frame Number—Adds N#### to the watermark. For example, N1234.
• Custom String—Select and enter the desired text to include in the watermark. The maximum number of
characters is 100.
• Industrial Protocol String—Adds custom text to the watermark from the industrial protocol. The maximum
number of characters is 52. See the section on your protocol for information on how to set the custom string
(FTP Input String). The string, if available, displays. The string is not saved and cycling the power will delete
the string.
To assign the Industrial Protocol string:
1. Make sure that the FTP Input String bit on the Input Bits Register is set to 0.
2. Write the desired string length into the Industrial Protocol Input String Length area.
3. Write the desired string content into the Industrial Protocol Input String area.
4. Set the FTP Input String bit to 1 to apply the custom string. After the input string is saved in the
system, the FTP Input String Ack bit will be set to 1.

Note: The specific industrial protocol must be enabled on the Industrial Protocols
tab.

For register information and input bits, see the following sections:
◦ EtherNet/IP on p. 182
◦ Modbus/TCP on p. 202
◦ PLC5, SLC500, and MicroLogix (PCCC) on p. 211
◦ PROFINET on p. 221
• Delimiter—Select a character to be placed between all of the above elements to separate them (comma,
dash, dot, semicolon, space, underscore).
The following is an example of a watermark created using the Pass/Fail, Inspection Name, and Frame Number
options:
Figure 320. Example Watermark (Full image not shown)

This example does not include any custom strings or industrial protocol strings.
Hold READY
During the image export operation the sensor's output channels might become full. This can occur if the sensor is
producing export data (images) faster than the data can be exported from the device (due to bandwidth limitations)
or faster than the client is reading the channel export data.
The Hold READY setting affects how the sensor behaves in this situation.
• Select the Hold READY checkbox to prevent new triggers from being accepted until the current image has
been exported. This ensures that all images are exported. In this case, the READY signal will remain inactive
(sensor is busy) until the new image has been added to the channel for export. Triggers might be missed
during this time.
• Clear the Hold READY checkbox to accept new triggers while the current image is exported. This causes
the sensor to discard the new image if the channel is full and activate the READY signal immediately after
the current inspection is complete. In this case, the discarded images will not be exported.

Important: When the checkbox is cleared, not all images will be exported. When the
checkbox is selected, the sensor will be busy (not ready) until the image has been
written to the network; inspection times will increase based on network throughput.
Watermark Text
Displays the complete text string as it will appear in the exported image.

Inspection images match the resolution of the camera and are 8-bits per pixel grayscale images in Windows BMP format that
represent all of the data in a full Field of View (FOV).

174 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Each exported image is composed of a header (64 bytes) followed by the image data; see the following tables. All 16- and
32- bit numeric entries are little endian.
Table 5: Header Information

Byte Offset Field Size in Data Type Description

Bytes

0-15 Header Prefix 16 char "VE IMAGE"

16-19 Header Version 4 UInt32 2

20-23 Image Size 4 UInt32 Number of bytes; see the table below

24-27 Image Frame Number 4 UInt32 Most recently snapped image frame number

28-29 Image Width 2 UInt16 Based on camera resolution

30-31 Image Height 2 UInt16 Based on camera resolution

32-33 Image Format 2 UInt16 0: Bitmap

1: JPEG

34-63 Reserved 30 byte Reserved for future use

Field of View (FOV) Image Size (bytes) 9

2592 x 2048 5,309,494
1600 × 1200 1,921,078
1280 × 1024 1,311,798
752 × 480 362,038

Note: If Image Export is enabled, the receiver application is running under Microsoft Windows, and the
sensor is observed experiencing occasional extended not ready states, examine the value of the
TCPAckFrequency parameter in the Windows Registry. An incorrect setting of this Windows Registry
parameter can cause the sensor to slow down when exporting images to Windows systems. Consult your
local IT support personnel with specific questions.

Banner Image Export Sample Program

The VE Series camera includes an Image Export sample application that provides a way to save exported images. In a
production environment, you will need to write your own application to process exported images, for example to display them
on an HMI or to save them to disk.
The Banner Image Export Sample Program installs automatically when the Vision Manager software is installed. The source
code to write your own application is located at C:\Users\Public\Documents\Banner Vision Manager\Sample Programs
\Source\Image Export.
Figure 321. Image Export Sample Application

9 Windows BMP image. Image size is not fixed for JPEG images (if supported).

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 175

VE Series Smart Camera

13.1.5 Image Export: FTP

Image Export FTP supports exporting images over an FTP connection.
Navigate: System Settings > Communications > Image Export, select which images to export, and select FTP from the
Ethernet Protocol list.

Image Type
Select the image type to export: BMP or JPEG.
Watermark
Select the Watermark check box to overlay a small line of white-on-black text on the upper left corner of all exported
images. The text is the file name of the exported image. This does not change the format or type of the image
(images can still be imported into Vision Manager for testing), however any features in the corner of the image are
obscured by the text. The text height is approximately 2% of the total image height. The maximum watermark length
is where the text reaches the right edge of the image.
The following is an example of a watermark created using the Pass/Fail, Inspection Name, and Frame Number
options:
Figure 322. Example Watermark (Full image not shown)

File Name Format

Set which elements to include in the file names of images that are exported using FTP. Result shows a sample file
name. If nothing is selected, the frame number is used as the file name.
• Inspection Pass/Fail—Adds P or F to the file name.
• Device Name—Adds the name of the device to the file name. For example, VE202G21.
• Inspection Slot Number—Adds S# to the file name. For example, S1.
• Inspection Name—Adds the name of the inspection to the file name. For example, Inspection 01.
• Frame Number—Adds N#### to the file name. For example, N1234.
• Custom String—Select and enter the desired text to include in each file name. The maximum number of
characters is 100.
• Industrial Protocol String—Adds custom text to the file name from the industrial protocol. The maximum
number of characters is 52. See the section on your protocol for information on how to set the custom string
(FTP Input String). The string, if available, displays. The string is not saved and cycling the power will delete
the string.
To assign the Industrial Protocol string:
1. Make sure that the FTP Input String bit on the Input Bits Register is set to 0.
2. Write the desired string length into the Industrial Protocol Input String Length area.
3. Write the desired string content into the Industrial Protocol Input String area.
4. Set the FTP Input String bit to 1 to apply the custom string. After the input string is saved in the
system, the FTP Input String Ack bit will be set to 1.

Note: The specific industrial protocol must be enabled on the Industrial Protocols
tab.

For register information and input bits, see the following sections:
◦ EtherNet/IP on p. 182
◦ Modbus/TCP on p. 202
◦ PLC5, SLC500, and MicroLogix (PCCC) on p. 211
◦ PROFINET on p. 221
• Delimiter—Select a character to be placed between all of the above elements to separate them (comma,
dash, dot, semicolon, space, underscore).
This is an example file name that uses most of the File Name Format options: PVE202G21S1Inspection
01N1234.bmp. This example does not include any custom strings or industrial protocol strings.

176 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Hold READY
During the image export operation the sensor's output channels might become full. This can occur if the sensor is
producing export data (images) faster than the data can be exported from the device (due to bandwidth limitations)
or faster than the client is reading the channel export data.
The Hold READY setting affects how the sensor behaves in this situation.
• Select the Hold READY checkbox to prevent new triggers from being accepted until the current image has
been exported. This ensures that all images are exported. In this case, the READY signal will remain inactive
(sensor is busy) until the new image has been added to the channel for export. Triggers might be missed
during this time.
• Clear the Hold READY checkbox to accept new triggers while the current image is exported. This causes
the sensor to discard the new image if the channel is full and activate the READY signal immediately after
the current inspection is complete. In this case, the discarded images will not be exported.

Important: When the checkbox is cleared, not all images will be exported. When the
checkbox is selected, the sensor will be busy (not ready) until the image has been
written to the network; inspection times will increase based on network throughput.
Result
Displays the image export result as well as the name of the file being exported.

Inspection images match the resolution of the camera and are 8-bits per pixel grayscale images in Windows BMP format that
represent all of the data in a full Field of View (FOV).

Field of View (FOV) Image Size (bytes) 11

2592 x 2048 5,309,494
1600 × 1200 1,921,078
1280 × 1024 1,311,798
752 × 480 362,038

The FTP Server Settings are empty by default. The settings must be set before you run an Image Export using FTP server.

IP Address
The IP address of the user's FTP server.
Port Number
The port number required to access the FTP server.
User Name
The user name required to access the FTP server.
Password
The user's password used to access the FTP server.
Folder Name
Enter a folder name to save the exported images to a specific user-created folder on the FTP server. If the Folder
Name field is:
• blank—images are saved to the root folder
• foldername1—images are saved in [foldername1 ] under the root folder
• foldername1/foldername2—images are saved in [foldername2 ] under the [foldername1 ] folder
Passive Mode
A connection mode defined by the official FTP protocol in which the client establishes the command channel and the
data channel. The server tells the client which port should be used for the data channel.

Connection Mode
Just in time—Select to connect to the FTP server each time an image is sent. This option limits network bandwidth.
Always connected—Select to keep the connection to the FTP server active at all times.
Status
Displays status messages regarding the FTP connection.

11 Windows BMP image. Image size is not fixed for JPEG images (if supported).

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 177

VE Series Smart Camera

13.1.6 Input String: TCP/IP

Input String is a way for the sensor to receive data from a TCP/IP Client.
The data received as an Input String is then an available result data item that can be added to the Data Export map. This can
be used to annotate result data with an identifier, to signify what inspection or part the results are from.
Navigate: System Settings > Communications > Input String.
On the Input String tab, set the parameters:

Input String
Enable the Input String so that the sensor can receive data over the defined Ethernet port.
Port Number
Set the port number to use for communication. The default is 32300.
Note that the port number cannot be the same as any other port in use.
String Header
The character array that defines the beginning of a valid string. Maximum size is 25 characters.
The header is optional.
To use non-printable ASCII characters, use the format \xYY where “YY” is the hexadecimal representation of any
ASCII character.
The default value for the Header is \x02.
String Footer
The character array that defines the end of a valid string. Maximum size is 25 characters.
The footer is required.
To use non-printable ASCII characters, use the format \xYY where “YY” is the hexadecimal representation of any
ASCII character.
The default value for the Header is \x03.
Use as a trigger source
Select the Use as a trigger source checkbox to use a valid input string to trigger the sensor.

Note: If Use as a trigger source is checked, valid input strings are ignored if the READY
signal is inactive.

The maximum size, including the header, content, and footer, is 50 bytes.

Examples
Example 1:
Header : none
Footer: End\x03
User supplied data: Banner EngineeringEnd\x03
Extracted String: Banner Engineering
Example 2:
Header : \x02Start
Footer: End\x03
User supplied data: \x02StartBanner EngineeringEnd\x03
Extracted String: Banner Engineering
Example 3:
Header : \x02
Footer: \x03
User supplied data: \x02Test\x02Banner Engineering\x03Test\x03
Extracted String: Banner Engineering

178 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

13.2 Enabling Communications

13.2.1 Setting Up Ethernet Communications

Configure the PC to communicate with the sensor using the following instructions.

13.2.2 Windows 7
1. On the Windows 7 12 PC, click the Start button, then on the Start menu, click Control Panel.
2. In Control Panel, click Network and Internet, then click Network and Sharing Center, and then click Change
adapter settings.
3. Right-click on the connection that you want to change, then click Properties.
If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, enter the password or provide confirmation.
4. In the connection properties, click Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4), and then click Properties.
Figure 323. Local Area Connection Properties Screen

5. In Internet Protocol (TCP/IPv4) Properties, select Use the following IP address.

6. Make sure that the IP address is 192.168.0.2, and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
Figure 324. Internet Protocol (TCP/IPv4) Properties Screen

13.2.3 Communications Channel Ports

The default Ethernet port setting for the communication channels is: Image Export—32200 and Data Export—32100.

12 Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 179

VE Series Smart Camera

14 Industrial Ethernet Overview

14.1 Industrial Ethernet Setup

14.1.1 Set the Industrial Ethernet Protocol (EtherNet/IP™, PROFINET®,

Modbus/TCP, PCCC)
The Industrial Ethernet communication channel is disabled by default.
To enable this channel, use the following instructions:
1. From the System Settings screen, click Communications, then click Industrial Protocols.
2. Select the desired protocol from the list.
• Disabled (default)
• EtherNet/IP
• PROFINET
• Modbus/TCP
• PCCC
Only one type of connection can be established at a time.
3. Select the desired 32 Bit Format from the list.
32 bit Format determines how 32 bit integers and floating point values are stored in sequential 16 bit registers (words)
—least significant word first (LSW-MSW) or most significant word first (MSW-LSW).

Word Value Word Value

0 LSW 0 MSW
OR
1 MSW 1 LSW

Note: To configure the tool-specific results, see:

• Tool-Specific Results: EtherNet/IP on p. 188
• Tool-Specific Results: Modbus/TCP on p. 209
• Tool-Specific Results: PCCC on p. 220
• Tool-Specific Results: PROFINET on p. 228

14.1.2 Set the Trigger Mode

Trigger the sensor using either the hardware trigger or through the Industrial Ethernet.
To only accept triggers generated through the Industrial Ethernet communication channel, set the trigger to Industrial
Ethernet.

Note: An Industrial Protocol must be enabled from System Settings > Communications > Industrial
Protocols before setting the trigger to Industrial Ethernet.

1. On the Sensor screen, click the Camera tool.

The Inputs tab displays.
2. On the Inputs tab, expand Trigger.
3. Select Industrial Ethernet from the Trigger Mode list.

14.2 Supported Functions

The VE Series camera is controlled over an Industrial Ethernet connection using the input and output data it makes available
over the protocol.
The following are examples of sensor functions that can be performed using input and output values:

180 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

• Product change
• Remote teach (Match and Barcode tools)
• Sensor trigger
• Read output indicators (pass/fail/ready/error)
• Read counters (pass, fail, error code, missed trigger, frame count, inspection time)
• FTP filename string
• Barcode Data Compare String

Note: If an input or an output register or a bit is marked as Reserved, its value at any time is
indeterminate.

14.2.1 Sensor Input Values

The VE Series camera operation can be controlled through input bits.
Table 6: Input Bits
The following commands can be executed only using bits.

Input Coil Bit Command Description

0 Product Change Execute a product change (the inspection number specified in the
"Product Change Number" 32-bit integer register)
1 Teach Latch Latch a teach bit; the Teach is executed on the next trigger
2 Trigger Causes the system to trigger an inspection if ready
6 Barcode Data Compare Input Moves a string of text from the "Input String" registers into the
String Barcode Data Compare Test so that decoded barcodes can be
compared to it
7 FTP Input String Moves a string of text from the "Input String" registers into the Image
Export function to use in the file name or watermark

14.2.2 Sensor Output Values

The following information can be obtained using output values:
• ACK bits (acknowledgement bits) for input commands, including error codes
• System indicators (Ready, Pass/Fail, Output signals, Execution Error, etc.)
◦ Ready Latch is a system indicator that is always set high as long as the VE is connected
◦ Missed Trigger is an error flag that is set high when a trigger is missed due to unfinished processing. This
remains active until a counter reset or reboot
• Inspection History (Iteration Count, Pass Count, Fail Count, etc.)
• Tool Pass/Fail Bits (Indications of whether each tool in the inspection passed or failed, individually)
See the section on protocols for more information.

ACK Bits
For each of the input bits there is a corresponding ACK bit. The vision sensor sets the ACK bit when the corresponding
action is complete. Input bits cause actions to occur on the low-to-high transition of that bit.

Important: You must clear the input bit after the corresponding ACK bit has been observed to be high.

As an example, to use the Trigger ACK bit, the programming steps for triggering an inspection are:
1. Wait for ready.
2. Set Trigger input bit to 1.
3. Wait for Trigger ACK to go to 1.
4. Set Trigger input bit to 0.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 181

VE Series Smart Camera

14.3 EtherNet/IP™
In this context, references to EtherNet/IP™ 14 refer specifically to EtherNet/IP transport class 1. Sometimes referred to as
cyclic EtherNet/IP IO data transfer or implicit messaging, this connection is meant to approximate a real-time data transfer to
and from the PLC and the target device.
Allen-Bradley's CompactLogix and ControlLogix family of PLCs uses this communication protocol. The programming
software used by these PLCs is RSLogix5000® or Studio 5000 Logix Designer™ 15.
The VE Series camera is controlled via EtherNet/IP using assembly objects. From the point of view of a PLC, there are three
input assemblies and two output assemblies.
The Originator of the EtherNet/IP connection is the PLC. The Target of the EtherNet/IP connection is the VE Series camera.
The direction of communication can be described as T > O or O > T (sometimes also shown as T2O or O2T).
The following rules apply for the use of input bit commands:
• Only one VE Series camera input bit can be set at a time
• Corresponding ACK bits are set high only on completion of the command (if the VE input bit is still high)
• Corresponding ACK bits are cleared when the VE input bit is cleared
• When multiple VE input bits are set simultaneously, the Execution Error input bit is set and an Error Code value is
reported in the Error Code register
• The Execution Error VE output bit is cleared when a new valid command is completed
• The Teach Error output bit is set when a Match tool Teach command runs but fails to learn a new Pattern, such as for
insufficient contrast. It clears on the next trigger

14 EtherNet/IP™ is a trademark of ODVA, Inc.

15 RSLogix5000® and Studio 5000 Logix Designer™ are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation.

182 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 325. Trigger—Modbus/TCP, EtherNet/IP, PCCC Figure 326. Trigger Timing Diagram

Start Trigger

RPI 0 1 X X +Y X +Y+Z
Write 0 to Input Bits
Register

Trigger
Make sure camera is ready – bit 0 is
set to 1 in Output Bits Register
Ready

Execute Trigger: set bit 2 of the Input

Bits Register to 1 TriggerACK

Set Set
Trigger = 1 Trigger = 0
No
Is Trigger ACK (bit 2 in
Input Bits ACK Register)
set to 1?
Verify : Verify :
TriggerACK = ‘1 ’ Ready = 1
Ready = 1
Yes TriggerACK = 0
Read Results TriggerACK = 0

Is Execution Error (Output Read error code. Correct

Bits Register bit 15) set to 1? Yes
the error condition X, Y, Z: Represent snapshots in time

No

Trigger Successful. Read values as

required

Done

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 183

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 327. TEACH—Modbus/TCP, EtherNet/IP, PCCC Figure 328. Teach Latch Timing Diagram

Teach Latch
Start

RPI 0 1 X X +Y X +Y+Z

Write 0 to Input Bits

Register Teach
Latch

Make sure camera is ready – bit 0 is Ready

set to 1 in Output Bits Register

Teach
Latch ACK
Execute Teach Latch: set bit 1 of the
Input Bits Register to 1
Set Set
TeachLatch = 1 TeachLatch = 0

No
Is Teach Latch (bit 1 in TeachLatch ACK
Verify : Verify :
Input Bits ACK Register) Ready = 1 = ‘1 ’ Ready = 1
set to 1? TeachLatch ACK =0 Teach will TeachLatchACK =0
execute on next
trigger

Yes
X, Y, Z: Represent snapshots in time

Is Execution Error (Output Read error code. Correct

Yes
Bits Register bit 15) set to 1? the error condition

No

Teach Latch successful. The next

valid trigger teaches camera the new
condition. After that trigger, examine
bit 1 in the Output Bits Register. If it
is set to 1, Teach was executed
successfully. If it is set to 0, Teach
was unsuccessful.

Done

184 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 329. Product Change—Modbus/TCP, EtherNet/IP, PCCC Figure 330. Product Change Timing Diagram

Start
Product Change

RPI 0 1 X X+Y X+Y+Z

Write 0 to Input Bits
Register

Product
Change
Write desired program number (as a
32-bit integer) into the Product
Change Number location
Ready

Make sure Camera is Ready – bit 0 Product

is set to 1 in Output Bits Register Change
ACK

Set Set
ProductChange ProductChange
Execute Product Change: set bit 0 of =1 =0
the Input Bits Register to 1

Verify : ProductChange Verify :

No Ready = 1 ACK = ‘1 ’ Ready = 1
Is Product Change ACK ProductChange New inspection ProductChange
(bit 0 in Input Bits ACK ACK = 0 is loaded ACK = 0
Register) set to 1?

Yes
X, Y, Z: Represent snapshots in time

Is Execution Error (Output Read error code. Correct

Yes
Bits Register bit 15) set to 1? the error condition

No

Product change successful

Done

14.3.1 Inputs to the Sensor (Outputs from the PLC)

PLC Assembly Instance 112 (0×70) - 6 Registers (Sensor Inputs/PLC Outputs)
O>T
Data transfer direction: Originator (PLC) to Target (VE). Assembly Instance 112 (0×70) is a small group of registers used for
basic control of the VE Series camera.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 185

VE Series Smart Camera

WORD # WORD NAME DATA TYPE

0 Input Bits Register (see Input and Output Bits on p. 188) 16-bit integer

1-2 Product Change Number 32-bit integer

3-5 reserved 16-bit integer

PLC Assembly Instance 117 (0×75) - 34 Registers (Sensor Inputs/PLC Outputs)

O>T
Data transfer direction: Originator (PLC) to Target (VE). Assembly Instance 117 (0×75) is a group of registers used for
sending input strings to the VE.
To use this Assembly Instance for FTP Filename control, the Industrial Protocol String checkbox must be selected. See
Image Export: FTP on p. 176.
To use this Assembly Instance for setting the Barcode Data Compare String, the Data Compare checkbox on the Test tab
must be selected. See Barcode Tool: Test Parameters on p. 147.
WORD # WORD NAME DATA TYPE

0 Input Bits Register (see Input and Output Bits on p. 188) 16-bit integer

1-2 Product Change Number 32-bit integer

3-4 reserved 16-bit integer

5 Input String Tool Index 16-bit integer

6-7 Input String Length 32-bit integer

8-33 Input String String (52 characters)

14.3.2 Outputs from the Sensor (Inputs to the PLC)

PLC Assembly Instance 100 (0×64) - 30 Registers (Sensor Outputs/PLC Inputs)
T>O
Data transfer direction: Target (VE) to Originator (PLC). Assembly Instance 100 (0×64) is a small block of registers providing
basic inspection results and 13 user-configurable registers for tool-specific results from the VE Series camera.
WORD # RESULT DATA TYPE

0 Input Bits ACK Register (see Input and Output Bits on p. 188) 16-bit integer

1 Output Bits Register (see Input and Output Bits on p. 188) 16-bit integer

2-3 Error Code 32-bit integer

4-5 Inspection Number 32-bit integer

6-7 Frame Count 32-bit integer

8-9 Pass Count 32-bit integer

10-11 Fail Count 32-bit integer

12-13 Missed Triggers 32-bit integer

14-15 Current Inspection Time 32-bit float

16 Tool Pass/Fail Bits (see Tool Pass/Fail Bits on p. 188) 16-bit integer

17-29 User-defined (see Tool-Specific Results: EtherNet/IP on p. 188) Selection dependent

186 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

PLC Assembly Instance 101 (0×65) - 240 Registers (Sensor Outputs/PLC

Inputs) T > O
Data transfer direction: Target (VE) to Originator (PLC). Assembly Instance 101 (0×65) is a large block of registers that
provides both basic inspection results and 223 user-configurable registers for tool-specific results.
WORD # WORD NAME DATA TYPE

0 Input Bits ACK Register (see Input and Output Bits on p. 188) 16-bit integer

1 Output Bits Register (see Input and Output Bits on p. 188) 16-bit integer

2-3 Error Code 32-bit integer

4-5 Inspection Number 32-bit integer

6-7 Frame Count 32-bit integer

8-9 Pass Count 32-bit integer

10-11 Fail Count 32-bit integer

12-13 Missed Triggers 32-bit integer

14-15 Current Inspection Time 32-bit float

16 Tool Pass/Fail Bits (see Tool Pass/Fail Bits on p. 188) 16-bit integer

17-239 User-defined (see Tool-Specific Results: EtherNet/IP on p. 188) Selection dependent

PLC Assembly Instance 102 (0×66) - 60 Registers (Sensor Outputs/PLC Inputs)

T>O
Data transfer direction: Target (VE) to Originator (PLC). Assembly Instance 102 (0×66) is a large block of registers that
provides both basic inspection results and 43 user-configurable registers for tool-specific results.
WORD # WORD NAME DATA TYPE

0 Input Bits ACK Register (see Input and Output Bits on p. 188) 16-bit integer

1 Output Bits Register (see Input and Output Bits on p. 188) 16-bit integer

2-3 Error Code 32-bit integer

4-5 Inspection Number 32-bit integer

6-7 Frame Count 32-bit integer

8-9 Pass Count 32-bit integer

10-11 Fail Count 32-bit integer

12-13 Missed Triggers 32-bit integer

14-15 Current Inspection Time 32-bit float

16 Tool Pass/Fail Bits (see Tool Pass/Fail Bits on p. 188) 16-bit integer

17-59 User-defined (see Tool-Specific Results: EtherNet/IP on p. 188) Selection dependent

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 187

 VE Series Smart Camera

14.3.3 Input and Output Bits

Writeable Input Bits are inputs to the VE Series camera (outputs from the PLC or HMI). They are used for basic control of the
VE Series camera.
Table 7: Input Bits Register (Command Bits)

Bit Position

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Barcode
Data
FTP Input Teach Product
reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved Compare reserved reserved reserved Trigger
String Latch Change
Input
String

Read-only Input ACK Bits are outputs from the VE Series camera (inputs to the PLC or HMI). They are used to acknowledge
each of the input bits sent from the PLC. For example, if the PLC changes the Trigger bit (from Input Bits, in the preceding
table) from a 0 to a 1, the VE Series camera changes the Trigger ACK bit from a 0 to a 1 in response.
Table 8: Input Bits ACK Register (ACK Bits)

Bit Position

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Barcode
Data
FTP Input Teach Product
Compare Trigger
reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved String reserved reserved reserved Latch Change
Input ACK
ACK ACK ACK
String
ACK

Read-only Status Bits are outputs from the VE Series camera (inputs to the PLC or HMI). They are used to report the basic
status of the VE Series camera and the last inspection run.
Table 9: Output Bits Register (Sensor Status Bits)

Bit Position

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Execution System Teach Missed Ready

reserved reserved Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1 reserved reserved Pass/Fail Ready
Error Error Error Trigger Latch

14.3.4 Tool Pass/Fail Bits

For the Tool pass/fail bits, pass = 1 and fail = 0.
Table 10: Tool Pass/Fail Bits

Bit Position

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Camera
Tool 15 Tool 14 Tool 13 Tool 12 Tool 11 Tool 10 Tool 9 Tool 8 Tool 7 Tool 6 Tool 5 Tool 4 Tool 3 Tool 2 Tool 1 Tool
Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

14.3.5 Tool-Specific Results: EtherNet/IP

Configure the VE to output user-defined, tool-specific results to the PLC using a custom map.
Each assembly instance includes system-defined and user-defined results in the map. To set the user-defined, tool-specific
results in the custom map, navigate: System Settings > Communications > Industrial Protocols.

188 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 331. Industrial Protocols Tab—EtherNet/IP

The results are configurable only for the current inspection. However, all user-defined results in the custom map are shown
on the Industrial Protocols tab whether or not they are included in the current inspection. To make changes to a different
inspection, switch to the desired inspection and then make changes to the custom map. Updating the map does not
disconnect the sensor from the PLC.
To configure the map:

1. Click to add a new line to the map.

2. Set the Word/Register/Byte, Tool Name, and Result. See the following descriptions for more information.
3. Click Apply Changes to send the current map to the camera.

Important: Click Apply Changes or all user-defined data is lost when you click away from the
Industrial Protocols tab.

4. Click to print and save a PDF of the current map. The PDF includes all data, whether system-defined or user-
defined.
5. To return the map to the default settings, click . All user-defined output data is deleted.
Column descriptions:

WORD #
The data location.
Inspection #
Shows whether this tool result applies to the current inspection only (inspection number) or to any inspection (ANY)
that includes the selected tool.
An Inspection # of ANY means that if an inspection includes a tool with the exact name (for example,
AverageGray01), the results are output. If an inspection does not have a tool with the exact name (for example
AverageGrayAssemblyLine01), no results are output for that tool and that inspection.
Tool Type
Displays a graphic that represents the type of tool selected in the Tool Name column.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 189

VE Series Smart Camera

Tool Name
Select the desired Tool Name from the list. The list includes the tools available in the current inspection only. Select
a different inspection from the inspection list, if necessary.
Result
The information to output.
Data Type
The type of information to output.
Actions

Click to delete a result. You cannot delete system-defined results that contain the symbol.

14.3.6 Configuration Assembly Object

The VE Series camera EtherNet/IP implementation does not support an assembly object Configuration instance. However,
one is required for the creation of implicit Class 1 connections on a ControlLogix® 21 family PLC. Therefore, a configuration
instance is defined as instance number 128 (0×80). Its size is zero.

14.3.7 Data Formats

The VE Series camera EtherNet/IP implementation supports 32-bit integers in LSW_MSW data format (default) or
MSW_LSW data format. The LSW_MSW data format is such that the least significant word is stored first, then the most
significant word. This format is used for Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLCs.
The string format is compatible with the Allen-Bradley ControlLogix built-in string data type. This format is a 32 bit (DINT)
length followed by character bytes (SINT). This results in the following string format as viewed from the VE Series camera:
0 1 2 3 4
Word Length Length
byte 1 byte 0 byte 3 byte 2 byte 5 byte 4 ... ...
LSW MSW

14.3.8 Minimum Requested Packet Interval (RPI) Value

The VE Series camera can operate with input and output Requested Packet Intervals (RPIs) as low as 50 milliseconds. The
device may not operate reliably if a lower RPI value is selected.

14.3.9 VE Series Smart Camera EDS File Installation in ControlLogix

Software
Use the EDS Hardware Installation Tool to register the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file.
1. On the Tools menu, click EDS Hardware Installation Tool.
The Rockwell Automation's EDS Wizard dialog displays.
Figure 332. Tools—EDS Hardware Installation Tool

21 ControlLogix® is a trademark of Rockwell Automation, Inc.

190 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

2. Click Next.
3. Select the Register an EDS file(s) option.
Figure 333. Rockwell Automation's EDS Wizard—Options

4. Browse to locate the EDS file and click Next.

If Vision Manager is installed on the computer, a copy of the EDS file is available at C:\Users\Public\Documents
\Banner Vision Manager\VE Series\Industrial Protocols\EthernetIP.
Figure 334. Select File to Register

5. Click Next to register the tested file.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 191

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 335. Register the Tested File

6. Click Next when you see the icon associated with the EDS file.
Figure 336. Rockwell Automation's EDS Wizard

7. Click Next to register the EDS file.

192 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 337. Register the EDS File

8. Click Finish to close the EDS Wizard .

9. Right-click on the PLC's Ethernet adapter and select New Module...
Figure 338. New Module

10. Locate the device in the catalog and click Create.

Figure 339. Select Module Type

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 193

VE Series Smart Camera

11. Enter a name, description (optional), and IP address for the device.
Figure 340. New Module

12. Click Change in the Module Definition field.

Figure 341. Module Definition

13. Select the desired connection in the Module Definition window. Each of the items in the Name list represents a fixed
grouping of input and output assembly instances:

Small T20 (100) • O>T PLC/Sensor Assembly 112 (0×70)

• T>O PLC/Sensor Assembly 100 (0×64)
Medium T20 (102) • O>T PLC/Sensor Assembly 112 (0×70)
• T>O PLC/Sensor Assembly 102 (0×66)
Large T20 (101) • O>T PLC/Sensor Assembly 112 (0×70)
• T>O PLC/Sensor Assembly 101 (0×65)
String + Small T20 (100) • O>T PLC/Sensor Assembly 117 (0×75)
• T>O PLC/Sensor Assembly 100 (0×64)

194 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

String + Medium T20 (102) • O>T PLC/Sensor Assembly 117 (0×75)

• T>O PLC/Sensor Assembly 102 (0×66)
String + Large T20 (101) • O>T PLC/Sensor Assembly 117 (0×75)
• T>O PLC/Sensor Assembly 101 (0×65)
14. Select INT as the data type.
Figure 342. Module Definition—Data Type

15. Click OK twice and download the program to the PLC.

Figure 343. Download to the PLC

The connection looks like the one in Figure 343 on p. 195.

14.3.10 RSLogix5000 Configuration

To create an implicit Class 1 configuration to the VE Series camera using EtherNet/IP when using a ControlLogix family PLC,
configure the VE as a “Generic Ethernet Module” under the ENET_MODULE. The following is a sample setup of a Banner
device:
1. Add a generic Ethernet module to the PLC's Ethernet card.
a. Click New Module.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 195

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 344. Add Ethernet Module

b. Click Communications, then Generic Ethernet Module.

196 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 345. Select Module

2. Configure the Module Properties.

Note: The data type in the Comm Format must be changed to an INT.

See Inputs to the Sensor (Outputs from the PLC) on p. 185 and Outputs from the Sensor (Inputs to the PLC) on p.
186 for more information on each specific assembly instance.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 197

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 346. Example: PLC Input Assembly Instance 0×64 (100), PLC Output Assembly Instance 0×70 (112)

Figure 347. Example: PLC Input Assembly Instance 0×65 (101), PLC Output Assembly Instance 0×71 (113)

198 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 348. PLC Input Assembly (102), PLC Output Assembly (114)

Figure 349. Select or clear the Unicast Connection checkbox as desired

Note: The minimum allowed RPI is 50 ms.

3. If the module configuration was successful, the following information displays:

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 199

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 350. Successful Configuration

If the module configuration was not successful, the RSLogix 5000 software will indicate errors similar to the following
figures:
Figure 351. ERROR: Assembly Instance Number and/or Size Incorrect

Figure 352. ERROR: VE Series camera Not Powered Up or Ethernet Cable Not Attached

4. Locate the memory map setup from the Banner module to the PLC memory map.

200 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 353. Memory Map

C = Configuration (not used)

I = Inputs to PLC (outputs from the device)
O = Outputs from PLC (inputs to the device)

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 201

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 354. Memory Map Expanded

The VE Series camera memory map expanded. I = Inputs to PLC (outputs from the device).

14.4 Modbus/TCP
The Modbus/TCP protocol provides device information using register and coil banks defined by the slave device. This section
defines the register and coil banks. By specification, Modbus/TCP uses TCP port 502.
The Modbus/TCP remote unit identifier is used with Modbus/TCP devices that are composites of several Modbus devices.
For example, on Modbus/TCP to Modbus RTU gateways. In this case, the unit identifier tells the Slave Address of the device
behind the gateway. Most Modbus/TCP Clients use a Unit ID of 1 or higher. If a Client with a Unit ID of 0 is used, in Vision
Manager go to System Settings > Communications > Industrial Protocols and select the Support Modbus Unit ID 0
checkbox to allow this connection.
The following registers are used to send values back and forth from the vision sensor to the PLC. VE Series camera read-
only output data can be read as Input Registers (30000) using Modbus function code 04 (Read Input Registers). Because
some devices like the Modicon family of PLCs cannot access data using the 30000 range of registers, the same values can
also be seen as Holding Registers (40000) using Modbus function code 03 (Read Holding Registers).
The Input Bits can be set as Coils using Modbus function code 05 (Force Single Coil). The state of the Input ACK Bits and
Status Bits can be read as Inputs (10000) using Modbus function code 02 (Read Input Status).
Modbus Function Codes Supported
01: Read Coil Status
02: Read Input Status
03: Read Holding Registers
04: Read Input Registers
05: Force Single Coil

202 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

06: Preset Single Register

07: Read Exception Status
16: Preset Multiple Registers
Table 11: Input Bits (Coils 00001-00016)

05: Force Single Coil

Register Bit Position WORD Name

00001 0 Product Change

00002 1 Teach Latch

00003 2 Trigger

00004 3 reserved

00005 4 reserved

00006 5 reserved

00007 6 Barcode Data Compare Input String

00008 7 FTP Input String

00009 8 reserved

00010 9 reserved

00011 10 reserved

00012 11 reserved

00013 12 reserved

00014 13 reserved

00015 14 reserved

00016 15 reserved

Table 12: Input ACK Bits (Inputs 10001-10016)

02: Read Input Status

Register Bit Position WORD Name

10001 0 Product Change ACK

10002 1 Teach Latch ACK

10003 2 Trigger ACK

10004 3 reserved

10005 4 reserved

10006 5 reserved

10007 6 Barcode Data Compare Input String ACK

10008 7 FTP Input String ACK

10009 8 reserved

10010 9 reserved

10011 10 reserved

10012 11 reserved

10013 12 reserved

10014 13 reserved

10015 14 reserved

10016 15 reserved

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 203

VE Series Smart Camera

Table 13: Status Bits (Inputs 10017-10032)

02: Read Input Status

Register Bit Position WORD Name

10017 0 Ready

10018 1 Pass/Fail

10019 2 reserved

10020 3 Ready Latch

10021 4 reserved

10022 5 Output 1

10023 6 Output 2

10024 7 Output 3

10025 8 Output 4

10026 9 Output 5

10027 10 reserved

10028 11 reserved

10029 12 Missed Trigger

10030 13 Teach Error

10031 14 System Error

10032 15 Execution Error

The following rules apply for the use of input bit commands:
• Only one VE Series camera input bit can be set at a time
• Corresponding ACK bits are set high only on completion of the command (if the VE input bit is still high)
• Corresponding ACK bits are cleared when the VE input bit is cleared
• When multiple VE input bits are set simultaneously, the Execution Error input bit is set and an Error Code value is
reported in the Error Code register
• The Execution Error VE output bit is cleared when a new valid command is completed
• The Teach Error output bit is set when a Match tool Teach command runs but fails to learn a new Pattern, such as for
insufficient contrast. It clears on the next trigger

204 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 355. Trigger—Modbus/TCP, EtherNet/IP, PCCC Figure 356. Trigger Timing Diagram

Start Trigger

RPI 0 1 X X +Y X +Y+Z
Write 0 to Input Bits
Register

Trigger
Make sure camera is ready – bit 0 is
set to 1 in Output Bits Register
Ready

Execute Trigger: set bit 2 of the Input

Bits Register to 1 TriggerACK

Set Set
Trigger = 1 Trigger = 0
No
Is Trigger ACK (bit 2 in
Input Bits ACK Register)
set to 1?
Verify : Verify :
TriggerACK = ‘1 ’ Ready = 1
Ready = 1
Yes TriggerACK = 0
Read Results TriggerACK = 0

Is Execution Error (Output Read error code. Correct

Bits Register bit 15) set to 1? Yes
the error condition X, Y, Z: Represent snapshots in time

No

Trigger Successful. Read values as

required

Done

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 205

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 357. TEACH—Modbus/TCP, EtherNet/IP, PCCC Figure 358. Teach Latch Timing Diagram

Teach Latch
Start

RPI 0 1 X X +Y X +Y+Z

Write 0 to Input Bits

Register Teach
Latch

Make sure camera is ready – bit 0 is Ready

set to 1 in Output Bits Register

Teach
Latch ACK
Execute Teach Latch: set bit 1 of the
Input Bits Register to 1
Set Set
TeachLatch = 1 TeachLatch = 0

No
Is Teach Latch (bit 1 in TeachLatch ACK
Verify : Verify :
Input Bits ACK Register) Ready = 1 = ‘1 ’ Ready = 1
set to 1? TeachLatch ACK =0 Teach will TeachLatchACK =0
execute on next
trigger

Yes
X, Y, Z: Represent snapshots in time

Is Execution Error (Output Read error code. Correct

Yes
Bits Register bit 15) set to 1? the error condition

No

Teach Latch successful. The next

valid trigger teaches camera the new
condition. After that trigger, examine
bit 1 in the Output Bits Register. If it
is set to 1, Teach was executed
successfully. If it is set to 0, Teach
was unsuccessful.

Done

206 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 359. Product Change—Modbus/TCP, EtherNet/IP, PCCC Figure 360. Product Change Timing Diagram

Start
Product Change

RPI 0 1 X X+Y X+Y+Z

Write 0 to Input Bits
Register

Product
Change
Write desired program number (as a
32-bit integer) into the Product
Change Number location
Ready

Make sure Camera is Ready – bit 0 Product

is set to 1 in Output Bits Register Change
ACK

Set Set
ProductChange ProductChange
Execute Product Change: set bit 0 of =1 =0
the Input Bits Register to 1

Verify : ProductChange Verify :

No Ready = 1 ACK = ‘1 ’ Ready = 1
Is Product Change ACK ProductChange New inspection ProductChange
(bit 0 in Input Bits ACK ACK = 0 is loaded ACK = 0
Register) set to 1?

Yes
X, Y, Z: Represent snapshots in time

Is Execution Error (Output Read error code. Correct

Yes
Bits Register bit 15) set to 1? the error condition

No

Product change successful

Done

14.4.1 Sensor Input Values

Holding Registers (40000) are used by the PLC or HMI to write values to the VE Series camera. To write, use function codes
6 (Preset Single Register) or 16 (Preset Multiple Registers).
To use these Input Values for FTP Filename control, the Industrial Protocol String checkbox must be selected. See Image
Export: FTP on p. 176.
To use these Input Values for setting the Barcode Data Compare String, the Data Compare checkbox on the Test tab must
be selected. See Barcode Tool: Test Parameters on p. 147.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 207

 VE Series Smart Camera

Table 14: VE Input Values (Modbus/TCP Holding Registers)

06: Preset Single Register or 16: Preset Multiple Registers

REG # WORD NAME DATA TYPE

1 Input Bits (See Input and Output Bits on p. 16-bit integer

208 and Coils 00001-16)

2-3 Product Change Number 32-bit integer

4-5 reserved 16-bit integer

6 Input String Tool Index 16-bit integer

7-8 Input String Length 32-bit integer

9-34 Input String String (52 characters)

35-500 reserved 16-bit integer

14.4.2 VE Series camera Output Values

The VE Series camera sends output data to the PLC or HMI via a bank of Input Registers (30000). Some devices, like the
Modicon family of PLCs, cannot access data using the 30000 range of register addresses. For these devices, the VE output
data is also made available as Holding Registers (40000). To access this data, use either function code 04 (Read Input
Registers) or function code 03 (Read Holding Registers).
Table 15: VE Series camera Output Values (Modbus/TCP Input or Holding Registers)

04: Read Input Registers or 03: Read Holding Registers

Input REG # Holding REG # WORD NAME DATA TYPE

1 1001 Input ACK Bits (see Input and Output Bits on p. 208, 16-bit integer
and also Inputs 10001-16)

2 1002 Status Bits (see Input and Output Bits on p. 208, and 16-bit integer
also Inputs 10017-32)

3-4 1003-4 Error Code 32-bit integer

5-6 1005-6 Inspection Number 32-bit integer

7-8 1007-8 Iteration Count 32-bit integer

9-10 1009-10 Pass Count 32-bit integer

11-12 1011-12 Fail Count 32-bit integer

13-14 1013-14 Missed Triggers 32-bit integer

15-16 1015-16 Current Inspection Time Float

17 1017 Tool Pass/Fail Bits (see Tool Pass/Fail Bits on p. 16-bit integer
188)

18-500 1018-500 User-defined (see Tool-Specific Results: 16-bit integer

Modbus/TCP on p. 209

14.4.3 Input and Output Bits

Writeable Input Bits are inputs to the VE Series camera (outputs from the PLC or HMI). They are used for basic control of
the VE Series camera. They are accessible using function code 6 (Preset Single Register). The same control is also possible
using Coils 00001-16, function code 05 (Force Single Coil).
Table 16: Input Bits: PLC Holding Register 1, also Coils 00001-16

Coil 16 Coil 15 Coil 14 Coil 13 Coil 12 Coil 11 Coil 10 Coil 9 Coil 8 Coil 7 Coil 6 Coil 5 Coil 4 Coil 3 Coil 2 Coil 1

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

208 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved FTP Input Barcode reserved reserved reserved Trigger Teach Product
String Data Latch Change
Compare
Input
String

Read-only Input ACK Bits are outputs from the VE Series camera (inputs to the PLC or HMI). They are used to
acknowledge each of the input bits sent from the PLC. For example, if the PLC changes the Trigger bit (from Input Bits,
above) from a 0 to a 1, the VE changes the Trigger ACK bit from a 0 to a 1 in response. This information is available as Input
Registers or Holding Registers. Use either function code 04 (Read Input Registers) or function code 03 (Read Holding
Registers). The same data can also be read from Inputs (10000) using Modbus function code 02 (Read Input Status).
Table 17: Input ACK Bits: PLC Input Register 1 or Holding Register 1001, also Inputs 10001-16

Input 16 Input 15 Input 14 Input 13 Input 12 Input 11 Input 10 Input 9 Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved FTP Input Barcode reserved reserved reserved Trigger Teach Product
String Data ACK Latch Change
ACK Compare ACK ACK
Input
String
ACK

Read-only Status Bits are outputs from the VE Series camera (inputs to the PLC or HMI). They are used to report the basic
status of the VE Series camera and the last inspection run. This information is available as Input Registers or Holding
Registers. Use either function code 04 (Read Input Registers) or function code 03 (Read Holding Registers). The same data
can also be read from Inputs (10000) using Modbus function code 02 (Read Input Status).
Table 18: Status Bits: PLC Input Register 2 or Holding Register 1002, also Inputs 10017-32

Input 32 Input 31 Input 30 Input 29 Input 28 Input 27 Input 26 Input 25 Input 24 Input 23 Input 22 Input 21 Input 20 Input 19 Input 18 Input 17

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Execution System Teach Missed reserved reserved Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1 reserved Ready reserved Pass/Fail Ready
Error Error Error Trigger Latch

14.4.4 Tool Pass/Fail Bits

For the Tool pass/fail bits, pass = 1 and fail = 0.
Table 19: Tool Pass/Fail Bits

Bit Position

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Camera
Tool 15 Tool 14 Tool 13 Tool 12 Tool 11 Tool 10 Tool 9 Tool 8 Tool 7 Tool 6 Tool 5 Tool 4 Tool 3 Tool 2 Tool 1 Tool
Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

14.4.5 Tool-Specific Results: Modbus/TCP

Configure the VE to output user-defined, tool-specific results to the PLC using a custom map.
The sensor output values (Modbus/TCP Input or Holding Registers) include both system-defined and user-defined results in
the map. To set the user-defined, tool-specific results in the custom map, navigate: System Settings > Communications >
Industrial Protocols.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 209

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 361. Industrial Protocols Tab—Modbus/TCP

The results are configurable only for the current inspection. However, all user-defined results in the custom map are shown
on the Industrial Protocols tab whether or not they are included in the current inspection. To make changes to a different
inspection, switch to the desired inspection and then make changes to the custom map. Updating the map does not
disconnect the sensor from the PLC.
To configure the map:

1. Click to add a new line to the map.

2. Set the Word/Register/Byte, Tool Name, and Result. See the following descriptions for more information.
3. Click Apply Changes to send the current map to the camera.

Important: Click Apply Changes or all user-defined data is lost when you click away from the
Industrial Protocols tab.

4. Click to print and save a PDF of the current map. The PDF includes all data, whether system-defined or user-
defined.
5. To return the map to the default settings, click . All user-defined output data is deleted.
Column descriptions:

REG #
The data location.
Inspection #
Shows whether this tool result applies to the current inspection only (inspection number) or to any inspection (ANY)
that includes the selected tool.
An Inspection # of ANY means that if an inspection includes a tool with the exact name (for example,
AverageGray01), the results are output. If an inspection does not have a tool with the exact name (for example
AverageGrayAssemblyLine01), no results are output for that tool and that inspection.
Tool Type
Displays a graphic that represents the type of tool selected in the Tool Name column.

210 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Tool Name
Select the desired Tool Name from the list. The list includes the tools available in the current inspection only. Select
a different inspection from the inspection list, if necessary.
Result
The information to output.
Data Type
The type of information to output.
Actions

Click to delete a result. You cannot delete system-defined results that contain the symbol.

14.5 PLC5, SLC500, and MicroLogix (PCCC)

Allen-Bradley’s PLC5, SLC 500, and MicroLogix family of devices uses PCCC communications protocol.
PCCC is also known as EtherNet/IP transport class 3 and uses explicit Read and Write message commands, or EIP
messaging, placed into the ladder logic program, to interface with the VE Series camera.
These PLCs do not support cyclic EtherNet/IP IO data transfer (referred to as EtherNet/IP in this manual). The programming
software used by these PLCs is RSLogix 5 (PLC5) or RSLogix 500 (SLC500 and MicroLogix series).
The VE Series camera supports these PLCs using input and output register arrays.
The Output bits, ACK bits and Input bits bit definitions are the same as defined in the I/O Assembly Objects section. The
terms “Input” and “Output” are from the point of view of the PLC.
The following rules apply for the use of input bit commands:
• Only one VE Series camera input bit can be set at a time
• Corresponding ACK bits are set high only on completion of the command (if the VE input bit is still high)
• Corresponding ACK bits are cleared when the VE input bit is cleared
• When multiple VE input bits are set simultaneously, the Execution Error input bit is set and an Error Code value is
reported in the Error Code register
• The Execution Error VE output bit is cleared when a new valid command is completed
• The Teach Error output bit is set when a Match tool Teach command runs but fails to learn a new Pattern, such as for
insufficient contrast. It clears on the next trigger

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 211

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 362. Trigger—Modbus/TCP, EtherNet/IP, PCCC Figure 363. Trigger Timing Diagram

Start Trigger

RPI 0 1 X X +Y X +Y+Z
Write 0 to Input Bits
Register

Trigger
Make sure camera is ready – bit 0 is
set to 1 in Output Bits Register
Ready

Execute Trigger: set bit 2 of the Input

Bits Register to 1 TriggerACK

Set Set
Trigger = 1 Trigger = 0
No
Is Trigger ACK (bit 2 in
Input Bits ACK Register)
set to 1?
Verify : Verify :
TriggerACK = ‘1 ’ Ready = 1
Ready = 1
Yes TriggerACK = 0
Read Results TriggerACK = 0

Is Execution Error (Output Read error code. Correct

Bits Register bit 15) set to 1? Yes
the error condition X, Y, Z: Represent snapshots in time

No

Trigger Successful. Read values as

required

Done

212 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 364. TEACH—Modbus/TCP, EtherNet/IP, PCCC Figure 365. Teach Latch Timing Diagram

Teach Latch
Start

RPI 0 1 X X +Y X +Y+Z

Write 0 to Input Bits

Register Teach
Latch

Make sure camera is ready – bit 0 is Ready

set to 1 in Output Bits Register

Teach
Latch ACK
Execute Teach Latch: set bit 1 of the
Input Bits Register to 1
Set Set
TeachLatch = 1 TeachLatch = 0

No
Is Teach Latch (bit 1 in TeachLatch ACK
Verify : Verify :
Input Bits ACK Register) Ready = 1 = ‘1 ’ Ready = 1
set to 1? TeachLatch ACK =0 Teach will TeachLatchACK =0
execute on next
trigger

Yes
X, Y, Z: Represent snapshots in time

Is Execution Error (Output Read error code. Correct

Yes
Bits Register bit 15) set to 1? the error condition

No

Teach Latch successful. The next

valid trigger teaches camera the new
condition. After that trigger, examine
bit 1 in the Output Bits Register. If it
is set to 1, Teach was executed
successfully. If it is set to 0, Teach
was unsuccessful.

Done

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 213

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 366. Product Change—Modbus/TCP, EtherNet/IP, PCCC Figure 367. Product Change Timing Diagram

Start
Product Change

RPI 0 1 X X+Y X+Y+Z

Write 0 to Input Bits
Register

Product
Change
Write desired program number (as a
32-bit integer) into the Product
Change Number location
Ready

Make sure Camera is Ready – bit 0 Product

is set to 1 in Output Bits Register Change
ACK

Set Set
ProductChange ProductChange
Execute Product Change: set bit 0 of =1 =0
the Input Bits Register to 1

Verify : ProductChange Verify :

No Ready = 1 ACK = ‘1 ’ Ready = 1
Is Product Change ACK ProductChange New inspection ProductChange
(bit 0 in Input Bits ACK ACK = 0 is loaded ACK = 0
Register) set to 1?

Yes
X, Y, Z: Represent snapshots in time

Is Execution Error (Output Read error code. Correct

Yes
Bits Register bit 15) set to 1? the error condition

No

Product change successful

Done

14.5.1 Configuration
The following images represent a typical configuration.

214 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

PLC Read Message Command

Figure 368. General tab: Example message command reading from N7 table on the VE and sending the data to the N7 table on the PLC

This Controller
Communications Command = PLC5 Read
Data Table Address = Integer table "Nx"
Target Device
Data Table Address = N7:x

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 215

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 369. MultiHop tab: IP Address of the VE is entered here

To Address = IP address of the VE

216 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

PLC Write Message Command

Figure 370. General tab: Example message command writing to N14 table on the VE from the N14 table of the PLC

This Controller
Communications Command = PLC5 Write
Data Table Address = Integer table "Nx"
Target Device
Data Table Address = N14:x

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 217

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 371. MultiHop tab: IP address of the VE is entered here

To Address = IP address of the VE

14.5.2 Inputs to the Sensor (Outputs from the PLC)

The registers below are used by the PLC to push values to the VE Series camera. MSG (message) commands are used to
write (N14) to the sensor.
Table 20: PCCC PLC Output Registers (Sensor Inputs, N14 Table on the Sensor)

WORD # WORD NAME DATA TYPE

0 Input Bits Register (see Input and Output Bits on p. 219) 16-bit integer

1-2 Product Change Number 32-bit integer

3-4 reserved 16-bit Integer

5 Input String Tool Index 16-bit Integer

6-7 Input String Length 32-bit Integer

8-33 Input String String (52 characters)

34-499 reserved 32-bit integer

14.5.3 Outputs from the Sensor (Inputs to the PLC)

The registers below are used to send output values from the VE Series camera to the PLC. MSG (message) commands are
used to read (N7) from the sensor.
Table 21: PCCC PLC Input Registers (Sensor Outputs, N7 Table on the Sensor)

WORD # WORD NAME DATA TYPE

0 Input Bits ACK Register (see Input and Output Bits on p. 219) 16-bit integer

1 Output Bits Register (see Input and Output Bits on p. 219) 16-bit integer

2-3 Error Code 32-bit integer

4-5 Inspection Number 32-bit integer

218 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

WORD # WORD NAME DATA TYPE

6-7 Iteration Count 32-bit integer

8-9 Pass Count 32-bit integer

10-11 Fail Count 32-bit integer

12-13 Missed Triggers 32-bit integer

14-15 Current Inspection Time Float

16 Tool Pass/Fail Bits (see Tool Pass/Fail Bits on p. 188) 16-bit integer

17-499 User-defined (see Tool-Specific Results: PCCC on p. 220) 16-bit integer

14.5.4 Input and Output Bits

The Input Bits are used to command execution of basic functions. The Output Bits are used to push single bit outputs from
the VE Series camera to the PLC. The 32 bits of VE Series camera output can also be accessed using the bits of the first two
Output Registers (Input Bits ACK Register(word 0) and Output Bits Register (word1)).
Table 22: Input Bits Register (Command Bits)

Bit Position

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Barcode
Data
FTP Input Teach Product
reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved Compare reserved reserved reserved Trigger
String Latch Change
Input
String

Table 23: Input Bits ACK Register (ACK Bits)

Bit Position

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved FTP Input Barcode reserved reserved reserved Trigger Teach Product
String Data ACK Latch Change
ACK Compare ACK ACK
Input
String
ACK

Table 24: Output Bits Register (Sensor Status Bits)

Bit Position

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Execution System Teach Missed reserved reserved Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1 reserved Ready reserved Pass/Fail Ready
Error Error Error Trigger Latch

14.5.5 Tool Pass/Fail Bits

For the Tool pass/fail bits, pass = 1 and fail = 0.
Table 25: Tool Pass/Fail Bits

Bit Position

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Vision Camera
Tool 15 Tool 14 Tool 13 Tool 12 Tool 11 Tool 10 Tool 9 Tool 8 Tool 7 Tool 6 Tool 5 Tool 4 Tool 3 Tool 2 Tool 1 Tool
Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 219

VE Series Smart Camera

14.5.6 Tool-Specific Results: PCCC

Configure the VE to output user-defined, tool-specific results to the PLC using a custom map.
The output submodule includes both system-defined and user-defined results in the map. To set the user-defined, tool-
specific results in the custom map, navigate: System Settings > Communications > Industrial Protocols.
Figure 372. Industrial Protocols Tab—PCCC

The results are configurable only for the current inspection. However, all user-defined results in the custom map are shown
on the Industrial Protocols tab whether or not they are included in the current inspection. To make changes to a different
inspection, switch to the desired inspection and then make changes to the custom map. Updating the map does not
disconnect the sensor from the PLC.
To configure the map:

1. Click to add a new line to the map.

2. Set the Word/Register/Byte, Tool Name, and Result. See the following descriptions for more information.
3. Click Apply Changes to send the current map to the camera.

Important: Click Apply Changes or all user-defined data is lost when you click away from the
Industrial Protocols tab.

4. Click to print and save a PDF of the current map. The PDF includes all data, whether system-defined or user-
defined.
5. To return the map to the default settings, click . All user-defined output data is deleted.
Column descriptions:

WORD #
The data location.

220 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Inspection #
Shows whether this tool result applies to the current inspection only (inspection number) or to any inspection (ANY)
that includes the selected tool.
An Inspection # of ANY means that if an inspection includes a tool with the exact name (for example,
AverageGray01), the results are output. If an inspection does not have a tool with the exact name (for example
AverageGrayAssemblyLine01), no results are output for that tool and that inspection.
Tool Type
Displays a graphic that represents the type of tool selected in the Tool Name column.
Tool Name
Select the desired Tool Name from the list. The list includes the tools available in the current inspection only. Select
a different inspection from the inspection list, if necessary.
Result
The information to output.
Data Type
The type of information to output.
Actions

Click to delete a result. You cannot delete system-defined results that contain the symbol.

14.6 PROFINET®
PROFINET® 27 is a data communication protocol for industrial automation and processes. PROFINET IO defines how
controllers (IO controllers) and peripheral devices (IO devices) exchange data in real time.
The VE Series Smart Camera supports PROFINET IO. The data communication protocol is TCP/IP; the data transmission
medium is copper wire; the PROFINET conformance class is CC-A. 28

Note: In this document, outputs from the VE device are referred to as "inputs" to the controller (PLC).
Outputs from the controller (PLC) are referred to as "inputs" to the VE device.

14.6.1 General Station Description (GSD) File

The General Station Description (GSD) file contains module information, such as:
• Configuration data
• Data information (pass count, inspection status, etc.)
• Diagnostics

14.6.2 PROFINET® IO Data Model

The PROFINET IO data model is based on the typical, expandable field device that has a backplane with slots. Modules and
submodules have different functionalities.
Modules are plugged into slots; submodules are plugged into subslots. In the PROFINET IO data model, Slot 0 Subslot 1 is
reserved for the Device Access Point (DAP) or network interface.
Both modules and submodules are used to control the type and volume of data that is sent to the controller (PLC).
• A submodule is typically designated as input type, output type, or combined input/output type
• An input submodule is used to send data to the controller (PLC)
• An output submodule is used to receive data from the controller (PLC)
• The combined input/output submodule simultaneously receives and sends data in both directions

14.6.3 Configure the VE Series Smart Camera for a PROFINET IO

Connection
The VE Series camera and the controller (PLC) must be configured for PROFINET®.
1. On the System Settings screen, select Communications, then select the Industrial Protocols tab.
2. Select PROFINET from the Protocol list.
The sensor configuration is complete. Configure the PLC to complete the PROFINET connection.
27 PROFINET® is a registered trademark of PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V.
28 CC-A ensures that the device has the minimum properties regarding functionality and interoperability.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 221

VE Series Smart Camera

The default PROFINET configuration consists of a single module plugged into Slot 1. This module, called the Device Control
and Status Module, accepts two submodules: the Inspection Result Submodule, plugged into Subslot 1, and the Device
Control Submodule, plugged into Subslot 2.
The Inspection Result Submodule provides the inspection results from the VE Series camera, including Pass Count, Fail
Count, and Current Inspection Time. See Table 30 on p. 223.

Note: The Inspection Result Submodule does not provide any sensor-specific output data.

The Device Control Submodule allows the user to issue commands to the VE, such as Trigger, TEACH, and Product
Change. This submodule also provides the user with command feedback. See Table 31 on p. 224.

14.6.4 Description of Modules and Submodules

Table 26: Module Slot Assignment

Module
Slot 1 VE Control and Status Module
Slot 2 VE Output Module
Slot 3 VE Input Module

Table 27: VE Control and Status Module (Ident 0×000010)

Submodule Notes
Subslot 1 VE Inspection Results Submodule (see VE Always present.
Inspection Results Submodule on p. 223)
Subslot 2 VE Device Control Submodule (see VE Device Present by default, but can be removed.
Control Submodule on p. 224)

Table 28: Sensor Output Module (Ident 0×000040)

Submodule Notes
Subslot 1 Sensor output submodules (various) (see There are six versions of this submodule
Sensor Output Submodules on p. 228) supporting payloads of 16, 32, 64, 128, 256,
and 512 bytes.

Table 29: Sensor Input Module (Ident 0×000041)

Submodule Notes
Subslot 1 Sensor input submodules (see Sensor Input This module is input only.
Submodule on p. 229)

222 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

14.6.5 Description of Submodules

VE Inspection Results Submodule
The VE Inspection Result submodule contains inspection results and sends input data into the controller (PLC). This
submodule is plugged into Slot 1 Subslot 1 and cannot be removed.
Table 30: VE Inspection Result Submodule (Ident 0x000101)

Byte # PLC Input Data Name Input Data Type PLC Output Data Name Output Data Type

0–1 Inspection Status Word Unsigned16 Not applicable Not applicable

2–5 Inspection Number Unsigned32

6–9 Tool Pass/Fail Bits Unsigned32

10–13 Iteration Count Unsigned32

14–17 Pass Count Unsigned32

18–21 Fail Count Unsigned32

22–25 Missed Trigger Count Unsigned32

26–29 Current Inspection Time Unsigned32

Inspection Status Word

[Byte #].[Bit #] Word Bit Position Function

1.0 Bit 0 System Ready

1.1 Bit 1 Inspection Pass/Fail

1.3 Bit 3 Ready Latch

1.5 Bit 5 Output 1 ON/OFF

1.6 Bit 6 Output 2 ON/OFF

1.7 Bit 7 Output 3 ON/OFF

0.0 Bit 8 Output 4 ON/OFF

0.1 Bit 9 Output 5 ON/OFF

0.4 Bit 12 Missed Trigger

0.5 Bit 13 Teach Error

0.6 Bit 14 System Error

0.7 Bit 15 Execution Error

Tool Pass/Fail Bits

[Byte #].[Bit #] Dword Bit Position Function

9.0 Bit 0 Camera Tool Pass/Fail

9.1 Bit 1 Vision Tool 1 Pass/Fail

... ... ...

6.6 Bit 30 Vision Tool 30 Pass/Fail

6.7 Bit 31 Vision Tool 31 Pass/Fail

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 223

VE Series Smart Camera

VE Device Control Submodule

The VE Device Control Submodule contains controller (PLC) input and output data, including device controls for the VE. The
Device Control Submodule is plugged into Slot 1, Subslot 2 by default but it can be removed.
Table 31: VE Device Control Submodule (Ident 0x000001)

Byte PLC Input Data Name Input Data Type Byte PLC Output Data Name Output Data Type
# #

0-1 Device Control ACK Word Unsigned16 0-1 Device Control Command Word Unsigned16

2-5 Return Error Code Unsigned32 2-5 Product Change Number Unsigned32

Device Control ACK Word Device Control Command Word

[Byte #].[Bit #] Word Bit Position Function [Byte #].[Bit #] Word Bit Position Function

1.0 Bit 0 Product Change 1.0 Bit 0 Product Change

Acknowledgement
1.1 Bit 1 Teach Latch
1.1 Bit 1 Teach Latch
Acknowledgement 1.2 Bit 2 Trigger

1.2 Bit 2 Trigger Acknowledgement 1.6 Bit 6 Barcode Data Compare Input
String
1.6 Bit 6 Barcode Data Compare Input
String Acknowledgement 1.7 Bit 7 FTP Input String

1.7 Bit 7 FTP Input String

Acknowledgement

0.5 Bit 13 Teach Error

0.6 Bit 14 System Error

0.7 Bit 15 Execution Error

The following rules apply for the use of input bit commands:
• Only one VE Series camera input bit can be set at a time
• Corresponding ACK bits are set high only on completion of the command (if the VE input bit is still high)
• Corresponding ACK bits are cleared when the VE input bit is cleared
• When multiple VE input bits are set simultaneously, the Execution Error input bit is set and an Error Code value is
reported in the Error Code register
• The Execution Error VE output bit is cleared when a new valid command is completed
• The Teach Error output bit is set when a Match tool Teach command runs but fails to learn a new Pattern, such as for
insufficient contrast. It clears on the next trigger

224 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 373. Trigger—PROFINET Figure 374. Trigger Timing Diagram

Start Trigger

RPI 0 1 X X +Y X +Y+Z
Write 0 to Device
Control Command Word

Trigger
Make sure Camera is Ready – bit 0
is set to 1 in Inspection Status Word
Ready

Execute Trigger: set bit 2 of the

Device Command Word to 1 TriggerACK

Set Set
Trigger = 1 Trigger = 0
No
Is Trigger ACK (bit 2 in
Device Control ACK
word) set to 1?
Verify : Verify :
TriggerACK = ‘1 ’ Ready = 1
Ready = 1
Yes TriggerACK = 0
Read Results TriggerACK = 0

Is Execution Error (Device

Yes Read error code. Correct
Control ACK Word bit 15) set
the error condition X, Y, Z: Represent snapshots in time
to 1?

No

Trigger Successful. Read values as

required

Done

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 225

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 375. TEACH—PROFINET Figure 376. Teach Latch Timing Diagram

Teach Latch
Start

RPI 0 1 X X +Y X +Y+Z

Write 0 to Device
Control Command Word Teach
Latch

Make sure camera is ready – bit 0 is Ready

set to 1 in Inspection Status Word

Teach
Latch ACK
Execute Teach Latch: set bit 1 of the
Device Command Word to 1
Set Set
TeachLatch = 1 TeachLatch = 0

No
Is Teach Latch ACK (bit TeachLatch ACK
Verify : Verify :
1 in Device Control ACK Ready = 1 = ‘1 ’ Ready = 1
word) set to 1? TeachLatch ACK =0 Teach will TeachLatchACK =0
execute on next
trigger

Yes
X, Y, Z: Represent snapshots in time

Is Execution Error (Device

Yes Read error code. Correct
Control ACK Word bit 15) set
the error condition
to 1?

No

Teach Latch successful. The next

valid trigger teaches camera the new
condition. After that trigger, examine
bit 1 in the Inspection Status Word.
If it is set to 1, Teach was executed
successfully. If it is set to 0, Teach
was unsuccessful.

Done

226 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 377. Product Change—PROFINET Figure 378. Product Change Timing Diagram

Start
Product Change

RPI 0 1 X X+Y X+Y+Z

Write 0 to Device
Control Command Word

Product
Change
Write desired program number (as a
32-bit integer) into the Product
Change Number location
Ready

Make sure Camera is Ready – bit 0 Product

is set to 1 in Inspection Status Word Change
ACK

Set Set
ProductChange ProductChange
Execute Product Change: set bit 0 of =1 =0
the Device Command Word to 1

Verify : ProductChange Verify :

No Ready = 1 ACK = ‘1 ’ Ready = 1
Is Product Change ACK ProductChange New inspection ProductChange
(bit 0 in Device Control ACK = 0 is loaded ACK = 0
ACK Word) set to 1?

Yes
X, Y, Z: Represent snapshots in time

Is Execution Error (Device Read error code. Correct

Control ACK Word bit 15) set Yes
the error condition
to 1?

No

Product change successful

Done

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 227

VE Series Smart Camera

Sensor Output Submodules

The Sensor Output Submodules contain user-defined maps of sensor output data. There are six versions with 16, 32, 64,
128, 256, and 512 bytes, depending on the size of the output data. A sensor output submodule can be added to slot 2,
subslot 1.
Table 32: Sensor Output Submodule

Submodule PLC Input Data PLC Output Data

Name Ident No. Name Type Name Type

16-Byte Custom Map 0×000028 User-mapped Sensor Result Data Block 16-byte OctetString Not applicable Not applicable

32-Byte Custom Map 0×000029 User-mapped Sensor Result Data Block 32-byte OctetString Not applicable Not applicable

64-Byte Custom Map 0×000030 User-mapped Sensor Result Data Block 64-byte OctetString Not applicable Not applicable

128-Byte Custom Map 0×000031 User-mapped Sensor Result Data Block 128-byte OctetString Not applicable Not applicable

256-Byte Custom Map 0×000032 User-mapped Sensor Result Data Block 256-byte OctetString Not applicable Not applicable

512-Byte Custom Map 0×000033 User-mapped Sensor Result Data Block 512-byte OctetString Not applicable Not applicable

Tool-Specific Results: PROFINET

Configure the VE to output user-defined, tool-specific results to the PLC using a custom map.
The sensor output submodule includes both system-defined and user-defined results in the map. To set the user-defined,
tool-specific results, navigate: System Settings > Communications > Industrial Protocols.
Figure 379. Industrial Protocols Tab—PROFINET

The results are configurable only for the current inspection. However, all user-defined results in the custom map are shown
on the Industrial Protocols tab whether or not they are included in the current inspection. To make changes to a different
inspection, switch to the desired inspection and then make changes to the custom map. Updating the map does not
disconnect the sensor from the PLC.
To configure the map:

228 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

1. Click to add a new line to the map.

2. Set the Word/Register/Byte, Tool Name, and Result. See the following descriptions for more information.
3. Click Apply Changes to send the current map to the camera.

Important: Click Apply Changes or all user-defined data is lost when you click away from the
Industrial Protocols tab.

4. Click to print and save a PDF of the current map. The PDF includes all data, whether system-defined or user-
defined.
5. To return the map to the default settings, click . All user-defined output data is deleted.
Column descriptions:

Byte
The data location.
Inspection #
Shows whether this tool result applies to the current inspection only (inspection number) or to any inspection (ANY)
that includes the selected tool.
An Inspection # of ANY means that if an inspection includes a tool with the exact name (for example,
AverageGray01), the results are output. If an inspection does not have a tool with the exact name (for example
AverageGrayAssemblyLine01), no results are output for that tool and that inspection.
Tool Type
Displays a graphic that represents the type of tool selected in the Tool Name column.
Tool Name
Select the desired Tool Name from the list. The list includes the tools available in the current inspection only. Select
a different inspection from the inspection list, if necessary.
Result
The information to output.
Data Type
The type of information to output.
Actions
Click to delete a result.

Sensor Input Submodule

Ident 0×000130
Table 33: Sensor Input Module Definition for FTP File Name Control

Byte # PLC Data Name Data Type

0-3 Input String Length 32-bit integer
4 - 55 Input String String (52 Characters)

Table 34: Sensor Input Module Definition for Tool Input String Control

Byte # PLC Data Name Data Type

0-1 Tool Index 16-bit integer
2-3 Input String Length 16-bit integer
4 - 55 Input String String (52 Characters)

To use this submodule for FTP Filename control, the Industrial Protocol String checkbox must be selected. See Image
Export: FTP on p. 176.
To use this submodule for setting the Barcode Data Compare String, the Data Compare checkbox on the Test tab must be
selected. See Barcode Tool: Test Parameters on p. 147.
Note that you can switch back and forth between FTP File Name Control and Tool Input String Control as desired.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 229

VE Series Smart Camera

14.6.6 Configuration Instructions

Using Siemens TIA Portal (v15) Software
Installing the GSD File
Use these instructions to install the GSD file in the Siemens TIA Portal (v15) software. Use these instructions as a basis for
installing the GSD file in another controller (PLC).
1. Start the Siemens TIA Portal (v15) software.
2. Click Open existing project.
3. Select a project and open it.
4. Click Devices & networks after the project has been uploaded.
Figure 380. Devices and Networks

5. Click Configure networks.

230 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 381. Configure Networks

Network view displays.

6. Click Options and select Manage general station description file (GSD).
Figure 382. Options—Install the GSD

The Install general station description file window opens.

7. Click the browse button (...) to the right of the Source path field.
Figure 383. Manage GSD Files

8. Navigate to C:\Users\Public\Documents\Banner Vision Manager\VE Series\Industrial Protocols\Profinet.

9. Select the VE GSD file.
10. Click Install.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 231

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 384. Hardware Catalog

11. Click Close when the install finishes.

12. Click Devices & networks.
The system installs the VE GSD file and places it in the Hardware catalog. In the above example, the VE GSD file is
located under Other field devices > PROFINET IO > Sensors > Banner Engineering Corp. > Banner Vision
Sensors > VE Series Vision Sensor > VE Series > VE.

Note: If the VE GSD file does not install properly, save the log and contact Banner Engineering
Corp..

Adding a Device to a Project

Use these instructions to add a VE Series camera device to a Siemens TIA Portal (v15) project, and to configure the device.
Use these instructions as a basis for adding a VE Series camera device to another controller (PLC).
1. Start the Siemens TIA Portal (v15) software.
2. Click Open existing project.
3. Select a project and open it.
4. Click Devices & networks after the project has been uploaded.

232 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 385. Devices and Networks

5. Click Configure networks.

Figure 386. Configure Networks

Network view displays.

Note: For Step 6 through Step 10, Network view must be open.
6. Locate the VE Series camera in the Hardware catalog.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 233

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 387. Hardware Catalog

In the above example, the VE device is located under Other field devices > PROFINET IO > Sensors > Banner
Engineering Corp > Banner Vision Sensors > VE Series Vision Sensor > VE Series > VE.
7. Select the device and add it to the configuration.
Selection Option Description
Drag Drag the VE from the Hardware catalog directly into the configuration.
Double-click Double-click on the VE and add it to the configuration.
8. Click the green square on the VE icon. Drag the pointer to the green square on the PLC_1 icon to connect the device
to the controller (PLC).
Figure 388. Drag to Connect

The connection is made.

9. Double-click the VE icon to open the Device window.

234 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 389. Device Overview Tab

10. Select the desired modules or submodules from the Hardware catalog and drag them onto the Device overview tab
on the Device view tab.
The VE device is configured.

Changing the Device IP Address

Use these instructions to change the IP address of the VE device, using the Siemens TIA Portal (v15) software. Use these
instructions as a basis if you are using another controller (PLC).
1. Start the Siemens TIA Portal (v15) software.
2. Click Open existing project.
3. Select a project an open it.
4. Click Devices & networks after the project has been uploaded to go to Network view.
Figure 390. Network View

Network View displays.

5. Double-click on the VE icon to open the Device view.
6. Click on the VE icon in the graphic area of the Device view to open the Module properties window.
The module can now be configured.
7. Click Properties.
8. Click General.
9. Select PROFINET interface > Ethernet addresses.
Figure 391. Ethernet Addresses

10. Select Set IP address in the project.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 235

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 392. Set IP Address

The project sets the IP address of the device.

11. Enter the IP address.
12. Right-click on the device icon and select Online & diagnostics.
Figure 393. Select Online & Diagnostics

Figure 394. Online & Diagnostics

The Online & diagnostics window displays.

13. Select Assign IP address under Functions.
14. Click Accessible devices.

236 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 395. Assign IP Address—Accessible Devices

The Select device window searches the network for available devices.
15. Determine the device to be adjusted via the MAC address and select it.
Use the Vision Manager software to find the MAC address: Home > Sensor Neighborhood > Active Sensors.
16. Click Apply.
Figure 396. Select the Device and Apply Changes

The IP address for the device is updated.

17. Click Assign IP address to complete the step.
This step is completed for every device.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 237

VE Series Smart Camera

Note: PROFINET devices commonly lack an IP address on startup (IP address = all zeros). However, VE
devices require an IP address to connect to Vision Manager to set the device configuration.
By default, each Banner Engineering Corp. device shipped from the factory is assigned the IP address
192.168.0.1. The default address can be changed using the Vision Manager software.
Immediately after the PROFINET protocol has been enabled in the Banner Engineering Corp. device, but
before the PLC discovers and connects to the Banner Engineering Corp. device, the Banner Engineering
Corp. device will retain its IP address. After the PLC discovers and connects to the Banner Engineering
Corp. device, the behavior of the IP address depends on how the PLC was configured to assign the
Banner Engineering Corp. device IP address. Two configuration options are available.
Figure 397. Siemens TIA Portal (v15): IP Protocol Options

• The IP address is set in the project: If the PLC is told to assign the Banner Engineering Corp.
device IP address (for example, using the Set IP address in the project option in Siemens TIA
Portal), the Banner Engineering Corp. device receives the specified address, but only after the
program has been loaded into the PLC and is running.
If the Banner Engineering Corp. device is restarted after it was discovered and configured by the
PLC, the Banner Engineering Corp. device has an IP address of 0.0.0.0 until the PLC discovers it
and assigns it the specified address again.
When the Banner Engineering Corp. device has no IP address assigned, it is still possible to
assign an IP address to the Banner Engineering Corp. device using Vision Manager. However, if
this address is different than what is specified in the PLC, the Banner Engineering Corp. device
reverts to the address specified in the PLC when the PLC becomes active again.
• The IP address is set at the device: If the PLC is told that the Banner Engineering Corp. device IP
address is configured at the device (for example, using the IP address is set directly at the
device option in Siemens TIA Portal), the Banner Engineering Corp. device always retains the IP
address that was assigned to through Vision Manager.
These configuration options conform to the PROFINET standard.

Changing the Device Name

Use these instructions to change the name of the VE device, using the Siemens TIA Portal (v15) software. Use these
instructions as a basis if you are using another controller (PLC).
1. Open a project and click on Devices & networks to go to the Network view.
Figure 398. Network View

Network view displays.

2. Double-click on the VE icon to open Device view.
3. Click on the VE icon in the graphic area of Device view to open the Module properties window.
4. Click General.
5. Select PROFINET interface [X1] > Ethernet addresses.

238 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 399. Ethernet Addresses

6. Deselect Generate PROFINET device name automatically.

Figure 400. PROFINET Device Name

7. Enter a unique name in the PROFINET device name field.

8. Enter a unique device number in the Device number field.

Note: Each device number is used only once.

9. Right-click on the device icon and select Online & diagnostics.
Figure 401. Select Online & Diagnostics

Figure 402. Online & Diagnostics

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 239

VE Series Smart Camera

The Online & diagnostics window displays.

10. Select Assign PROFINET device name under Functions.
The Assign PROFINET device name window displays. The devices in the network are discovered.
11. Select the device that will have a name assigned to it.
12. Click Assign name to start the process.
The name is assigned.
Figure 403. Assign Name

The project can be downloaded to the PLC to test the connection and check for errors.

14.7 Troubleshooting

14.7.1 Industrial Ethernet Error Codes

The VE Series camera provides error codes when coil bit commands fail to execute successfully.
If such an error occurs, the Execution Error flag is set in the Output Bits/Status Register. When this bit is set, read the Error
Code register to know the reason for the failure.
Error Text ID Description Recommended Solution
Code

520 IE_COIL_ACTION_FAILED The coil action resulted in a failure. Clear all coil bits. Verify that the corresponding
acknowledgement bits are reset to zero. The
error code clears when the next valid command
is issued.
Make sure the related data is set correctly. For
example, the Input String Length must be > 0
for Input String coil actions.

521 IE_COIL_ALREADY_BUSY The coil was asserted before the previous Verify that the corresponding acknowledgement
execution completed. bit gets set. Then clear all coil bits and try
again.

522 IE_COIL_NOT_FINISHED The coil was de-asserted prior to the execution Verify that the corresponding acknowledgement
completing. bit gets set. Then clear all coil bits and try
again.

523 IE_COIL_ANOTHER_ACTION_PENDING The coil was asserted prior to another coil Verify that the corresponding acknowledgement
execution completing. bit gets set. Then clear all coil bits and try
again.

240 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Error Text ID Description Recommended Solution

Code

524 IE_COIL_MULTIPLES_DETECTED Multiple coils were asserted simultaneously. Clear all coil bits. Verify that the corresponding
acknowledgement bits are reset to zero. The
error code clears when the next valid command
is issued.

525 IE_COIL_ACK_INHIBITED The coil action's output ACK was inhibited Keep the corresponding coil bit set during the
because the input coil was no longer set. execution period.

10252 COMMAND_NOT_FINISHED Attempt to issue command when a previous Wait for acknowledgement of the previous
command has not finished command before issuing a new command.

10900 SENSOR_NOT_READY Command specified requires the device to be in Verify that the sensor bootup or product change
the READY state. operation is complete. Use of ONLINE output
signal is recommended.

80200 SYSTEM_ERROR_NOT_ACTIVE The System Error must be active to execute When no system error is active, do not set the
this command bit to clear system errors.

80300 TEACH_SENSOR_TYPE_INVALID Teach requires Match or Barcode tool. Execute a teach command only when a Match
or Barcode tool is present in the currently
running inspection.

80400 PRODUCT_CHANGE_WHEN_NOT_READ The sensor must be in the Ready state to Clear the Product Change bit. Verify that the
Y perform a product change. Product Change acknowledgement bit has
been reset to zero. Wait until the sensor is
Ready. Re-assert the Product Change bit.

80401 PRODUCT_CHANGE_INVALID_INSPECTI Attempt to product change to a unknown or Clear the Product Change bit. Verify that the
ON invalid inspection. Product Change acknowledgement bit has
been reset to zero. Set the inspection slot to a
valid value. Re-assert the Product Change bit.

80403 PRODUCT_CHANGE_TO_SAME_INSPEC Attempt to product change to the same Product change to a different inspection.
TION inspection.

80410 SET_DATACOMPARE_STRING_FAILED Attempt to set the Barcode Data Compare Make sure the Barcode tool being edited exists
string failed. in the current inspection.

14.7.2 PROFINET
Discovering VE Series camera Devices
The Siemens TIA Portal (v13) software discovery and configuration protocols are used to discover VE Series camera devices
on a network.
1. Start the Siemens TIA Portal (v13) software.
2. Click Open an existing project.
3. Select a project and open it.
4. Click Devices & networks after the project has been uploaded.
5. Click Configure networks.
6.
Click the Accessible devices icon.
The Accessible devices window opens.
7. Select an interface connection in the Type of the PG/PC interface list.
8. Select an interface connection in the PG/PC interface list.
Figure 404. PG/PC Interface

The PC scans the network for PROFINET® devices. If the device you are looking for is not present, check the
cabling.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 241

VE Series Smart Camera

Example of Scanning Results

Under Online status information, the scan shows that three devices were found.
Figure 405. Select Device—Online Status Information

Diagnosing Errors
The Siemens TIA Portal (v15) software includes numerous diagnostic tools. When a computer is connected to the controller
(PLC), diagnostic information is available. The controller (PLC) generates a message that displays in the Diagnostics
window. A flashing red light on the CPU module of the controller (PLC) indicates an error.
1. Click on the text in the Details column to request detailed information about the device that caused the error.
Figure 406. Diagnostics

All system and device messages are displayed in the Diagnostics buffer window under Events and Details on
event.
2. Select a message in the table, Display CPU Time Stamps in PG/PC local time.

242 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 407. Diagnostics Buffer

The respective information displays in the Description field under Details on event.
3. Read the message to learn about the error and resolve it. When the error is resolved, the icon that corresponds to the
displayed message is green.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 243

VE Series Smart Camera

15 Webserver Image Viewing

The webserver automatically refreshes live images from the VE.
Access the images using a URL. The URL is the IP address of the VE followed by /liveimage.html. For example, a VE
with the IP address 192.168.0.195 has a URL of: http://192.168.0.195/liveimage.html
The default resolution of the image using this URL is 640 × 480 pixels, regardless of the native resolution of the VE. The
default refresh interval is 1 second, regardless of the total inspection time or the camera trigger rate.
The webserver is also capable of delivering a single (non-refreshing) image file from the URI. For example, a VE with the IP
address 192.168.0.195 would deliver a file with the name 192.168.0.195/sensor/liveimage.bmp.

15.1 Image Size

All images sent from the Webserver are 8-bit grayscale Windows bitmaps (.bmp).
The default size of the images is 640 × 480 pixels. To preserve the aspect ratio of the raw image., a smaller version of the
raw camera image is centered in a 640 × 480 frame and black pixels are added around the image as needed.

In the following figure, a WVGA model VE (752 × 480 raw image) has a smaller Figure 408. WVGA image in 640 × 480 frame
version of the raw image (represented by the gray box) centered within the 640 ×
480 frame. Black pixels are added to both the top and bottom because the height
of the raw picture is smaller than the height of the frame. The aspect ratio of the
raw VE image is preserved, creating a scaled 640 × 408 raw image inset in the
640 × 480 frame.

It is possible to access an image larger than 640 × 480 pixels. To do this, use a slightly different URL format that includes the
desired width and height and refresh rate within the URL. For example: http://192.168.0.195/
liveimage_w800_h600_r250.html.
In this format, the “w” and “h” are the desired width and height, in pixels, of the frame, and the “r” is the desired refresh rate,
in milliseconds. The maximum frame size is W = 1920 pixels and H = 1080 pixels. The minimum refresh value is 250
milliseconds.
In the following example, a 5 MP model VE has a smaller version of the raw Figure 409. 5 MP image in 800 × 600 frame
image (represented by the gray box) centered within a custom 800 × 600 frame.

Note: This is the custom frame size specified in the example

URL, above.

In this case, preserving the 5 MP aspect ratio requires a 759 × 600 raw image to
be centered within the 800 × 600 frame.

Reduce the presence of black fill pixels by choosing a frame size proportional to the raw image size of the desired VE. The
table below shows the maximum width and height image sizes, based on VE model used.

Example
Resolution Width, maximum Height, maximum Aspect Ratio
Width Height
WVGA 752 480 1.33 500 320
1.3 MP 1280 1024 1.57 500 400
29
2 MP 1600 1200 1.25 500 376
29 29
5 MP 2592 2048 1.27 500 396

Note: To ensure maximum compatibility with all browser and computer types, the width and height values
should be divisible by 4.

29 The maximum size image available via the Webserver is 1920 w × 1080 h.

244 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

15.2 Images on Example HMIs

On a Human Machine Interface (HMI), the size of the embedded web component should match the URL framed output
image size. See the following examples.

Allen-Bradley PanelView Plus 7 Performance Series HMI

On an Allen-Bradley PanelView Plus 7 Performance Series HMI, the web component used to display the image is called ME
Web Browser Control. When entering the image URL, use double quotes around the URL string.
Figure 410. Example URL with double quotes entered in an Allen-Bradley ME Web Browser Control

Siemens Simatic TP 1500 HMI

On a Siemens Simatic TP 1500 HMI, the web component used to display the image is called HTML Browser. Enter the URL
in Properties > General, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 411. Example URL in a Siemens TP 1500 HTML Browser

Proface Win GP Windows Runtime HMI

On a Proface Win GP Windows Runtime HMI (SP5000 Series Open Box, PS5000 Series IPC, and General Windows PC),
use the Switch Feature Special Switch to start an external application and to pass a parameter with the required URL.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 245

VE Series Smart Camera

Figure 412. GP Pro-EX Software Special Switch part used to Start Application, pointed to web browser with IP address Parameter

RedLion HMI
On a RedLion HMI, the IP Camera protocol is used to make a connection to the image webserver.
Enter the following information:
• IP Address—The IP address of the sensor
• Port Number—80
• Image URI—The path to the bitmap image component served from the webserver
For display, use a Camera primitive linked to this IP Camera protocol. Make sure the Camera primitives's frame size is equal
to or larger than the image requested. Alternatively, you can use the scale options in the Camera primitive properties screen.

Note: Polling for an image more frequently than every 100 ms is not recommended.

Figure 413. RedLion IP Camera protocol selection

246 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

15.3 Images on a Web Browser

When viewed from a desktop PC web browser, the framed output image webpage automatically refreshes.
A VE with the IP address 192.168.0.195 has a URL of: http://192.168.0.195/liveimage.html
Figure 414. 5 MP image in 800 × 600 frame (web browser)

The image component (a single, non-refreshing image) can also be accessed via a web browser. For example, a VE with the
IP address 192.168.0.195 would deliver a file with the name 192.168.0.195/sensor/liveimage_w500_h396.bmp.
Figure 415. WVGA Image Bitmap (web browser)

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 247

VE Series Smart Camera

16 Troubleshooting
Problem Solution
The Vision Manager software will not connect to my sensor Make sure that:
• The sensor is powered on
• The sensor is connected to the computer or the
network
• You are connecting to the correct sensor (verify the
sensor name and IP address)
The image is not clear Make sure that:
• The lens is properly screwed onto the sensor
• The lens is clean
• The lens is properly focused (see Acquire a Good
Image on p. 18)
No images appear in the Image pane Make sure that:
• The exposure is correct (run Auto Exposure)
• The sensor is receiving trigger signals
I changed a test parameter but the test does not seem to be Make sure that the test parameter checkbox is selected to
working enable the test parameter

Depending on the situation, a message may appear on the computer screen. These messages include an identification
number, a message description, and a list of recommended solutions. There is also an option to send a report to Banner
Engineering.

16.1 Vision Manager Error Codes

Error Code Description Recommended Solution
10000 The sensor's feature set is too old • Update the sensor firmware to a version compatible with this
to work with this version of Vision application
Manager. • Install an older version of this application
10001 The sensor's feature set is too new • Install an newer version of this application
to work with this version of Vision • Downgrade the sensor firmware to a version compatible with
Manager. this application
10005 The sensor was not found at the • Verify the sensor is energized
specified IP address. Network PING • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
results indicate no device present at • Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
the specified IP address. configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
10010 A connection to the sensor could • Verify the sensor is energized
not be established. One or more • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
required channels failed to connect. • Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor

248 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Error Code Description Recommended Solution

10011 A connection to the sensor could • Verify the sensor is energized
not be established. One or more • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
required channels failed to connect • Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor
10012 A connection to the sensor could • Verify the sensor is energized
not be established. A timeout • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
occurred connecting required • Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
channels. configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor
10020 A connection to the sensor could • Verify the sensor is energized
not be established. One or more • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
required channels failed to connect. • Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor
10021 A connection to the sensor could • Verify the sensor is energized
not be established. One or more • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
required channels failed to connect. • Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 249

VE Series Smart Camera

Error Code Description Recommended Solution

10022 The connection to the sensor was • Verify the sensor is energized
lost while sending data. • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
• Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor
10023 The connection to the sensor was • Verify the sensor is energized
lost while receiving data. • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
• Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor
10024 The connection to the sensor was • Verify the sensor is energized
lost while receiving data. • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
• Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor
10025 The connection to the sensor was • Verify the sensor is energized
lost while receiving data. • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
• Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor

250 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Error Code Description Recommended Solution

10026 The connection to the sensor was • Verify the sensor is energized
lost while receiving data. • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
• Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor
10027 The connection to the sensor was • Verify the sensor is energized
lost. • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
• Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor
10040 The device at the specified IP • Disconnect the other application and try again
address is already connected to • Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
another application. This can
happen when another Vision
Manager is already connected to
the sensor.
10041 The device at the specified IP • Verify the sensor's firmware version is compatible with this
address rejected the connection application
attempt. This can happen when the • Verify the device at the specified IP address is a Banner Vision
network device does not support sensor
the Vision Manager protocol.
10050 The connection to the sensor was • Verify the sensor is energized
lost. • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
• Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor
10051 The connection to the sensor was • Verify the sensor is energized
lost. • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
• Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 251

VE Series Smart Camera

Error Code Description Recommended Solution

10053 The connection to the sensor was • Verify the sensor is energized
lost while receiving data. • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
• Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor
10054 The Connection to the sensor was • Verify the sensor is energized
lost while receiving data. • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
• Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor
10055 The Connection to the sensor was • Verify the network adaptor link speed and duplex settings
lost due to network keep alive • Verify the is sensor not stalled, or in shutdown mode
expiration.
10070 The Connection to sensor was lost • Verify the is sensor not stalled, or in shutdown mode
due to a receive state machine • Verify the sensor is supported by this version
error.
10071 The Connection to sensor was lost • Verify the is sensor not stalled, or in shutdown mode
due to a receive state machine • Verify the sensor is supported by this version
error.
10080 The Connection to sensor was lost. • Verify the sensor is energized
• Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
• Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor
10085 A connection to the sensor could • Verify the sensor is energized
not be established. One or more • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
required channels failed to connect. • Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor

252 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Error Code Description Recommended Solution

10086 The connection to the sensor was • Verify the sensor is energized
lost while receiving data. • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
• Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor
10091 Receiving data from the sensor • Verify the network adaptor link speed and duplex settings
timed out (no data was received). • Verify the is sensor not stalled, or in shutdown mode
The connection to the sensor was
aborted by this application.
10092 Receiving data from the sensor • Verify the network adaptor link speed and duplex settings
timed out (partial data was • Verify the is sensor not stalled, or in shutdown mode
received). The connection to the
sensor was aborted by this
application.
10093 A parsing error was detected while • Verify the network adaptor link speed and duplex settings
receiving data from the sensor. The • Verify the is sensor not stalled, or in shutdown mode
connection to the sensor was
aborted by this application.
10094 A receive overrun was detected • Verify the network adaptor link speed and duplex settings
while receiving data from the • Verify the is sensor not stalled, or in shutdown mode
sensor. The connection to the
sensor was aborted by this
application.
10095 Receiving data from the sensor • Verify the network adaptor link speed and duplex settings
timed out (internal error). The • Verify the is sensor not stalled, or in shutdown mode
connection to the sensor was
aborted by this application.
10096 A transmit timeout occurred while • Verify the network adaptor link speed and duplex settings
sending data to the sensor (no data • Verify the is sensor not stalled, or in shutdown mode
was sent). The connection to the
sensor was aborted by this
application.
10097 A transmit timeout occurred while • Verify the network adaptor link speed and duplex settings
sending data to the sensor (partial • Verify the is sensor not stalled, or in shutdown mode
data was sent). The connection to
the sensor was aborted by this
application.
10100 The connection to the sensor was • Install an newer version of this application
lost while sending data. • Verify the device at the specified IP address is a Banner Vision
sensor
• Verify the sensor's firmware version is compatible with this
application
• Check the firewall setup on computer
• Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
10101 The connection to the sensor was • Install an newer version of this application
lost while sending data. • Verify the device at the specified IP address is a Banner Vision
sensor
• Verify the sensor's firmware version is compatible with this
application
• Check the firewall setup on computer
• Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 253

VE Series Smart Camera

Error Code Description Recommended Solution

10110 The connection to the sensor was • Install an newer version of this application
aborted by this application due to • Verify the device at the specified IP address is a Banner Vision
an internal processing error. sensor
• Verify the sensor's firmware version is compatible with this
application
• Check the firewall setup on computer
• Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
10111 The connection to the sensor was • Install an newer version of this application
aborted by this application due to • Verify the device at the specified IP address is a Banner Vision
an internal processing error. sensor
• Verify the sensor's firmware version is compatible with this
application
• Check the firewall setup on computer
• Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
10120 The connection to the sensor was • Install an newer version of this application
aborted by this application due to • Verify the device at the specified IP address is a Banner Vision
an internal processing error. sensor
• Verify the sensor's firmware version is compatible with this
application
• Check the firewall setup on computer
• Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
10125 The connection to the sensor was • Install an newer version of this application
aborted by this application due to • Verify the device at the specified IP address is a Banner Vision
an internal processing error. sensor
• Verify the sensor's firmware version is compatible with this
application
• Check the firewall setup on computer
• Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
10126 The connection to the sensor was • Install an newer version of this application
aborted by this application due to • Verify the device at the specified IP address is a Banner Vision
an internal processing error. sensor
• Verify the sensor's firmware version is compatible with this
application
• Check the firewall setup on computer
• Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
10140 The Connection to the sensor was • Install an newer version of this application
lost due to network keep alive • Verify the device at the specified IP address is a Banner Vision
expiration. sensor
• Verify the sensor's firmware version is compatible with this
application
• Check the firewall setup on computer
• Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
10150 The connection to the sensor was • Install an newer version of this application
aborted by this application due to • Verify the device at the specified IP address is a Banner Vision
an internal processing error. sensor
• Verify the sensor's firmware version is compatible with this
application
• Check the firewall setup on computer
• Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
10190 The connection to the sensor was • Install an newer version of this application
aborted by this application due to • Verify the device at the specified IP address is a Banner Vision
an internal threading error. sensor
• Verify the sensor's firmware version is compatible with this
application
• Check the firewall setup on computer
• Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor

254 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Error Code Description Recommended Solution

10300 Vision Manager and the sensor's • Install the version of this application which matches the release
release types must exactly match. of the sensor
Release types are specified as part • Update the sensor firmware to match the release type of this
of the version (e.g. ALPHA, BETA, application
EVAL). The connection was aborted
by this application.
10900 The file selected for firmware • Select a firmware update file which is supported by this
update is not valid for use with this application
application.
10910 The file selected for firmware • Install an older version of this application
update is too old to work with this
application.
10911 The file selected for firmware • Install an newer version of this application
update is too new to work with this
application.
10912 The firmware update process timed • Verify the sensor is energized
out. • Verify the is sensor not stalled, or in shutdown mode
• Reboot the sensor
20000 An application error occurred while • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
refreshing the display. An
unhandled exception was detected.
20001 An application error occurred while • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
refreshing the display. There was a
problem parsing data from the
sensor.
20010 An application error occurred while • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
refreshing the display. There was a
problem creating screen elements.
20011 An application error occurred while • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
refreshing the display. There was a
problem releasing screen elements.
20020 An application error occurred while • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
refreshing the display. There was a
problem synchronizing data.
20021 An application error occurred while • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
refreshing the display. There was a
problem releasing data resources.
20030 An application error occurred while • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
refreshing the display. There was a
problem synchronizing with the
inspection.
20040 An application error occurred while • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
refreshing the display. There was a
problem updating input data.
20041 An application error occurred while • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
refreshing the display. There was a
problem updating result data.
20050 This application detected an error • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
while refreshing the display. There
was a problem rendering the image.
20060 An application error occurred while • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
refreshing the display. There was a
problem updating pixel annotations.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 255

VE Series Smart Camera

Error Code Description Recommended Solution

20061 An application error occurred while • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
refreshing the display. There was a
problem updating pixel annotations.
20070 An application error occurred while • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
refreshing the display. There was a
problem updating vector
annotations.
20071 An application error occurred while • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
refreshing the display. There was a
problem updating vector
annotations.
20072 An application error occurred while • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
refreshing the display. There was a
problem releasing vector
annotations.
20073 An application error occurred while • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
refreshing the display. There was a
problem releasing display elements.
20100 There was a problem using the • Verify the user has access to the file
specified file.
20101 An invalid file format was detected. • Verify the selected file is compatible with this application
20103 The maximum number of tools has • Remove some tools from the device
been added to the device.
20104 There was a problem restoring the • Call Banner Customer Support
selected file to the sensor.
20105 There was a problem creating the • Call Banner Customer Support
backup of the sensor.
20130 There was a problem viewing the • Install an newer version of this application
selected inspection log.
20150 Connection to the emulator failed. • Call Banner Customer Support
20151 There was an error starting the • Reinstall this application
emulator. • Check the firewall setup on computer
20152 The selected emulator could not be • Reinstall this application
found. • Check the firewall setup on computer
20153 There was a problem closing the • Reboot the computer to end any processes which did not shut
previous emulator session. down properly
20154 There was a problem closing the • Reboot the computer to end any processes which did not shut
previous emulator session. down properly
20155 There was a problem closing the • Reboot the computer to end any processes which did not shut
previous emulator session. down properly
20156 There was a problem closing the • Reboot the computer to end any processes which did not shut
previous emulator session. down properly
20157 There was an error starting the • Reinstall this application
emulator. • Check the firewall setup on computer
20158 There was an error starting the • Reinstall this application
emulator. • Check the firewall setup on computer
20159 There was an error starting the • Reinstall this application
emulator. • Check the firewall setup on computer

256 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Error Code Description Recommended Solution

20160 Another emulator session is • Close the other Vision Manager currently connected to the
currently running. Only one emulator
emulator session can be run at a • Reboot the computer to end any processes which did not shut
time. down properly
20203 Uploading the image to the sensor • Reboot the sensor
failed due to timeout. • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
• Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor
20208 Downloading the inspection from • Reboot the sensor
the sensor failed due to a timeout. • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
• Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor
20209 Inspection download invalid • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
parameter. • Reboot the sensor
• Update the sensor firmware to the latest version
• Update the Vision Manager Application to the latest version
20210 Downloading the inspection from • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
the sensor failed (inspection not • Reboot the sensor
found). • Update the sensor firmware to the latest version
• Update the Vision Manager Application to the latest version
20211 Downloading the inspection from • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
the sensor failed (invalid header • Reboot the sensor
detected). • Update the sensor firmware to the latest version
• Update the Vision Manager Application to the latest version
20212 Downloading the inspection from • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
the sensor failed (incompatibility • Reboot the sensor
detected). • Update the sensor firmware to the latest version
• Update the Vision Manager Application to the latest version
20215 Uploading the inspection to the • Reboot the sensor
sensor failed due to a timeout. • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
• Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 257

VE Series Smart Camera

Error Code Description Recommended Solution

20216 Uploading the inspection to the • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
sensor failed due to an invalid • Reboot the sensor
parameter. • Update the sensor firmware to the latest version
• Update the Vision Manager Application to the latest version
20219 Upload inspection to sensor failed. • Update the sensor firmware to the latest version
The inspection being uploaded • Update the Vision Manager Application to the latest version
contains features which are not
compatible with the sensor.
20231 A firmware update error was • Verify the sensor is energized
detected. • Verify the is sensor not stalled, or in shutdown mode
• Reboot the sensor
• Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
• Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor
20232 A firmware update timeout was • Reboot the sensor
detected. • Verify the sensor communication cable is connected
• Verify all inline network equipment is energized, properly
configured and connected
• Verify all required network equipment cables are connected
• Verify the network adaptor is properly configured
• Verify the sensor IP address is valid
• Verify there are no other devices using the same IP address
• Verify the sensor subnet is valid
• Verify the sensor can be successfully pinged
• Verify the network firewall settings support connection to the
sensor
20233 A maintenance service internal • Go to Sensor Neighborhood and reconnect to the sensor
error was detected. • Reboot the sensor
• Update the sensor firmware to the latest version
• Update the Vision Manager Application to the latest version
20400 An application error occurred while • Update the sensor firmware to the latest version
applying the new industrial protocol • Update the Vision Manager Application to the latest version
settings. The settings will be
reverted to their previous value.
20500 An application error occurred while • Call Banner Customer Support
applying the new data export
settings. The settings will be
reverted to their previous value.
20600 An application error occurred while • Call Banner Customer Support
applying the new user profile
settings. The settings will be
reverted to their previous value.
30151 Firmware update cannot proceed. • Disconnect the other application and try again
Selected sensor may be connected
to another Vision Manager
application
30152 Firmware update cannot be • Reboot the sensor
completed due to internal error.

258 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Error Code Description Recommended Solution

30153 Firmware update cannot be • Reboot the sensor
completed due to internal error.
30154 Firmware update cannot be • Reboot the sensor
completed due to internal error.
30155 Firmware update cannot be • Reboot the sensor
completed due to internal error.
30156 Firmware update cannot be • Reboot the sensor
completed due to internal error.
30157 Firmware update cannot be • Reboot the sensor
completed due to internal error.
30199 Firmware update cannot be • Call Banner Customer Support
completed due to internal error.

16.2 VE Error and Warning Codes

ID Description Recommended Solution
1 - 999 Internal System Error • Clear the error using Vision Manager or Industrial Ethernet
• If the error occurs repeatedly, contact Banner Engineering
1008 Inspection at selected slot contains Delete the inspection and recreate it using current firmware or emulator
unsupported settings.
1009 Inspection marked as Startup A new inspection will be created with default settings
Inspection could not be loaded at
bootup.
1100 Inspection was created with Scaled Review the inspection parameter settings. If this behavior is not
Units enabled. Inspection modified desired, verify that the Scaled Units settings are set as required by the
as Scaled Units feature is currently inspection.
disabled.
1101 Inspection was created with Scaled Review the inspection parameter settings. If this behavior is not
Units disabled. Inspection modified desired, verify that the Scaled Units settings are set as required by the
as Scaled Units feature is currently inspection.
enabled.
1102 Inspection was created with Review the inspection parameter settings. If this behavior is not
different Scaled Units settings. desired, verify that the Scaled Units settings are set as required by the
Inspection modified to match inspection.
current Scaled Units settings.
1103 Current inspection settings modified Review the inspection parameter settings
to match current firmware version.
1104 Inspection was created using Recreate this inspection with the current firmware version
features which are incompatible
with current firmware and is not
allowed to be loaded.
1111 Formatted inspection results The data included for export exceeds capacity of this channel. Remove
exceed the maximum output size. some items to export.
1112 Data export timed out. • Verify that the receiving application is running and connected
• Verify that the network bandwidth is sufficient to transmit the
data
1113 Image export timed out. • Verify that the receiving application is running and connected
• Verify that the network bandwidth is sufficient to transmit the
data

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 259

VE Series Smart Camera

ID Description Recommended Solution

1200-1290 Device boot error. • Check that the power to device is within recommended levels
and is stable
• Check that the device is properly grounded as recommended in
the Instruction Manual
• Verify that electric static noise around the device does not
exceed CE specifications
• If the error still persists, contact Banner Engineering

16.3 TCP and UDP Port Numbers

The following TCP and UDP ports are used for full communication between the VE sensor and the control system (PC, PLC,
HMI, etc.).
If firewall or antivirus software is interfering with the use of the VE sensor, use this information to modify the firewall or
antivirus settings.

Port Number Protocol Description

0-1024 TCP+UDP Telnet, FTP, HTTP, etc.
502 TCP+UDP ModbusTCP
2222 UDP EtherNet/IP IO
19995 UDP Sensor Discovery
32000 TCP Command Channel default port 30
32100 TCP Data Export default port 30
32200 TCP Image Export default port 30
38510-38534 TCP Sensor to GUI communication
38536-38539 UDP Discovery Ports
34962-38964 TCP+UDP PROFINET
44818 TCP EtherNet/IP UCMM
49162 TCP+UDP PROFINET

30 These are the default port numbers, however they can be changed in the Vision Manager software. They cannot be changed to any port number
that is already in use.

260 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

17 Accessories
17.1 Cordsets
All measurements are listed in millimeters [inches], unless noted otherwise.
Power, Discrete I/O Cordsets
I/O sealed high-flex cordsets, 12 flying leads
12-Pin M12 Cordsets with Open Shield

Model Length Style Dimensions Pinout (Female)

MQDC2S-1206 2 m (6.56 ft)

44 Typ.
MQDC2S-1215 5 m (16.40 ft)
1 = White
MQDC2S-1230 9 m (29.53 ft) Straight 2 = Brown
M12 x 1 8 3 = Green
MQDC2S-1250 16 m (52.49 ft) 12 9
ø 14.5 4 = Yellow
MQDC2S-1275 23 m (75.46 ft) 7 1 5 = Gray
6 = Pink
MQDC2S-1206RA 2 m (6.56 ft) 6 10
32 Typ. 7 = Blue
[1.26"] 5
MQDC2S-1215RA 5 m (16.40 ft) 2 8 = Red
11 3 9 = Orange
MQDC2S-1230RA 9 m (29.53 ft) 30 Typ. 4 10 = Light Blue
Right Angle [1.18"]
11 = Black
12 = Violet
MQDC2S-1250RA 16 m (52.49 ft) M12 x 1
ø 14.5 [0.57"]

Ethernet Cordsets
RJ45 Ethernet to 8-Pin Threaded M12 Cordsets

Model Length Style Dimensions Pinout

STP-M12-806 1.83 m (6 ft)

STP-M12-815 4.57 m (15 ft)

1 = White/Black
RJ45
2 = White/Brown
3 = Brown
Straight, Cat5e 47.4 Typ.
4 = Orange
Shielded 5 = White/Green
STP-M12-830 9.14 m (30 ft) 1 6 = White/Orange
7 7 = Blue
M12 x 1.0 - 6g
ø 14.5 2 6 8 = Green
3
5
4
8

The following Ethernet cables are used with 4-pin D-code Ethernet models only.
4-pin M12 D-code to RJ45 Shielded Ethernet

Model Length Style Dimensions Pinout (Male)

STP-M12D-406 1.83 m (6 ft)

2 1
STP-M12D-415 4.57 m (15 ft)
RJ45
3 4
Straight 47.4 Typ.
1 = White/ 1 = White/
STP-M12D-430 9.14 m (30 ft) Orange Orange
2 = Orange 2 = White/
3 = White/ Blue
M12 x 1.0 - 6g Blue 3 = Orange
ø 14.5 6 = Blue 4 = Blue

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 261

 VE Series Smart Camera

17.2 Brackets
All measurements are listed in millimeters [inches], unless noted otherwise.

SMBVERA 73 SMBVEMP 60
• Right-angle mounting • Painted black aluminum
4 x ø3.3
bracket with curved slots • Adapter holes for thru ø7.0
• 12-gauge stainless steel mounting hardware
• M3 × 0.5 mounting 4Xø3.5 81 2 x M8 x 1.25
hardware included 3 x 10-32 88

47 2 x 1/4-20
7
1/4-20

17.3 Lenses
Additional models are available. See www.bannerengineering.com.
Table 35: C-Mount Megapixel Lens Focal Length—For use with WVGA, 1.3MP, or 2MP models

Focal Compatible with Compatible with Sealed Compatible with 60 mm Compatible with 85 mm
Model Brand
Length Unsealed Ring Light Ring Light Sealed Lens Cover Sealed Lens Cover

5 mm LCF05LCMP 31 Computar No Yes Yes No

Yes, with setscrews

6 mm LCF06LEVMP 31 Evetar Yes Yes No
removed

LCF08LMP Computar Yes, with LHWK-1 Yes Yes No

8 mm
Yes, with setscrews
LCF08LEVMP Evetar Yes Yes No
removed

LCF12LMP Computar Yes, with LHWK-1 Yes Yes No

12 mm
Yes, with setscrews
LCF12LEVMP 31 Evetar Yes Yes No
removed

LCF16LCMP Computar Yes, with LHWK-1 Yes Yes Yes

16 mm
Yes, with setscrews
LCF16LEVMP Evetar Yes Yes Yes
removed

LCF25LCMP Computar Yes, with LHWK-1 Yes Yes Yes

25 mm
Yes, with setscrews
LCF25LEVMP Evetar Yes Yes Yes
removed

LCF35LCMP Computar Yes, with LHWK-1 Yes Yes Yes

35 mm
Yes, with setscrews
LCF35LEVMP Evetar Yes Yes Yes
removed

LCF50LCMP Computar Yes, with LHWK-1 Yes Yes Yes

50 mm
Yes, with setscrews
LCF50LEVMP 31 Evetar No Yes
removed

LCF75LCMP Computar Yes, with LHWK-1 No No Yes

75 mm
Yes, with setscrews
LCF75LEVMP 31 Evetar No No Yes
removed

31 Denotes specific lens used for 2MP WD and FOV examples.

262 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Table 36: C-Mount Megapixel Lens Focal Length—For use with WVGA, 1.3MP, or 2MP models

Compatible with Sealed Ring Compatible with 60 mm Sealed Compatible with 85 mm Sealed
Focal Length Model Brand
Light Lens Cover Lens Cover

6 mm LCF06LK1F Kowa No No No

8 mm LCF08LK1F Kowa No No No

12 mm LCF12LK1F Kowa Yes, with LHWK-1 Yes No

16 mm LCF16LK1F Kowa Yes, with LHWK-1 Yes Yes

25 mm LCF25LK1F Kowa Yes, with LHWK-1 Yes Yes

35 mm LCF35LK1F Kowa Yes, with LHWK-1 Yes Yes

50 mm LCF50LK1F Kowa Yes, with LHWK-1 No Yes, with LHWK-1

75 mm LCF75LK1F Kowa Yes, with LHWK-1 No Yes, with LHWK-1

17.3.1 WVGA Lens Working Distance and Field of View

For use with VE200G1A models.
Table 37: C-Mount Standard Lens Focal Length—Working Distance and Field of View

4 mm 32 8 mm 12 mm 16 mm

WD (mm) Approximate Horizontal × Vertical Field of View (FOV) in mm

150 162 × 103 71 × 45 46 × 29 32 × 20

600 656 × 419 303 × 193 198 × 126 141 × 90

1500 1646 × 1050 767 × 489 500 × 319 360 × 230

FOV (mm) Approximate Working Distance (WD) in mm

100 × 64 94 206 310 430

300 × 192 276 594 905 1253

600 × 384 549 1177 1798 2488

Figure 416. Working Distance and Field of View

WD

VER
TICA
FOV
L HORIZONTAL

17.3.2 1.3 MP Lens Working Distance and Field of View

For use with VE201G1A models.
Table 38: C-Mount Megapixel Lens Focal Length—Working Distance and Field of View

6 mm 8 mm 12 mm 16 mm 25 mm 35 mm 50 mm 75 mm

WD (mm) Approximate Horizontal × Vertical Field of View (FOV) in mm

150 130 × 104 100 × 80 66 × 53 - - - - -

600 629 × 503 469 × 375 318 × 254 229 × 183 147 × 118 111 × 89 71 × 57 -

32 Using a 0.25 mm spacer (LEKS).

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 263

 VE Series Smart Camera

6 mm 8 mm 12 mm 16 mm 25 mm 35 mm 50 mm 75 mm

1500 1628 × 1302 1207 × 966 822 × 658 598 × 478 381 × 305 289 × 231 191 × 153 124 × 99

FOV (mm) Approximate Working Distance (WD) in mm

100 × 80 123 151 211 286 420 547 820 1227

300 × 240 303 395 569 774 1189 1557 2312 3474

600 × 480 574 760 1104 1505 2343 3072 4551 6845

Figure 417. Working Distance and Field of View

WD

VER
TICA
FOV
L HORIZONTAL

17.3.3 2 MP Lens Working Distance and Field of View

For use with VE202G1A and VE202G2A models.
Table 39: C-Mount Megapixel Lens Focal Length—Working Distance and Field of View

5 mm 6 mm 8 mm 12 mm 16 mm 25 mm 35 mm 50 mm 75 mm

WD (mm) Approximate Horizontal × Vertical Field of View (FOV) in mm

150 188 × 141 140 × 105 126 × 95 72 × 54 55 × 41 36 × 27 - - -

600 822 × 617 663 × 498 549 × 411 340 × 255 259 × 194 164 × 123 114 × 86 75 × 56 47 × 35

1500 2091 × 1568 1710 × 1283 1393 × 1045 874 × 656 667 × 500 422 × 317 300 × 225 205 × 154 132 × 99

FOV (mm) Approximate Working Distance (WD) in mm

100 × 75 88 - 122 196 248 376 531 774 1160

300 × 225 229 288 335 533 690 1074 1500 2161 3263

600 × 450 442 545 655 1038 1353 2120 2950 4241 6417

Figure 418. Working Distance and Field of View

WD

VER
TICA
FOV
L HORIZONTAL

264 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

17.3.4 5 MP Lens Working Distance and Field of View

For use with VE205G1A models.
Table 40: C-Mount Megapixel Lens Focal Length—Working Distance and Field of View

6 mm 8 mm 12.5 mm 16 mm 25 mm 35 mm 50 mm 75 mm

WD (mm) Approximate Horizontal × Vertical Field of View (FOV) in mm

300 565 × 446 415 × 328 265 × 209 211 × 167 138 × 109 93 × 73 - -

600 1212 × 957 887 × 701 566 × 447 445 × 352 289 × 228 200 × 158 130 × 103 -

1500 3154 × 2492 2305 × 1821 1469 × 1161 1147 × 906 742 × 586 521 × 412 352 × 278 233 × 184

FOV (mm) Approximate Working Distance (WD) in mm

200 × 158 - 164 235 286 424 600 884 1299

400 × 316 224 291 434 543 821 1160 1697 2511

800 × 632 409 545 833 1056 1614 2282 3322 4935

Figure 419. Working Distance and Field of View

WD

VER
TICA
FOV
L HORIZONTAL

17.4 C-Mount Lens Filter Models

Use filters to improve the image contrast and system reliability in vision applications.
For additional filter information, see p/n 173239.
Family Color - Size

25.5 (25.5 mm)

B470 ( Blue) 27 (27 mm)
G525 (Green) 30.5 (30.5 mm)
I850 (Infrared) 34 (34 mm)
FLT - (dash)
R635 (Red) 35.5 (35.5 mm)
R660 (Dark Red) 43 (43 mm)
PR032 (Linear Polarizer) 46 (46 mm)
55 (55 mm)

Filters are available in six sizes, specific to the inside thread diameter of the lens. Use the table below to select the
corresponding filter for these common C-mount lens types.
Size Lens Option

25.5 mm Edmund Optics, Tamron

27 mm Ricoh, Evetar (8 mm, 12 mm, 16 mm, 25 mm, 35 mm)

30.5 mm Computar (8 mm, 12 mm, 16 mm, 25 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, 75 mm), Evetar (50 mm 33)

34 mm Evetar (6 mm, 75 mm)

33 The filter is not compatible with this lens with the sealed ring light installed.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 265

VE Series Smart Camera

Size Lens Option

35.5 mm Kowa (12 mm, 16 mm, 25 mm, 35 mm) 34

40.5 mm Kowa (50 mm)

43 mm Computar (5 mm)

46 mm Kowa (75 mm) 33

55 mm Kowa (8 mm)

Important: These filters are for the C-mount lens only. Depending on the lighting technique used, a
polarizing filter may be needed for both the lens and the light source. See www.bannerengineering.com for
Banner's selection of light filters.

17.5 Sealed Lens Cover

When used, the optional sealed lens covers offer an IP67 rating for the sensor for wet or dirty environments. The cover is
painted black aluminum.
The following sealed lens covers are compatible with all VE models, but not all lens and filter combinations. For details, see
Lenses on p. 262 and C-Mount Lens Filter Models on p. 265.
Model Length Material Window Material

VELC60-PC Polycarbonate
60 mm
VELC60-BG Borosilicate glass
Painted aluminum
VELC85-PC Polycarbonate
85 mm
VELC85-BG Borosilicate glass

17.6 Display Cover

Use the Display Cover to protect the display and buttons from the elements.

VEDC-BG
• Painted anodized
aluminum with
borosilicate glass window
• Mounting hardware
included

17.7 Ring Lights

For additional ring light information, see the following:
• p/n 192656 for standard lights
• p/n 192657 for high intensity lights
• p/n 208788 for sealed ring lights
Additional (standalone) lights are available. See www.bannerengineering.com.
Unsealed ring lights do not fit over the lens set screw knobs. Pair them with Computar lenses with the LHWK-1 recessed
screw accessory packet to hold the lens adjustment positions securely.
Due to the size of the 5 MP lenses, unsealed ring lights cannot be mounted to the 5 MP camera. However, they can be
mounted nearby, connected to and controlled by the camera. For details on the compatibility of lens and filter combinations,
see Lenses on p. 262 and C-Mount Lens Filter Models on p. 265
34 The filter is not compatible with this lens with the 60 mm sealed lens cover installed.

266 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

Standard Ring Lights

62 × 62 mm Models 80 × 80 mm Models LED Color Connection

LEDIRV62X62M LEDIRV80X80M Infrared, 940 nm

LEDRRV62X62M LEDRRV80X80M Visible red, 630 nm 300 mm (12 in) cable with a threaded 3-pin
M8 connector
LEDWRV62X62M LEDWRV80X80M White, all visible
The light connects directly to the VE Series
LEDBRV62X62M LEDBRV80X80M Visible blue, 464 nm to 475 nm smart cameras.

LEDGRV62X62M LEDGRV80X80M Visible green, 520 nm to 540 nm

High Intensity Ring Lights

Model LED Color Intensity Adjustment Connection

LEDRRV70XD5-XM Visible red, 620 nm to 630 nm

LEDWRV70XD5-XM White, 5000 K to 8300 K

LEDBRV70XD5-XM Visible blue, 465 nm to 485 nm

Fixed
LEDGRV70XD5-XM Visible green, 520 nm to 535 nm

LEDIRV70XD5-XM Infrared, 850 nm

300 mm (12 in) cable with a threaded
LEDUV395RV70XD5-XM Ultraviolet, 395 nm
3-pin M8 connector
LEDRRV70XD5-PM Visible red, 620 nm to 630 nm Connects directly to the VE Series
smart cameras.
LEDWRV70XD5-PM White, 5000 K to 8300 K

LEDBRV70XD5-PM Visible blue, 465 nm to 485 nm

Potentiometer
LEDGRV70XD5-PM Visible green, 520 nm to 535 nm

LEDIRV70XD5-PM Infrared, 850 nm

LEDUV395RV70XD5-PM Ultraviolet, 395 nm

High-Intensity Sealed Ring Light

Model LED Color Window Construction Connection

LEDIRV75BM Infrared, 850 nm ±5 nm

LEDRRV75BM Visible red, 625 nm ±5 nm

LEDBRV75BM Visible blue, 475 nm ±5 nm Borosillicate Glass

LEDGRV75BM Visible green, 525 nm +10 nm/-5 nm

350 mm (13.8 in) cable with a 3-pin M8
LEDWRV75BM Visible white, 6200K +500K/-550K
quick disconnect
LEDIRV75PM Infrared, 850 nm ±5 nm The light connects directly to the VE
Series smart cameras.
LEDRRV75PM Visible red, 625 nm ±5 nm

LEDBRV75PM Visible blue, 475 nm ±5 nm Polycarbonate Plastic

LEDGRV75PM Visible green, 525 nm +10 nm/-5 nm

LEDWRV75PM Visible white, 6200K +500K/-550K

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 267

VE Series Smart Camera

17.8 Interface Module

For additional interface module information, see p/n 193821.
Models Trigger Connections

VESIM-PT Current Sourcing (PNP) Two 13-pin Terminals

268 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

 VE Series Smart Camera

18 Product Support and Maintenance

18.1 Repairs
Contact Banner Engineering for troubleshooting of this device. Do not attempt any repairs to this Banner device; it
contains no field-replaceable parts or components. If the device, device part, or device component is determined to be
defective by a Banner Applications Engineer, they will advise you of Banner's RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
procedure.

Important: If instructed to return the device, pack it with care. Damage that occurs in return shipping is not
covered by warranty.

18.2 Maintenance
Maintenance tasks include keeping the hardware free of dust and dirt and updating the Vision Manager software and sensor
firmware as new versions become available.

18.2.1 Clean the VE

Regularly remove any dust or dirt from the sensor using a soft cloth.
If needed, slightly dampen the cloth with a weak solution of neutral detergent. Avoid getting dirt on the imager (the area
behind the lens). If the imager is dirty, use anti-static compressed air to blow off the dust.

18.2.2 Clean the Lens

Regularly remove dust, dirt, or fingerprints from the lens.
Use anti-static compressed air to blow off dust. If necessary, use a lens cloth and lens cleaner or window cleaner to wipe off
remaining debris.

18.2.3 Update the Software and Firmware

The current version of Vision Manager software and the device firmware is available for download from
www.bannerengineering.com.

18.3 Contact Us
Banner Engineering Corp. headquarters is located at:
9714 Tenth Avenue North
Minneapolis, MN 55441, USA
Phone: + 1 888 373 6767
For worldwide locations and local representatives, visit www.bannerengineering.com.

18.4 Banner Engineering Corp Limited Warranty

Banner Engineering Corp. warrants its products to be free from defects in material and workmanship for one year following
the date of shipment. Banner Engineering Corp. will repair or replace, free of charge, any product of its manufacture which, at
the time it is returned to the factory, is found to have been defective during the warranty period. This warranty does not cover
damage or liability for misuse, abuse, or the improper application or installation of the Banner product.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE), AND WHETHER ARISING UNDER COURSE OF PERFORMANCE, COURSE OF DEALING
OR TRADE USAGE.
This Warranty is exclusive and limited to repair or, at the discretion of Banner Engineering Corp., replacement. IN NO
EVENT SHALL BANNER ENGINEERING CORP. BE LIABLE TO BUYER OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY FOR
ANY EXTRA COSTS, EXPENSES, LOSSES, LOSS OF PROFITS, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR
SPECIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY PRODUCT DEFECT OR FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PRODUCT, WHETHER ARISING IN CONTRACT OR WARRANTY, STATUTE, TORT, STRICT LIABILITY, NEGLIGENCE,
OR OTHERWISE.

www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767 269

VE Series Smart Camera

Banner Engineering Corp. reserves the right to change, modify or improve the design of the product without assuming any
obligations or liabilities relating to any product previously manufactured by Banner Engineering Corp. Any misuse, abuse, or
improper application or installation of this product or use of the product for personal protection applications when the product
is identified as not intended for such purposes will void the product warranty. Any modifications to this product without prior
express approval by Banner Engineering Corp will void the product warranties. All specifications published in this document
are subject to change; Banner reserves the right to modify product specifications or update documentation at any time.
Specifications and product information in English supersede that which is provided in any other language. For the most
recent version of any documentation, refer to: www.bannerengineering.com.
For patent information, see www.bannerengineering.com/patents.

270 www.bannerengineering.com - Tel: + 1 888 373 6767

Index
Bead tool D
1D barcode 141 bead width 70
2D barcode 143, 144 filters 70 DAP 221
input parameters 67–71 data export
A results 72 settings 44
ROI 67, 73 Data Matrix 143, 144
absolute threshold test parameters 72 data model 221
edge profile 102, 117, 135 using 75 DataBar 141
value 102, 117, 135 bead type decimal places 55
Active Sensors tab 24 adaptive threshold 68, 84 delete
adaptive threshold fixed threshold 69 inspection 21, 36
bead type 68, 84 Blemish tool tool 21
blob type 68, 84 input parameters 78–80 tool and tools after 21
administrator 57 results 81 Device Access Point
All Results 33 test parameters 80 , See DAP
area 88 device control 224
using 81
area range 85 discrete I/O
blob statistics 85
auto exposure 59 configure 22
Blob tool
Auto Learn 141 display 167–170
input parameters 83–87
Average Gray tool DISPLAY 170
results 87–89, 91
test parameters 65 display menu 170
statistics 85
input parameters 63–65 duplicate 21
test parameters 87
results 66 using 91
using 66 blob type E
adaptive threshold 68, 84
fixed threshold 69 EAN-13 (UPC-A) 141
B
bracket 262 EAN-8 141
backup 26, 27, 166 buttons ECC200 143, 144
bandwidth 41 lock 167 eccentricity 91
barcode edge length range
1D 141 Blemish tool 79
C edge polarity 95, 102–104, 110,
2D 143, 144
Auto Learn 141 116–118
calibration 48, 49, 52, 53
Codabar 141 edge profile
Camera tool
Code 128 141 absolute threshold 102, 117,
results 62
Code 39 141 135
using 59–62
Code 93 141 edge strength threshold 104,
centroid 88
Data Matrix 143, 144 118, 136
characteristics
DataBar 141 relative threshold 103, 116, 134
Measure tool 157
EAN-13 (UPC-A) 141 edge strength threshold
Circle Detect tool
EAN-8 141 edge strength 104, 117, 135
input parameters 94–96
ECC200 143, 144 Edge tool
results 97
IMb 145 input parameters 100–106
test parameters 97
Intelligent Mail 145 results 106
using 98
Interleaved 2 of 5 141 test parameters 106
Codabar 141
max count 141 using 107, 159
Code 128 141
PDF417 141 emulator
Code 39 141
Pharmacode 141 backup 27, 166
Code 93 141
postal 145 restore 27, 166
communications 41–46
POSTNET 145 ETHER 169
compactness 89
QR 143, 144 Ethernet
copy 21, 36
UPC-E 141 communications 179
cordset 261
Barcode tool settings 41
cover
input parameters 140, 141, EtherNet/IP 43
lens 266
143–146 export
CRC
results 148 system logs 47
inspection 35–38
ROI 140 exposure
system 38
test parameters 147 auto 59
Cyclic Redundancy Check
using 148 , See CRC external strobe 61
F delete 21, 36 Match tool
manage 36, 37 input parameters 125–128
factory default 58 modify 21 remote TEACH 132
Favorites tab name 20 results 129
add 24 save 20, 37, 38 test parameters 128
remove 24 set up 18–21 using 130
filters summary 30 Math tool
Bead tool 70 transfer 37, 38 input parameters 151–153
blob tool 85 Inspection Logs operand A 152
Edge tool 104 sources 34 operand B 153
lens 13, 265 Inspection Logs screen 34, 35 operator 151
Locate tool 118 Inspection Management screen results 153
Object tool 136 35–38 test parameters 153
firmware inspection results 223 using 154
update 26 Intelligent Mail 145 max barcode count 141
version 26 interface 167 max radius 91
fixed threshold interface module 268 max radius position 91
bead type 69 Interleaved 2 of 5 141 measure from 157
blob type 69 IO 169 measure to 157
focus information 61 Measure tool
L characteristics 157
G input parameters 156–158
language measure from 157
gain 59 selection of 28 measure to 157
General Station Description lens results 159
, See GSD test parameters 158
1.3 MP 263
grade 145 min radius 91
2 MP 264
GSD min radius position 91
5 MP 265
Install 230 minor axis length 89
cover 13, 266
filter 13, 265 Modbus/TCP 43
H WVGA 263 models 6
light
histogram ring 13, 266
, See tool histogram N
Line Detect tool
Home screen 23–28 Network Adapters tab 25
input parameters 109–111
results 112
I ROI 109 O
Search For 110
I/O Object tool
test parameters 112
discrete 39–41 input parameters 132–137
using 113
summary 31 results 138
Locate tool
IMAGE 169 test parameters 138
input parameters 114–120
image export using 139
results 121
ftp 176 object type 134–136
test parameters 120
settings 45 operand 151, 161
using 122
TCP/IP 173 operand A 152
Logic tool
image menu 169 operand B 153
input parameters 162, 163
image overlays 64, 70, 79, 86, 95, operation 151
results 163
105, 111, 119, 127, 137, operator 151
test parameters 163
146, 157 operator1 57
using 164
imager 59 operator2 57
logs
IMb 145
inspection 34, 35
indicators, LED 8
system logs 47 P
Industrial Protocols 43
INFO 169 password 56, 57
information menu 169 M Password
input string change 57
major axis angle 89
settings 46 pattern
major axis length 89
Input/Output 169 Match tool 126
Manage 36, 37
inspection PC Requirements 10
mask
begin at startup 37 PCCC 43
add 64, 68, 78, 83
copy 36 PCHANGE 169
delete 64, 68, 78, 83
CRC 35–38 PDF417 141
percent screen Bead tool 72
relative threshold 103, 116, 134 Home 23–28 Blemish tool 80
percent match 126 Inspection Logs 34, 35 Blob tool 87
perimeter 88 Inspection Management 35–38 Circle Detect tool 97
Pharmacode 141 Sensor 29–33 Edge tool 106
pixel intensity range 64 System Settings 38–49, 52, 53, Line Detect tool 112
postal barcode 145 55–58 Locate tool 120
POSTNET 145 Search For 110 Logic tool 163
precision 55, 127 search ROI 125 Match tool 128
preferences 28 sensitivity 79 Math tool 153
product change 169 sensor Measure tool 158
PROFINET 43, 221–224, 228–230, backup 26 Object tool 138
232, 235, 238 boot count 38 summary 32
firmware version 38 threshold
Q gateway 38 absolute 101, 102, 116, 117,
hour count 38 134, 135
QR 143, 144 IP address 38 adaptive 68, 69, 84
MAC address 38 edge polarity 95, 102–104, 110,
menu 168 116–118
R
model number 38 edge strength 103, 104, 117,
reboot 58 name 38 118, 135, 136
REBOOT 170 reset 58 fixed 69, 85
reboot menu 170 restore 26 object type 134–136
reject level 69, 84 serial number 38 reject level 69, 84
relative threshold subnet mask 38 relative 102, 103, 115, 116,
edge profile 103, 116, 134 Sensor Maintenance 26 133, 134
percent 103, 116, 134 Sensor Neighborhood 24, 25 timeout 127, 145
remote TEACH Sensor screen 29–33 tool
Barcode tool 147 serial 42 add 18
Match tool 132 software Average Gray 63–66
reset 58 information 28 Barcode 140, 141, 143–148
restore 26, 27, 166 version number 28 Bead 67–73, 75
results Vision Manager 9 Blemish 77–81
Average Gray tool 66 strobe Blob 82–89, 91
Barcode tool 148 external 61 Circle Detect 93–98
Bead tool 72 submodule description 223, 224, copy 21
Blemish tool 81 228, 229 delete 21
Blob tool 87–89, 91 supported submodules 223, 224, delete tool and after 21
Camera tool 62 228, 229 Edge 100–107
Circle Detect tool 97 symbol grade 145 Line Detect 109–113
Edge tool 106 SYSERR 170 Locate 114–122
Line Detect tool 112 system CRC 38 Logic 161–164
Locate tool 121 system error menu 170 Match 124–130, 132
Logic tool 163 System Settings screen 38–49, 52, Math 151–154
Match tool 129 53, 55–58 Measure 155–159
Math tool 153 Object 132–139
Measure tool 159 T rename 19
Object tool 138 tool histogram 65, 71, 80, 86, 96,
ring light 13, 266 tab 105, 111, 120, 128, 137,
ROI (Region of Interest) About 28 146
Barcode tool 140 Active Sensors 24 Tools & Results 32
Bead tool 67, 73 All Results 33 Tools Only 33
Line Detect tool 109 Favorites 24 Transfer 37, 38
search 125 Network Adapters 25 trigger 60
teach 126 Tools & Results 32 trigger mode 180
rotation range 126 Tools Only 33
TEACH U
, See remote TEACH
S teach ROI 126 units 48, 49, 52, 53
test UPC-E 141
save 20, 37, 38
Average Gray tool 65 use as reference 119, 127
scale units 49
Barcode tool 147 user 56, 57
scaling 49

273
User profiles 57 V
add 56 users 56, 57
user name 57 username 56, 57 Vision Manager
user name 57 about 28
user profile 56, 57 version number 28
user profiles